JP7633955B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines, arrange ball machines, and slot machines.

Some pachinko machines have a large image display means such as a liquid crystal display means located approximately in the center of the playing area of a game board attached to the main body of the game machine, and display various presentation images, notification images, etc. on the image display means during play (see Patent Document 1) .

JP 2015-192899 A

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to easily and reliably recognize important notification contents while performing a predetermined transformation process on an image on an image display means .

The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a frame body having a viewing window through which a gaming area can be viewed, an image display means capable of displaying an image on a display screen, a launching means for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on the operation of a launching handle, and an effect execution means for executing a specific effect by performing a predetermined transformation process on an image displayed on the image display means, the frame body having a replaceable unit portion, the gaming area being provided on the front side of a gaming board attached to the frame body, the gaming board having a gaming member disposed on the front side of the display screen, and a movable body configured to be operable in front of the display screen and capable of stopping at a predetermined stopping position including an origin position, and the display screen corresponds to the rear side of the gaming member when viewed from the front. a second display area corresponding to the rear side of the stop position of the movable body, and a third display area which is neither the first display area nor the second display area, the second display area including a specific second display area corresponding to the rear side of the origin position of the movable body, a preview effect image relating to the reliability of the occurrence of a profit state can be displayed on the display screen, the preview effect image being configured with a first display section suggesting the reliability and a second display section other than that, the first display section being displayable in the third display area, the second display section being displayable across the specific second display area and the third display area, and the image display means is configured to display a left flow down path and a right flow down path in the game area according to a game state. a launch guiding image that indicates which of the above paths is advantageous for a player to aim at, the launch guiding image includes a figure that indicates one of the left flow-down path and the right flow-down path, and for a specific image that does not include the launch guiding image and has transformation information indicating that a specific transformation process is to be performed, the specific transformation process is performed, and for a non-specific image that includes the launch guiding image, the specific transformation process is not performed, and the performance execution means has a primary buffer area and a frame buffer area as areas for drawing the images to be displayed on the image display means, and depending on whether or not the specific transformation process is to be performed, for an image that is to be subjected to the specific transformation process during the execution of the specific performance , The method is configured to execute a first drawing process for drawing an image via a frame buffer area for an image that does not undergo the specified transformation process when the specific performance is executed , and a second drawing process for drawing an image without going through the primary buffer area for an image that does not undergo the specified transformation process when the specific performance is executed.The specific image is stored in the primary buffer area, and then the first drawing process is executed to draw the image into the frame buffer area by performing the specified transformation process based on vertex coordinate information and rotation angle information when the specific performance is executed.The method is configured to execute a second drawing process for drawing the non-specific image into the frame buffer area without going through the primary buffer area and without performing the specified transformation process when the specific performance is executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible for the player to easily and reliably recognize important notification contents while a predetermined transformation process is being performed on the image on the image display means .

1 is an overall front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a plan cross-sectional view of the game board of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an oblique view of the game board of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the front part of the game board of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the rear part of the game board of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the rear part of the game board of the pachinko machine. 2 is an explanatory diagram of the image display area of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of the image display area of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko machine. 13 is a diagram showing the probability of winning and fluctuation time of normal symbols for each game state of the pachinko machine, and the opening and closing pattern of the second special symbol starting means. FIG. This figure shows an example of the correspondence between jackpot determination random number values, jackpot pattern random number values, jackpot states, and special game states when determining a jackpot and a miss for the first and second special patterns of the same pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation pattern of the pachinko machine. This figure shows an example of the reserved base image, reserved display image, and changing reserved image of the same pachinko machine. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of left-hit guiding images and right-hit guiding images of the pachinko machine. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an error notification image of the pachinko machine. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of a volume adjustment notification image and a light intensity adjustment notification image of the same pachinko machine. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of a volume setting image and a light intensity setting image of the pachinko machine. A figure showing a flowchart of the customer waiting presentation processing of the pachinko machine. A figure showing a flowchart of menu management processing of the same pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing performed when the effect button of the pachinko machine is pressed. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a process when the up key (down key) of the pachinko machine is pressed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a menu display possible notification image of the pachinko machine. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of a menu image and a menu operation notification image of the pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lower-level menu image of the pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display when a selection item that does not have a subordinate menu of the same pachinko machine is selected. 2A to 2C are diagrams showing the arrangement of movable bodies in each mode of the pachinko machine. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a power saving mode notification image of the pachinko machine. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the pachinko machine when the machine is in a waiting state for customers (FIG. 1A), and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the correspondence between each image and an area on the display screen (FIG. 1B). 1A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed when the menu of the pachinko machine is displayed, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the correspondence between each image and an area on the display screen. 1A is a diagram showing an example of image display during normal fluctuations of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the correspondence between each image and an area on the display screen. 13A is a diagram showing an example of image display during reach fluctuations of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the correspondence between each image and an area on the display screen. 13A is a diagram showing an example of image display during the step-up preview performance of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the correspondence between each image and an area on the display screen. 13A is a diagram showing an example of an image display of the button conversation preview performance of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the correspondence between each image and an area on the display screen. 13A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed when a button is operated during the button conversation preview performance of the same pachinko machine, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the correspondence between each image and an area on the display screen. 13A shows an example of the image display of the first stage in the mini-character preview performance of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 13B shows the correspondence between each image and an area on the display screen. 13A shows an example of the image display of the second stage in the mini-character preview performance of the same pachinko machine, and FIG. 13B shows the correspondence between each image and the area on the display screen. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine relating to a second embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a plan cross-sectional view of the game board of the pachinko machine. 1A and 1B are a plan view and a front view, respectively, of the tilt movable performance means of the pachinko machine. 1A and 1B are a plan view and a front view, respectively, of the lifting and lowering movable performance means of the pachinko machine. 4A to 4C are diagrams showing the operation patterns of the movable bodies of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a conceptual block diagram of the image transformation process of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an image rotation process of the pachinko machine. 11 is an explanatory diagram of the image rotation process of the pachinko machine. A figure showing the changes in the movable body and displayed image when the tilt preview performance of the same pachinko machine is executed. A figure showing an example of the display priority and transformation information for each image when the tilt preview performance of the same pachinko machine is executed. This figure shows the change in the displayed image when a door opening error or volume change operation occurs while the tilt preview performance is being performed on the same pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of the display priority and transformation information for each image when the tilt descent preview performance of the same pachinko machine is executed. A figure showing an example of the display priority and transformation information for each image when the tilt descent preview performance of the same pachinko machine is executed. A diagram showing the changes in the movable body and displayed image when a tilt preview performance is executed at the start of pattern change in this pachinko machine. A figure showing an example of the display priority and transformation information of each image when a tilt preview performance is executed at the start of pattern change in this pachinko machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation history of the movable body and each image when the tilt preview performance is executed at the start of the pattern change in the same pachinko machine. A diagram showing the changes in the movable body and displayed image when the tilt descent preview effect is executed at the start of the pattern change in this pachinko machine. This figure shows an example of the display priority and transformation information for each image when the tilt descent preview effect is executed at the start of pattern change in this pachinko machine. This figure shows an example of the operation history of the movable body and each image when the tilt descent preview effect is executed at the start of the pattern change in the same pachinko machine. This figure shows the movable body and displayed image (a) when a tilting effect is performed on the pachinko machine while waiting for customers, the display priority and deformation information of each image displayed on the image display means (b), and the display priority and deformation information of each image displayed on the sub-image display means (c). This figure shows the movable body and displayed image (a) when a menu display operation is performed while the tilt effect is being executed on the same pachinko machine, the display priority and deformation information of each image displayed on the image display means (b), and the display priority and deformation information of each image displayed on the sub-image display means (c). FIG. 11 is an overall front view of a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the rear side of the pachinko machine. FIG. This is a plan cross-sectional view of the portion including the front frame and game board. This is a plan cross-sectional view of a portion including the front frame, game board and joint portion. A vertical cross-sectional view of the upper side including the front frame and game board. A vertical cross-sectional view of the lower side including the front frame and game board. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is an oblique view of the rear side of the game board. This is a plan cross-sectional view of a portion including the front frame, game board and movable performance means. FIG. 2 is a front view of the portion including the mounting frame and movable performance means. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the movable performance means. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the stage portion of the game board. FIG. 2 is a plan cross-sectional view of the central display frame. FIG. 2 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the central display frame. FIG. FIG. This is a plan cross-sectional view of a portion including the game board and main control board case. 2 is a plan cross-sectional view of a portion including the game board and harness receiving base. FIG. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the installation process of the game board. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a display area of the image display means. 11A to 11C are explanatory diagrams of a process of attaching the image display means. A rear view of a game board according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an oblique view of the rear side of the game board. FIG. 2 is an oblique view of the rear side of the game board. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting frame and the side board mounting base. 2 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a portion including the game board, image display means, and performance control board case. FIG. 2 is a vertical cross-sectional view of a portion including the game board, the image display means, and the side board mounting base. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a portion including the game board and the upper guide rail. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a portion including the game board and image display means. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a portion including the game board, image display means, and performance control board case. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the harness receiving base portion of the same. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the harness fastener in an attached state. FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a main part of the display unit mounting portion. FIG. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the mounting frame and the image display means. 11A to 11C are explanatory diagrams of a process of attaching the image display means. FIG. 13 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a partially cutaway side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main part of the outer frame. FIG. 2 is another enlarged cross-sectional view of the outer frame. FIG. FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the rear side of the locking portion of the front door. FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the locking portion of the front door. FIG. 4 is a plan sectional view of an upper protrusion of the side unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a plan sectional view of the side unit. FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the second side unit. FIG. 4 is a side view of the second side unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the second side unit. FIG. 2 is a front cross-sectional view of the luminous decorative part. FIG. 2 is a front cross-sectional view of the luminous decorative part. FIG. 2 is a plan cross-sectional view of the luminous decorative part. FIG. 4 is a front cross-sectional view of the blower section of the second side unit. 4 is a side cross-sectional view of the blower section of the second side unit. FIG. 4 is a plan cross-sectional view of the blower section of the second side unit. FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a positioning means of the second side unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a locking means of the second side unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the locking means of the second side unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a locking means of the second side unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a fixing means of the second side unit. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a fixing means of the second side unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the front frame and front door. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of the pachinko machine in an upright state. FIG. 2 is a partially cutaway side view of the operation presentation means side. FIG. 2 is a side cross-sectional view of the operation presentation means side. FIG. 2 is a front cross-sectional view of the operation presentation means side. This is a plan cross-sectional view of the operation presentation means side. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the operation presentation means. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the operation presentation means. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the operation presentation means. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the operation presentation means. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the operation presentation means. FIG. FIG. A partially cutaway side view of a pachinko machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. A partially cutaway side view of a pachinko machine according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. A front view of a pachinko machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a front view of the second side unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the second side unit. FIG. 2 is a plan cross-sectional view of the front frame and second side unit. 13 is a plan cross-sectional view of a right-side protrusion of the second side unit. FIG. 13 is a partially cutaway left side view of a right protruding portion of the second side unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front cross-sectional view of the vibration-type performance means. FIG. 2 is a plan cross-sectional view of the vibration-type performance means. 4 is a front cross-sectional view of the vibration-type performance means from the buffer means side. FIG. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the vibration-type performance means. FIG. 4 is a right side view of the second side unit. FIG. 4 is a side cross-sectional view of the second side unit etc. FIG. 4 is a side cross-sectional view of an upper protrusion of the second side unit. FIG. 4 is a front cross-sectional view of an upper protrusion of the second side unit. 1A is an explanatory plan view, and FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a reflecting state of the light guiding section. FIG. FIG. 13 is a plan cross-sectional view of a second side unit according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 23 is a plan cross-sectional view of a second side unit according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram of a second side unit according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. FIG.

Below, an embodiment of the invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Figures 1 to 38 show an example of a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine. In Figures 1 and 2, the gaming machine main body 1 comprises an outer frame 2 and a front frame 3 arranged in front of the outer frame 2. The front frame 3 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge 4 in the up-down direction arranged at one end in the left-right direction, for example at the left end, so that it can be opened, closed, and detached freely, and can be locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 2 by a locking means 5 provided on the opposite side in the left-right direction to the first hinge 4, for example at the right end.

The front frame 3 comprises a main frame 6 and a glass door 7 arranged in front of the main frame 6. The glass door 7 is pivotally attached to the main frame 6 via a second hinge 8 arranged in the vertical direction at one end in the left-right direction, for example the left end, so that it can be opened, closed, and detached freely, and can be locked in the closed state relative to the main frame 6 by a locking means 5. The first hinge 4 and the second hinge 8 are arranged so as to be coaxial with each other.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular shape by a pair of left and right vertical frame members 2a, 2b and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 2c, 2d. A front cover member 9 made of synthetic resin is attached to the lower front side of the outer frame 2 so as to connect the lower front sides of the left and right vertical frame members 2a, 2b along the front edge of the lower horizontal frame member 2d. The front cover member 9 protrudes forward from the left and right vertical frame members 2a, 2b, and the main frame 6 is disposed above it. In addition, the outer frame 2 has an upper outer frame hinge metal fitting 11 that constitutes the first hinge 4 disposed at the upper left, and a lower outer frame hinge metal fitting 12 disposed above the front cover member 9 at the lower left.

The main body frame 6 is made of synthetic resin and integrally comprises a rectangular frame section 13 that is above the front cover member 9 and can abut the front edge of the outer frame 2, a game board mounting section 14 provided on the upper side of the frame section 13, and a lower mounting section 15 provided on the lower side of the frame section 13. A game board 16 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting section 14 from the front side, and a launching means 17, a lower speaker 18, etc. are arranged on the front side of the lower mounting section 15. In addition, the main body frame 6 has a main body frame upper hinge metal fitting 19 that constitutes the first hinge 4 and a main body frame upper hinge metal fitting 20 that constitutes the second hinge 8 arranged on the upper left side, and a main body frame lower hinge metal fitting 21 that constitutes the first and second hinges 4 and 8 arranged on the lower left side.

The glass door 7 is equipped with a resin door base 22 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the main frame 6. In this door base 22, a window hole 24a of a glass window 24 is formed corresponding to the front side of a play area 23 formed on the play board 16, and multiple (four in this case) upper speakers 25, a blower effect device 26, and other presentation means are arranged around the window hole 24a, and an upper decorative cover 27 is attached to substantially cover the upper speakers 25, etc. from the front.

In addition, at the lower front side of the door base 22, there are arranged an upper tray 30 that stores game balls dispensed from the dispensing means 28 arranged at the rear of the main frame 6 and supplies them to the launching means 17, a lower tray 31 that stores surplus balls when the upper tray 30 is full, a launching handle 32 that is operated to operate the launching means 17, etc., and further, a lower decorative cover 33 that substantially covers the upper tray 30, lower tray 31, etc. from the front is attached. The lower decorative cover 33 is formed in a forward-facing bulge, and on its upper side, there are provided operation means such as a performance button 34 that can be pressed by the player and a cross operation means 35. The cross operation means 35 has four operation parts: an up key 35a at the rear, a down key 35b at the front, a left key 35c on the left side, and a right key 35d on the right side.

A glass unit 36 is removably attached to the rear side of the door base 22 so as to substantially cover the window hole 24a from the rear side, and a vertical hinge end side reinforcing sheet metal 37 arranged along the edge of the first and second hinges 4, 8, a vertical opening/closing end side reinforcing sheet metal 38 arranged along the edge of the opening/closing end side, and a left-right lower reinforcing sheet metal 39 arranged below the window hole 24a are removably fixed by screws or the like. In addition, the door base 22 has a glass door upper hinge metal 40 constituting the second hinge 8 arranged on the upper left, and a glass door lower hinge metal 41 arranged on the lower left.

In addition, a ball feeding unit 42, a lower tray guide unit 43, etc. are attached to the back side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 39. The ball feeding unit 42 is for supplying the game balls in the upper tray 30 one by one to the launching means 17, and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the launching means 17. The lower tray guide unit 43 is for guiding surplus balls when the upper tray 30 is full, and foul balls that have been launched by the launching means 17 but have returned without reaching the playing area 23, to the lower tray 31, and is arranged adjacent to the ball feeding unit 42 on the first and second hinges 4, 8 sides.

As shown in Figures 3 to 6, the game board 16 has a base plate 45 made of a non-translucent material such as plywood, and a guide rail 46 that guides the game balls launched from the launching means 17 is attached in a ring shape to the front side of the base plate 45. In addition, game components such as a central display frame unit 47, a start winning unit 48, a big winning unit 49, and a normal winning unit 50, as well as a large number of game nails (not shown) are arranged in the game area 23 inside the guide rail 46.

In addition, on the multiple unit parts 47 to 50, various display means such as a normal symbol display means 51, a normal reserved number display means 52, a first special symbol display means 53, a second special symbol display means 54, etc., as well as a normal symbol start means 55, a first special symbol start means 56, a second special symbol start means 57, a big prize means 58, multiple normal prize means 59, etc. are provided. Also, on the rear side of the base plate 45, as shown in Figures 5, 7, 8, etc., an image display means 60 consisting of a liquid crystal display means is attached via a rear mounting base 61.

As shown in FIG. 6, the base plate 45 is formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of (for example, three) mounting holes 62-64 and an outlet 65 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction for mounting the central display frame unit 47, the start winning unit 48, the big winning unit 49, the normal winning unit 50, etc. Mounting hole 62 is for mounting the central display frame unit 47, and is provided in a range excluding some areas such as the lower side within the play area 23. Mounting holes 63 and 64 are for mounting the start winning unit 48 and the normal winning unit 50, respectively, and are provided in the lower center and lower left of the play area 23, respectively, independently from the other mounting holes.

As shown in Figures 4, 5, 7, 8, etc., the rear mounting base 61 is integrally provided with a rear wall portion 66 formed approximately parallel to the base plate 45 and having a rectangular opening 66a formed approximately in the center thereof, a peripheral wall portion 67 extending forward from the outer edge of the rear wall portion 66 to the rear surface of the base plate 45, and a fixing portion 68 protruding from the front edge of the peripheral wall portion 67 along the rear surface of the base plate 45 and fixed to the base plate 45 by a fixing screw or the like. A vertically elongated image display means 60 is detachably fixed to the rear side of the rear wall portion 66 while being housed in a housing case 69.

The storage case 69 is formed in a flat box shape with the front side open. The image display means 60 is fitted into the storage case 69 from the front side with the display screen 60a facing forward, and is fixed by screwing or the like. The storage case 69 is integrally provided with a lower fixing part 69a protruding downward from the front side of the lower end and an upper fixing part 69b protruding upward from the front side of the upper end. With the lower fixing part 69a fitted into a recess (not shown) on the back wall part 66 side, the upper fixing part 69b is screwed to the back wall part 66, so that the front side of the outer periphery of the image display means 60 is abutted against or close to the back side of the back wall part 66, and is detachably fixed to the back side of the rear mounting base 61.

In this embodiment, the entire display screen 60a of the image display means 60 is the full screen area A in which an image can be displayed (see FIG. 9(a)), and a portion of the rear wall 66 of the rear mounting base 61 (hereinafter referred to as the window frame 74) corresponds to an area of approximately constant width on the outer periphery of the full screen area A and abuts or is close to the front side of it. Hereinafter, the portion of the full screen area A that corresponds to the rear side of the window frame (play member) 74 is referred to as the first fixed concealed area B1 (see FIG. 9(b)). In this embodiment, the window frame 74 is transparent, and the portion of the image displayed in the full screen area A that is displayed in the first fixed concealed area B1 can also be seen from the front side through the window frame 74.

Here, a "hidden area" refers to an area of the display screen 60a of the image display means 60 that overlaps with the rear of some component in front of it when viewed from the front, i.e., from the front of the gaming machine. Therefore, if the component in front is opaque, the image displayed in the hidden area cannot be seen when viewed from the front. Although the first fixed hidden area B1 is a "hidden area," the front window frame portion 74 is transparent, so the displayed image can be seen when viewed from the front as long as there is no other component in front. Also, even if it is a "hidden area," if there is space between it and the component in front, it may be possible to see the displayed image by shifting the viewpoint (peeking in) to avoid the component in front.

In addition, one or more, for example, four, movable performance means 75-78 are arranged in front of the rear mounting base 61. As shown in Figures 4, 7, 8, etc., the first movable performance means 75 includes a first movable body 75a and a first drive means 75b that drives the first movable body 75a in the vertical direction. The first movable body 75a is arranged in a horizontally elongated shape in front of the image display means 60, and its front side is decorated with, for example, any decoration (here, a three-dimensional decoration with an airplane motif), and its left and right ends are supported in a state where they can move in the vertical direction via first drive connectors 79, 79 by a pair of first drive means 75b, 75b arranged in front of the image display means 60 corresponding to the left and right sides of the image display means 60.

The first driving means 75b is supported on the rear mounting base 61 via a vertically long mounting base 80, and includes an elongated cylindrical lifting guide 81 that is arranged along the side edge of the image display means 60 from the upper end side to the lower end side and guides the first driving connector 79 in the up and down direction, a driving pulley 82a that is arranged in the vicinity of one end side of the lifting guide 81, for example the lower end side, a driven pulley 82b that is arranged in the vicinity of the other end side of the lifting guide 81, for example the upper end side, a driving source 83 consisting of a stepping motor or the like that rotates the driving pulley 82a, and an endless gear belt 84 that is wound around the driving pulley 82a and the driven pulley 82b and to which the first driving connector 79 is fixed at a predetermined location on its circumference, and the end of the first movable body 75a is rotatably connected to the first driving connector 79 by a pivot in the front-rear direction.

The first movable body 75a can be moved between an upper position (FIGS. 28(a), (c), (d)) on the upper front side of the image display means 60 and a lower position (FIG. 28(b)) on the lower front side while remaining in a substantially horizontal position by the pair of left and right first drive means 75b, 75b. The front end of the first movable body 75a protrudes to the front side of the base plate 45 through the mounting hole 62 (FIG. 4). Of course, the first movable body 75a may move and stop in an oblique state.

As shown in Figures 4, 7, 8, etc., the second movable performance means 76 includes a second movable body 76a and a second drive means 76b that drives the second movable body 76a in the vertical direction. The second movable body 76a is arranged in a horizontally elongated shape in front of the image display means 60, and its front side is decorated as desired (not shown). Both left and right ends are supported by a pair of second drive means 76b, 76b arranged on the left and right sides of the image display means 60 via second drive connectors 85, 85 in a state in which they can move in the vertical direction, respectively.

The second driving means 76b is disposed behind the first driving means 75b and in front of the rear mounting base 61, and includes an elongated cylindrical lifting guide 86 that is disposed along the side edge of the image display means 60 at the lower side thereof and guides the second driving connector 85 in the up-down direction, a driving pulley 87a that is disposed near one end of the lifting guide 86, e.g., the upper end side, and a driven pulley 87b that is disposed near the other end of the lifting guide 86, e.g., the lower end side, and a driving source 88 consisting of a stepping motor or the like that rotates and drives the driving pulley 87a, and an endless gear belt 89 that is wound around the driving pulley 87a and the driven pulley 87b and to which the second driving connector 85 is fixed at a predetermined location on the circumference. The end of the second movable body 76a is rotatably connected to the second driving connector 85 by a pivot in the front-rear direction.

The second movable body 76a can be moved by the pair of left and right second driving means 76b, 76b between a lower position at the front of the lower part of the image display means 60 (FIGS. 28(a) and (b)) and an upper position at the front of the middle part in the vertical direction (FIGS. 28(c) and (d)) while remaining in a substantially horizontal state. Of course, the second movable body 76a may move and stop in an oblique state.

Note that the movement paths of the first movable body 75a and the second movable body 76a overlap in part when viewed from the front, but the movement path of the first movable body 75a is shifted forward relative to the movement path of the second movable body 76a, so the first movable body 75a and the second movable body 76a can move without interfering with each other.

The third movable performance means 77 and the fourth movable performance means 78 are arranged symmetrically to correspond to the left and right sides of the image display means 60, as shown in Figures 4, 7, 8, etc. The third and fourth movable performance means 77, 78 include third and fourth movable bodies 77a, 78a, and third and fourth drive means 77b, 78b that drive the third and fourth movable bodies 77a, 78a in the left and right directions. The third and fourth movable bodies 77a, 78a are arranged vertically in front of the image display means 60 along the left and right edges thereof, respectively, and the front side is decorated as desired (not shown).

The third and fourth driving means 77b, 78b are configured by electromagnetic slide tables in which the slide portion 92 can slide in the left-right direction relative to the base portion 91, and are disposed in the approximate vertical center corresponding to the side of the image display means 60, the base portion 91 is fixed to the peripheral wall portion 67 of the rear mounting base 61, and the third and fourth movable bodies 77a, 78a are fixed to the front side of the slide portion 92. The third and fourth movable bodies 77a, 78a can be moved by the third and fourth driving means 77b, 78b, respectively, between an external position (FIGS. 28(a)-(c)) on the outside in the left-right direction relative to the image display means 60 and an internal position (FIG. 28(d)) on the inside in the left-right direction.

The third movable body 77a and the fourth movable body 78a do not interfere with each other because their respective movement paths are separated to the left and right. In addition, the movement paths of the third and fourth movable bodies 77a, 78a are behind the movement path of the first movable body 75a and in front of the movement path of the second movable body 76a, so the third and fourth movable bodies 77a, 78a and the first and second movable bodies 75a, 76a can move without interfering with each other.

The part of the entire screen area A that corresponds to the rear side of the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a is called the movable concealment area C (FIG. 10(c)). Of course, since the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a can move between a plurality of stop positions, the movable concealment area C changes accordingly when the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a move. Note that the movable concealment area C may not exist. The part of the image displayed in the entire screen area A that is displayed in the movable concealment area C cannot be seen from the front because it is blocked by at least the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a. However, since the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a are all spaced forward from the image display means 60, at least a part of it can be seen from the front by shifting the viewpoint.

As described above, the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a are disposed between the image display means 60 and the base plate 45, and only a portion of the front end side of the first movable body 75a protrudes to the front side of the base plate 45 through the mounting hole 62.

In addition, at least a portion of the entire screen area A of the image display means 60 extends beyond the mounting hole 62 of the base plate 45 when viewed from the front. Hereinafter, the portion of the entire screen area A that corresponds to the rear side of the base plate (play member) 45 (including the portion that corresponds to the rear side of the mounting holes other than the mounting hole 62) is referred to as the second fixed concealed area B2 (Figure 9 (c)).

Of the image displayed in the entire screen area A, the portion displayed in the second fixed concealed area B2 cannot be seen from the front because it is blocked by at least the base plate 45. However, since the image display means 60 is positioned behind the base plate 45, at least a portion of it can be seen from the front by shifting the viewpoint.

The guide rail 46 is disposed on the front side of the base plate 45 so as to surround the outer periphery of the play area 23, and is formed by three first to third rail members 101 to 103 as shown in Figures 3, 5, 8, etc. The first rail member 101 is made of synthetic resin and is removably attached to the front side of the base plate 45 along the left edge and upper edge, and its side surface on the play area 23 side, which is roughly arc-shaped when viewed from the front, becomes the first rail 46a that constitutes part of the guide rail 46.

The second rail member 102 is made of metal and is arranged in a generally arc shape when viewed from the front so as to be parallel to the inside of the first rail 46a from the upper left to the lower left of the game board 16, and is erected at a generally constant width on the front side of the base plate 45, forming the second rail 46b that constitutes part of the guide rail 46. The portion sandwiched between the first rail 46a and the second rail 46b forms the launch guide passage 104 that guides the game ball launched by the launching means 17 to the game area 23.

The third rail member 103 is made of synthetic resin and is removably attached to the front side of the base plate 45 along the right and bottom edges so as to connect the upper right end of the first rail member 101 and the lower left end of the second rail member 102, and its side facing the play area 23 forms the third rail 46c that constitutes part of the guide rail 46. The first rail member 101 and the third rail member 103 may be divided into multiple parts along the rail longitudinal direction.

The central display frame unit 47 constitutes the display frame of the image display means 60, and is detachably attached to the front side of the base plate 45 along the inner circumference of the mounting hole 62. As shown in Figures 3 to 6, the central display frame unit 47 includes a front mounting plate 105 that is arranged outside the mounting hole 62 along the front surface of the base plate 45 and through which game balls can pass, a decorative frame 106 that is arranged in a roughly gate-like shape in front view from both the left and right sides to the upper side in front of the image display means 60 and protrudes forward from the inner circumference of the front mounting plate 105, and a stage 107 that is arranged between the left and right lower ends of the decorative frame 106. The game balls that are launched by the launching means 17 and enter the upper side of the game area 23 are sorted to the left and right at the top of the decorative frame 106, and flow down either the left flow path 108a on the left side of the central display frame unit 47 or the right flow path 108b on the right side.

The central display frame unit 47 is provided with a warp inlet 109 through which game balls can flow, on at least one side of the left flow-down path 108a side or the right flow-down path 108b side, for example, on the left flow-down path 108a side. Game balls that flow into the warp inlet 109 roll freely left and right on the stage 107, and then fall forward from either a central drop section 110 provided corresponding to the left-right center of the game area 23, or from any other part.

In addition, on the upper side of the stage 107, there is provided an intrusion prevention means 111 for preventing game balls from entering the rear side due to bouncing or the like. The intrusion prevention means 111 integrally comprises a first intrusion prevention plate 111a erected parallel to the base plate 45 along the rear side of the stage 107, and a second intrusion prevention plate 111b protruding forward from the upper edge of the first intrusion prevention plate 111a. The intrusion prevention means 111 is entirely transparent, and the rear side can be seen from the front side through the intrusion prevention means 111.

As shown in FIG. 6, the central display frame unit 47 is composed of a second unit 47a including a stage 107, a warp entrance 109, an intrusion prevention means 111, etc., and a first unit 47b including the rest, and these two units 47a, 47b are attached and fixed to the base plate 45 in a pre-connected state. Of course, the first unit 47b and the second unit 47a may be configured to be individually attachable to the base plate 45.

At least a portion of the central display frame unit 47 is located in front of the entire screen area A of the image display means 60. Hereinafter, the portion of the entire screen area A that corresponds to the rear side of the first unit (game member) 47b is referred to as the third fixed concealed area B3 (FIG. 9(d)), and the portion that corresponds to the rear side of the second unit (game member) 47a is referred to as the fourth fixed concealed area B4 (FIG. 10(a)). In addition, the portion of the fourth fixed concealed area B4 that corresponds to the rear side of the transparent portion of the second unit 47a (here, the intrusion prevention means 111), i.e., the area that corresponds to the rear side of the second unit 47a but is visible from the front side through the transparent portion, is referred to as the transparent concealed area (first transparent display area) B4a.

Of the image displayed in the entire screen area A, the portion displayed in the third fixed concealment area B3 and the fourth fixed concealment area B4 (excluding the transparent concealment area B4a) cannot be seen from the front because it is blocked by at least the central display frame unit 47. However, because the central display frame unit 47 is spaced forward from the image display means 60, at least a portion of it can be seen from the front by shifting the viewpoint.

The start winning unit 48 is positioned below the central display frame unit 47, and is removably attached to the mounting hole 63 from the front. The big winning unit 49 is removably attached to a specified location on the lower right side of the central display frame unit 47 from the rear. The normal winning unit 50 is positioned below the central display frame unit 47 to the left of the start winning unit 48, and is removably attached to the mounting hole 64 from the front.

In addition, at least a portion of the special prize unit 49 is located in front of the full screen area A of the image display means 60. Hereinafter, the portion of the full screen area A that corresponds to the rear of the special prize unit (game component) 49 will be referred to as the fifth fixed hidden area B5 (FIG. 10(b)). Note that the portion of the image displayed in the full screen area A that is displayed in the fifth fixed hidden area B5 cannot be seen from the front because it is at least blocked by the special prize unit 49, but because the special prize unit 49 is spaced forward from the image display means 60, at least a portion of it can be seen from the front by shifting the viewpoint.

Of the entire screen area A on the front side of the image display means 60, the area that is not blocked by the window frame portion 74, the base plate 45, the central display frame unit 47, the big prize unit 49, and the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a when viewed from the front, that is, the area that does not belong to either the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 or the movable concealed area C, is defined as the non-concealed area D (Figure 10 (d)). Note that there are overlapping areas between the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5, and there are also overlapping areas between the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C. In other words, there are areas that belong to two or more of the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C.

Here, the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 are an example of a first display area that corresponds to the rear side of the play member when viewed from the front, the movable concealed area C is an example of a second display area that corresponds to the rear side of the movable body, and the non-concealed area D is an example of a third display area that is neither the first display area nor the second display area.

The normal symbol start means 55 is for starting the variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display means 51, and is composed of a passage gate through which the game ball can pass, and is equipped with a passage detection means (not shown) that detects the passage of the game ball. This normal symbol start means 55 is provided in front of the front mounting plate 105 on the right side of the central display frame unit 47, and game balls flowing down the right flow path 108b can pass through it.

The normal symbol display means 51 is for displaying normal symbols in a variable manner, and is provided with a plurality of light-emitting elements (e.g., LEDs) corresponding to a plurality of normal symbols (e.g., two types, "○" and "×"), and is arranged in the decorative frame 106 of the central display frame unit 47. In this normal symbol display means 51, the plurality of light-emitting elements blink so as to emit light in a predetermined sequence based on the detection of a game ball by the normal symbol start means 55, and when the winning judgment random number value included in the normal random number information acquired when the game ball is detected by the normal symbol start means 55 matches a predetermined winning judgment value, the light-emitting element on the "○" side corresponding to the winning mode (predetermined mode) lights up, and otherwise the light-emitting element on the "×" side corresponding to the losing mode lights up and stops. When the stopped pattern after the variation of the normal symbol display means 51 becomes a winning mode, a normal profit state occurs.

In addition, when the normal symbol start means 55 detects a game ball during a normal hold period, which includes when the normal symbol display means 51 is changing symbols and during a normal profit state, the normal random number information acquired thereby is held and stored up to a predetermined upper limit of the number of reserved symbols, for example up to four, and each time the normal hold period ends, one is consumed at a time to cause the normal symbol to change. The number of stored normal random number information (normal hold number) is notified to the player by the normal hold number display means 52, etc. The normal hold number display means 52 is disposed in the decorative frame 106 of the central display frame unit 47.

The first special symbol starting means 56 is for starting the pattern variation by the first special symbol display means 53, and is composed of a non-opening/closing winning means that does not have an opening/closing means, and is equipped with a game ball detection means (not shown) that detects the winning game ball. This first special symbol starting means 56 is provided in the starting winning unit 48, and is arranged with an upward opening on the lower side corresponding to the central drop part 110 of the stage 107, and since there is a route from the warp entrance 109 on the left flow-down path 108a side through the stage 107 to win, a game ball that has flowed down the left flow-down path 108a has a higher probability of winning than a game ball that has flowed down the right flow-down path 108b.

The second special symbol starting means 57 is for starting the pattern change by the second special symbol display means 54, and is composed of an opening and closing type winning means that can be changed between an open state in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state in which it is impossible to win a prize (or it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state) by the operation of the opening and closing section 112, and is equipped with a game ball detection means (not shown) that detects a winning game ball, and when the stopped pattern after the change of the normal symbol display means 51 becomes a winning pattern (predetermined pattern) and a normal profit state occurs, the opening and closing section 112 changes from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined time.

This second special symbol starting means 57 is located on the front mounting plate 105 at the right of the central display frame unit 47 and downstream of the normal symbol starting means 55, so that game balls that flow down the right flow path 108b have a higher chance of winning than game balls that flow down the left flow path 108a. The opening/closing section 112 can swing around a left-right rotation axis provided on the lower side, and in the closed state it is roughly flush with the front mounting plate 105, allowing game balls to pass through the front side, and in the open state it is inclined backwards in front of the front mounting plate 105, allowing game balls to win backwards.

The first special symbol display means (symbol display means) 53 is configured with a seven-segment display means or the like capable of variably displaying one or more, for example one, first special symbol, and variably displays the first special symbol for a predetermined period of time on the condition that the first special symbol starting means 56 detects a gaming ball, and stops in a first jackpot mode if the jackpot determination random number value included in the first special random number information acquired when the first special symbol starting means 56 detects a gaming ball matches a predetermined jackpot determination value, and stops in a first miss mode otherwise. If the stopped symbol after the variance of the first special symbol display means 53 becomes the first jackpot mode, a first special advantage state occurs.

The second special symbol display means (symbol display means) 54 is configured with a seven-segment display means or the like capable of variably displaying one or more, for example one, second special symbol, and variably displays the second special symbol for a predetermined period of time on the condition that the second special symbol starting means 57 detects a gaming ball, and stops in the second jackpot mode if the jackpot determination random number value included in the second special random number information acquired when the second special symbol starting means 57 detects a gaming ball matches a predetermined jackpot determination value, and stops in the second miss mode otherwise. If the stopped symbol after the variance of the second special symbol display means 54 becomes the second jackpot mode, a second special advantage state occurs.

The first and second special symbol display means 53, 54 are arranged in the decorative frame 106 of the central display frame unit 47. The first and second special symbols are not number symbols or the like, but are composed of multiple types of symbols consisting of combinations of lines and dots that do not have any special meaning in themselves, and one or more of these symbols are the first or second jackpot mode, and the rest are the first or second loss mode.

In addition, when the first and second special symbol start means 56 and 57 detect a game ball during a special reservation period including the pattern change of the first special symbol display means 53, the pattern change of the second special symbol display means 54, and the first and second special advantage states, the first and second special random number information acquired thereby is reserved and stored up to a predetermined upper limit of the reserved number, for example, four each. Then, when the special reservation period ends, if the reserved memory on the second special symbol side is 1 or more (if the pattern change start condition for the second special symbol is established), the reserved memory of the second special symbol is consumed and the second special symbol is changed, and if only the reserved memory on the first special symbol side is 1 or more (if the pattern change start condition for the first special symbol is established), the reserved memory of the first special symbol is consumed and the first special symbol is changed.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol will not both be changing, and if there is reserved memory on both the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, the second special symbol will be changed with priority. The number of first and second special random number information stored (number of first and second special reserved pieces) is notified to the player by the image display means 60, etc.

The big prize winning means 58 is an opening and closing type winning means equipped with an opening and closing plate 113 that can be switched between an open state where game balls can win and a closed state where game balls cannot win. It is provided in the big prize winning unit 49 and is located downstream of the second special symbol starting means 57 at the lower right side of the central display frame unit 47, and game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 108b have a higher chance of winning than game balls that have flowed down the left flow path 108a. This big prize winning means 58 is designed so that the opening and closing plate 113 opens forward according to a predetermined opening pattern during the first and second special profit states that occur when the first and second special symbols of the first and second special symbol display means 53 and 54 stop in the first and second big win modes after fluctuating, and the game balls that fall on it are allowed to win inside.

In addition, the image display means 60 displays the performance pattern 114 (Figure 16, etc.) in a variable manner in parallel with the variable display of the first and second special patterns by the first and second special pattern display means 53, 54, and also displays various images such as the first and second reserved display images X1 to X4, Y1 to Y4 (Figure 15, etc.) indicating the number of first and second special reserved items, volume and light adjustment possible notification images (notification images) 116a, 116b (Figure 18, etc.) and volume and light setting images 117a, 117b (Figure 19, etc.) related to the volume and light adjustment function described later, menu display possible notification image (notification image) 118a (Figure 24, etc.), menu image 118b and menu operation notification image 118c (Figure 25, etc.) related to the menu display function described later, left hit guidance image 162a and right hit guidance image 162b (Figure 16, etc.), and error notification image 163 (Figure 17, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 14, the performance pattern 114 is composed of a pattern image 114a consisting of numbers 1 to 9, for example, combined with a character or other decorative image 114b, and can change in multiple rows in the left-right direction, for example, in three rows. It starts changing by vertical scrolling or the like according to a predetermined change pattern at approximately the same time as the first and second special patterns start to change, and stops in a predetermined order such as left, right, center, etc., so as to finally stop at approximately the same time as the first and second special patterns stop changing.

When all the performance symbols 114 are the same, a jackpot performance is indicated, and otherwise a miss performance is indicated. When the first and second special symbols are the first and second jackpot modes, the performance symbol 114 is in the jackpot performance mode, and when the first and second special symbols are the first and second miss modes, the performance symbol 114 is in the miss performance mode.

The variation patterns of the performance symbols 114 include multiple types of reach jackpot variation patterns (e.g., normal reach jackpot variation pattern, super reach jackpot variation pattern, etc.) that go through a reach state and then become a jackpot performance mode, multiple types of reach miss variation patterns (e.g., normal reach miss variation pattern, super reach miss variation pattern, etc.) that go through a reach state and then become a miss performance mode, and one or multiple types of normal variation patterns that go into a miss performance mode without going through a reach state.

Figure 11 is a block diagram of the control system of this pachinko machine. In Figure 11, 121 is the main control board, and 122 is the performance control board. These control boards 121, 122 are each stored in a board case that is detachably attached to an appropriate location on the back side of the gaming machine main body 1 including the front frame 3 and gaming board 16, such as the back side of the back cover that covers the image display means 60 attached to the gaming board 16, etc.

The main control board 121 controls the overall game operation, and includes a normal random number creation processing means 131, a normal start port check processing means 132, a normal random number storage means 133, a normal pattern processing means 134, a normal pattern display control means 135, a normal profit state generation means 136, a special random number creation processing means 137, a special start port check processing means 138, a special random number storage means 139, a special pattern processing means 140, a special pattern display control means 141, a special profit state generation means 142, a special game state generation means 143, a control command transmission means 144, etc.

The normal random number creation processing means 131 is configured to repeatedly generate hit determination random numbers and the like at predetermined time intervals, which are used to determine whether or not the normal symbol after the change is a winning pattern. The normal start port check processing means 132 performs processing based on the detection of a gaming ball by the normal symbol start means 55, and is configured to obtain normal random number information, such as a hit determination random number value, created by the normal random number creation processing means 131 based on the detection of a gaming ball by the normal symbol start means 55, and store the normal random number information in the first-in, first-out normal random number storage means 133, up to a predetermined upper limit of reserved numbers (e.g., 4).

The normal symbol processing means 134 performs processing related to the display of normal symbol variations, and is provided with a hit determination function that retrieves a hit determination random number value from the head of the queue of normal random number information stored in the normal random number storage means 133 and determines whether or not a hit/miss has occurred depending on whether the hit determination random number value matches a predetermined hit determination value, a normal stop symbol selection function that selects the type of stop symbol after the normal symbol variations based on the hit/miss determination result, and a variation time selection function that selects the variation time of the normal symbol.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the probability of winning during a special game state (time-saving state and special probability state) described below (e.g., 1/1.3) is set higher than the probability of winning during other normal game states (e.g., 1/10), and the variable time during a special game state (e.g., 2.7 seconds) is set shorter than the variable time during a normal game state (e.g., 27 seconds).

The normal pattern display control means 135 controls the display of the normal pattern display means 51 based on the normal pattern processing by the normal pattern processing means 134, and starts the variation of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display means 51 on the condition that the normal pattern display means 51 is in a state where it can display a variable pattern and one or more pieces of normal random number information are stored in the normal random number storage means 133 (the number of normal reserved pieces is one or more), and stops the variation of the normal pattern with the stop pattern selected by the normal pattern processing means 134 based on the lapse of the variation time selected by the normal pattern processing means 134.

The normal profit state generating means 136 generates a normal profit state in which the opening/closing section 112 of the second special symbol starting means 57 changes to an open state according to one of a plurality of opening/closing patterns when the stopped symbol after the change of the normal symbol display means 51 becomes a winning pattern based on the result of the winning judgment by the normal symbol processing means 134 being a winning one. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, two types of opening/closing patterns are set: a normal opening/closing pattern (e.g., 0.2 seconds x 1 opening) and an extended opening/closing pattern (e.g., 2 seconds x 3 openings) that is set to have a longer opening time than the normal opening/closing pattern. The normal opening/closing pattern is selected during the normal game state, and the extended opening/closing pattern is selected during the special game state.

The special random number creation processing means 137 is configured to perform special random number creation processing that repeatedly generates jackpot determination random numbers used to determine jackpot/miss, pattern determination random numbers used to select the stopping pattern after the special pattern changes, fluctuation pattern random numbers used to select the fluctuation pattern, and other specified random numbers.

The special start port check processing means (start detection processing means) 138 performs processing based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first and second special symbol start means (start means) 56, 57, and is configured to obtain first and second special random number information, such as a jackpot determination random number value and a jackpot symbol random number value, created by the special random number creation processing means 137 based on the entry of a gaming ball into either the first or second special symbol start means 56, 57, and store the first and second special random number information in the special random number storage means 139 up to a predetermined upper limit of reserved numbers (e.g., 4).

The special start port check processing means 138 also includes a look-ahead determination means 138a. This look-ahead determination means 138a is configured to perform a look-ahead determination as to whether or not the jackpot determination random number values included in the first and second special random number information, which are obtained when a gaming ball enters the first and second special symbol start means 56 and 57, match the first and second jackpot determination values at the time of acquisition. The look-ahead determination result is transmitted to the performance control board 122, etc., by a reserve increase command that is sent based on the gaming ball entering either the first or second special symbol start means 56 and 57.

The special symbol processing means 140 performs processing related to the variable display of the first and second special symbols, and when the first and second special symbol display means 53, 54 are in a state where they can be variable displayed, it retrieves the first jackpot determination random number value from the queue of the second special random number information if the second special reserved number is 1 or more, or from the queue of the first special random number information if only the first special reserved number is 1 or more, and determines whether or not the jackpot determination random number value matches a predetermined jackpot determination value; a special stop symbol selection function that selects the stop pattern after the first and second special symbols have changed based on the jackpot pattern random number value included in the first and second special random number information depending on the result of the jackpot determination; and a change pattern selection function that selects the change pattern of the first and second special symbols from multiple types depending on the result of the jackpot determination.

The special symbol display control means 141 controls the display of the first and second special symbol display means 53, 54, and starts the variation of the first and second special symbols by the first special symbol display means 53 or the second special symbol display means 54 based on the special symbol processing by the special symbol processing means 140, and stops the variation of the first and second special symbols at the selected stop symbol based on the lapse of the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern.

The special advantage state generating means (advantage state generating means) 142 is for generating first and second special advantage states advantageous to the player, and is configured to generate first and second special advantage states (advantage states) that open the big prize winning means 58 according to a predetermined opening pattern when the result of the big win determination by the special pattern processing means 140 is a big win and the stopped pattern after the first and second special patterns change becomes the first and second big win pattern (specific pattern).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, two types of opening patterns, α and β, are provided for the big win means 58, and the special advantage state generating means 142 is configured to select one of the opening patterns α and β depending on the big win symbol random number value. The opening pattern α is set to perform two rounds of opening the big win means 58 for 0.2 seconds. Since the opening time for one opening pattern α is as short as 0.2 seconds and the number of rounds is also small at only two rounds, the possibility of the game ball winning during the opening is extremely small.

On the other hand, the opening pattern β is set to perform a predetermined number of rounds (e.g., 15 rounds) of closing the big prize winning means 58 on the condition that a predetermined time (e.g., 28 seconds) has elapsed since the opening or a predetermined number (e.g., 9) of game balls have won before then. In the case of this opening pattern β, if the prize balls for one win in the big prize winning means 58 are 15, the player can expect to get 9 x 15 x 15 = 2025 balls in most cases by simply continuing the normal firing operation, and the direct profit that the player can obtain is significantly greater than that of the opening pattern α. Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability of the opening pattern β being selected is set to a higher value when the second special symbol becomes the second big prize mode (second special profit state) than when the first special symbol becomes the second big prize mode (first special profit state).

The special game state generating means 143 is for generating a special game state advantageous to the player after the first and second special advantage states end, and is configured to generate either a time-saving state or a guaranteed bonus state according to the jackpot pattern random number value when the jackpot determination random number value included in the first and second special random number information matches the jackpot determination value, as shown in FIG. 13.

During the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the first and second special symbols is switched to a shortened fluctuation time that is shorter than the normal fluctuation time, the probability that the normal symbols will become a winning pattern is switched from the normal probability (e.g., 1/10) to a high probability (e.g., 1/1.3), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is switched from the normal fluctuation time (e.g., 27 seconds) to a shortened fluctuation time (e.g., 2.7 seconds), and the opening and closing pattern of the second special symbol starting means 57 is switched from the normal opening and closing pattern (e.g., 0.2 seconds x 1 opening) to an extended opening and closing pattern (e.g., 2 seconds x 3 openings). The time-saving state begins after the first and second special advantage states end, and ends when the next special advantage state occurs or when the first and second special symbols have changed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50 times) before that.

During the high probability state, the probability that the first and second special symbols will become the first and second jackpot patterns is switched to a higher probability (e.g., 1/35) than the normal probability (e.g., 1/350). Also, during the high probability state, in principle, switching is also performed in the same way as in the time-saving state, but if a special advantage state of opening pattern α occurs during the normal game state, the high probability state that occurs after the end of that state is not switched in the same way as in the time-saving state (so-called latent high probability state). The high probability state begins after the end of the first and second special advantage states, and ends when the next special advantage state occurs, but other ending conditions, such as the number of times the first and second special symbols change, may be added.

The control command sending means 144 is for sending a predetermined control command to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 122 to give a control command, and based on the special pattern processing by the special pattern processing means 140, when the first and second special patterns start to change, sends to the performance control board 122 in this order a first and second reservation decrease command that specifies a decrease in the number of first and second special reservations, a first and second change pattern designation command that specifies the change pattern of the performance pattern 114, and a first and second stop pattern mode designation command that specifies the stop pattern mode of the first and second special patterns, and when the first and second special patterns change ends, sends a first and second change stop designation command to the performance control board 122 to instruct the first and second performance patterns to stop changing, and a function to specify an increase in the number of first and second special reservations when the number of first and second special reservations increases. It has a function of transmitting a first and second reserved increase command to the performance control board 122 side, a function of transmitting a customer waiting demo command when the first and second special reserved numbers are both 0 and the first and second special symbols have ended their variation, etc., and the first and second special symbols are in a waiting state for variation, a function of transmitting a special game state generation command, a special game state end command, etc. to the performance control board 122 side when a special game state is generated and ended by the special game state generating means 143, a function of transmitting an error command corresponding to the type of error when an error such as a door opening error, a magnetic detection error, a radio wave detection error, a payout error, a winning switch error, an illegal winning error, etc. occurs, and a function of transmitting an error release command corresponding to the type of error when the error is released to the performance control board 122.

The performance control board 122 controls the performances produced by various performance means, and includes a performance control means 150, a special reserved number display control means 151, a pattern change performance control means 152, a launch induction notification control means 153, an error notification control means 154, a sound volume adjustment means 155, a light intensity adjustment means 156, a customer waiting control means 157, a power saving mode setting means 158, etc.

The performance control means 150 controls each performance means, and includes image display control means 150a that controls the image display by the image display means 60, audio control means 150b that controls the audio output from the speakers 18 and 25, light emission control means 150c that controls the light emission of the illumination means 159 such as LEDs, and movable body control means 150d that controls the movable performance means 75 to 78 having the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a.

The special reserve number display control means 151 controls the display of the first and second special reserve numbers on the image display means 60, and as shown in FIG. 15 etc., in response to an increase or decrease in the first and second special reserve numbers, is configured to display first reserve display images X1 to X4 for the number of first special reserves (maximum 4), second reserve display images Y1 to Y4 for the number of second special reserves (maximum 4), and a changing reserve image Z corresponding to the changing first and second special patterns superimposed on top of a specified reserve pedestal image 161 on the image display means 60 via the image display control means 150a.

In this embodiment, in order to consume the reserved memory of the second special symbol with priority over the reserved memory of the first special symbol, the second reserved display images Y1 to Y4 are displayed partially overlapping in front of the first reserved display images X1 to X4. When the first and second reserved increase commands are received from the main control board 121, the first and second reserved display images X1 to Y1 are additionally displayed at the end of the queue.

In addition, when the first and second hold decrease commands are received from the main control board 121, the first and second hold display images X1~, Y1~ are shifted one by one toward the front of the queue, and the pushed-out first and second hold display images X1, Y1 at the top are moved to a specified position and changed to a changing hold image Z. Note that because the change in the second special pattern takes priority over the first special pattern, while the second hold display image Y1~ is displayed, the first hold display image X1~ may increase but will not decrease.

The pattern change performance control means 152 controls the change display of the performance pattern 114 and the associated preview performance, and includes a performance pattern control means 152a, a preview performance control means 152b, etc. The performance pattern control means 152a controls the display of the performance pattern 114 and the associated audio output and illumination light emission via the performance control means 150, and when it receives the first and second variation pattern designation commands from the main control board 121, it starts the variation of the performance pattern 114 and the associated audio output and illumination light emission based on the designated variation pattern, and when it receives the first and second variation stop designation commands, it stops the variation of the performance pattern 114 in the stop pattern mode selected based on the first and second stop pattern mode designation commands and the first and second variation pattern designation commands, and also stops the associated audio output and illumination light emission.

The advance notice control means 152b controls the advance notice regarding the change of the first and second special symbols and the performance symbol 114, such as whether or not the stopped symbol after the change of the first and second special symbols becomes the first and second jackpot state and the first and second special profit state occurs. Advance notice includes a "pre-read advance notice" based on the result of the advance notice determination by the advance notice determination means 138a, and a "normal advance notice" based on the result of the jackpot determination at the start of the pattern change by the special symbol processing means 140, etc.

The "pre-reading preview performance" also includes a "pre-reading continuous performance" that executes the same performance for multiple pattern changes up to the pattern change that corresponds to the special random number information that was the subject of the pre-reading judgment based on the result of the pre-reading judgment, as well as a "pre-reading pending change performance" that displays the first and second pending display images X1~, Y1~ in a predetermined display mode as shown in Figure 15 based on the result of the pre-reading judgment.

The "normal preview performance" includes a "conversation preview performance", a "step-up preview performance", a "button preview performance", a "mini-character preview performance", etc. In the "conversation preview performance", the character's lines are displayed on the image display means 60 while the first and second special symbols are changing, and the content of the lines indicates the reliability that the first and second special symbols will become the first and second jackpot modes (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot reliability). In the "step-up preview performance", while the first and second special symbols are changing, a predetermined performance step including the display of a performance image on the image display means 60 is executed up to a predetermined stage out of multiple stages (e.g., five stages) according to the jackpot reliability. In this step-up preview performance, the jackpot reliability is set to increase as the performance step progresses.

In the "button preview effect," if it is determined that the operation of the effect button 34 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (operation is successful) during the valid operation period while the first and second special symbols are fluctuating, a predetermined operation-time effect is executed according to the reliability of the jackpot. In the "mini character preview effect," one or more mini character images are displayed on the image display means 60, and an action is performed that suggests the reliability of the jackpot.

The preview performance control means 152b is configured to hold a lottery to start the execution of a look-ahead preview performance when it meets certain conditions, such as receiving the first and second reserved increase commands and not being in a look-ahead continuous performance, and to start the execution of the look-ahead preview performance if at least one of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performances (look-ahead continuous performance, look-ahead reserved change performance, etc.) is selected, and to hold a lottery to start the execution of the look-ahead preview performance when it receives the first and second reserved decrease commands, the first and second change pattern designation commands, and the first and second stop pattern mode designation commands within a certain period of time, and to execute the normal preview performance while the first and second special patterns are changing if at least one of the multiple types of normal preview performances (conversation preview performance, step-up preview performance, etc.) is selected.

The launch guidance notification control means 153 controls the launch guidance notification to aim at either the left or right side of the play area 23, and is configured to display on the image display means 60 via the image display control means 150a at a specified timing during play either a left-hit guidance image 162a (Fig. 16(a)) such as "← left" to aim at the left flow-down path 108a and launch, or a right-hit guidance image 162b (Fig. 16(b)) such as "right →" to aim at the right flow-down path 108b and launch.

In this embodiment, during the normal game state, the probability of a winning state occurring on the normal symbol display means 51 is low, and even if a winning state occurs and a normal profit state occurs, the opening time of the second special symbol start means 57 is short (FIG. 12), so the possibility of winning on the second special symbol start means 57 is extremely low. Therefore, during the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit left and aim for a winning on the first special symbol start means 56 from the left flow-down path 108a side than to hit right to aim at the normal symbol start means 55 and the second special symbol start means 57 on the right flow-down path 108b side, so it is desirable to display the left hit guidance image 162a at a predetermined timing such as the end of the special game state.

On the other hand, during the first and second special advantage states, the big win means 58 opens, so the player should hit right, aiming at the big win means 58 on the right flow path 108b side. Also, during the special game state, the probability of a winning state occurring on the normal pattern display means 51 increases, and the opening time of the second special pattern start means 57 becomes longer when a winning state occurs and a normal advantage state occurs (Figure 12), so it is more advantageous for the player to hit right, aiming at the normal pattern start means 55 and the second special pattern start means 57 on the right flow path 108b side. Therefore, during the first and second special advantage states and the special game state, it is desirable to display the right hit guidance image 162b at a specified timing.

In the case of this embodiment, in the first and second special advantage states of the opening pattern α, the opening time of the big winning means 58 is short, and the special game state that occurs after the end of the state is a latent probability change, and the opening of the second special symbol starting means 57 is not extended (Figure 13), so it is desirable not to display the right hit guiding image 162b. Also, it is possible to display either the left hit guiding image 162a or the right hit guiding image 162b, or only the right hit guiding image 162b.

The error notification control means 154 controls error notifications, and is configured to execute error notifications such as displaying an error notification image 163 on the image display means 60 via the image display control means 150a from the time an error command is received from the main control board 121 until an error release command is received. In the case of a door opening error, an error notification image 163 such as "Door open" is displayed on the image display means 60 from the time a door opening command is received from the main control board 121 until a door opening release command is received (Figure 17).

The volume adjustment means 155 controls the volume setting, and is configured to display a volume adjustment possible notification image (notification image) 116a (FIG. 18(a)) indicating that volume adjustment operation is possible on the image display means 60 at a predetermined timing during a volume adjustment possible period when the volume can be adjusted by a player operation, and to display a volume setting image 117a (FIG. 19(a)) indicating the volume setting status on the image display means 60 if the player operates the volume during the volume adjustment possible period. In this embodiment, the left key 35c and right key 35d of the cross operation means 35 are assigned for volume adjustment operation, and during the volume adjustment possible period, pressing the left key 35c decreases the volume, and pressing the right key 35d increases the volume.

The volume adjustable notification image 116a is composed of an illustration of the left key 35c and right key 35d used for volume adjustment and the text "Adjust volume with," as shown in FIG. 18(a). The volume setting image 117a is composed of multiple (five) scale images corresponding to a predetermined level of volume (e.g., five levels) and the text "Volume," as shown in FIG. 19(a), and the number of scale images corresponding to the current volume setting is displayed in a different manner (e.g., display color) from the other scale images.

When the player operates either the left key 35c or the right key 35d during the volume adjustment period, if the volume adjustment notification image 116a (Fig. 18(a)) is displayed, the volume adjustment notification image 116a will be erased from the image display means 60. In addition, the volume will be changed according to the player's operation, and a volume setting image 117a (Fig. 19(a)) corresponding to the changed volume will be displayed for a certain period of time on the image display means 60.

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment period is set not only during the waiting state for customers described below, but also during other game states, but a specified period such as after power-on may be excluded from the volume adjustment period. Also, the volume adjustment possible notification image 116a may be displayed at all times during the volume adjustment period, or the volume adjustment possible notification image 116a may be displayed only for a specific period such as during the waiting state for customers. Also, if either the left key 35c or the right key 35d is operated while the volume setting image 117a is not displayed, the first operation may display the volume setting image 117a but not change the volume, and the volume may be changed on the second or subsequent operation after the volume setting image 117a is displayed.

The light intensity adjustment means 156 controls the light intensity adjustment of the illumination means 159, and is configured to display a light intensity adjustment possible notification image (notification image) 116b (FIG. 18(b)) indicating that an operation for adjusting the light intensity is possible on the image display means 60 at a predetermined timing during a light intensity adjustment possible period in which the light intensity can be adjusted by a player operation, and to display a light intensity setting image 117b (FIG. 19(b)) indicating the light intensity setting status on the image display means 60 when a player operation for light intensity adjustment is performed during the light intensity adjustment possible period. In this embodiment, the up key 35a and down key 35b of the cross operation means 35 are assigned for the light intensity adjustment operation, and during the light intensity adjustment possible period, pressing the up key 35a increases the light intensity, and pressing the down key 35b decreases the light intensity.

The light intensity adjustment notification image 116b is composed of an illustration of the up key 35a and down key 35b used to adjust the light intensity, and the text "Adjust light intensity with," as shown in FIG. 18(b). The light intensity setting image 117b is composed of multiple (five) scale images corresponding to predetermined levels (e.g., five levels) of light intensity, and the text "light intensity," as shown in FIG. 19(b), with the number of scale images corresponding to the current light intensity setting being displayed in a different manner (e.g., display color) from the other scale images.

When the player operates either the up key 35a or the down key 35b during the light intensity adjustment period, if the light intensity adjustment notification image 116b (Fig. 18(b)) is displayed, the light intensity adjustment notification image 116b is erased from the image display means 60. In addition, the light intensity is changed according to the player's operation, and a light intensity setting image 117b (Fig. 19(b)) corresponding to the changed light intensity is displayed for a certain period of time on the image display means 60.

In this embodiment, the light intensity adjustment period and the volume adjustment period are set to the same period, but the two periods may be different. Also, the light intensity adjustment notification image 116b may be displayed at all times during the light intensity adjustment period, or may be displayed only during a specific period such as when waiting for customers. Also, if either the up key 35a or the down key 35b is operated while the light intensity setting image 117b is not displayed, the first operation may display the light intensity setting image 117b but not change the light intensity, and the second or subsequent operation after the light intensity setting image 117b is displayed may change the light intensity.

The customer waiting control means 157 controls the presentation during the customer waiting state (waiting period) from when the customer waiting demo command is received from the main control board 121 until the first and second special pattern display means 53, 54 start varying the first and second special patterns, and is capable of executing customer waiting presentation processing (Figure 20) and menu management processing (Figure 21) in a timer interrupt.

In this embodiment, the period from when the customer waiting demo command is received from the main control board 121 until the first and second special symbols start to vary (during the customer waiting state) is set as a menu operation possible period during which settings can be changed (settings related to the game) by menu selection operations, and during this customer waiting state, the player can press the performance button 34 to display the menu image 118b (Figure 25, etc.), and in this state, the player can select and execute any of the options displayed on the menu image 118b by pressing the up key 35a, down key 35b, and performance button 34 of the cross operation means 35.

In this embodiment, since the cross operation means 35 is also used to adjust the volume and light intensity, it is desirable to exclude the period during which the menu image 118b is displayed (the period during which the cross operation means 35 can be used to select a menu) from the period during which the volume and light intensity can be adjusted, so that the cross operation means 35 cannot be used to adjust the volume and light intensity.

Next, the customer waiting performance processing shown in Figure 20 will be explained. In this customer waiting performance processing, first the customer waiting state flag is judged (S1). This customer waiting state flag indicates whether or not the vehicle is currently waiting for a customer, and is set to 1 if the vehicle is currently waiting for a customer, and 0 if the vehicle is not currently waiting for a customer. If the customer waiting state flag is not 1 (S1: No), it is judged whether or not a customer waiting demo command has been received from the main control board 121 (S2), and if the customer waiting demo command has not been received (S2: No), the customer waiting performance processing ends here.

The customer waiting demo command is sent from the main control board 121 to the performance control board 122 when the first and second special reserved numbers are both 0 and the first and second special symbols are in a waiting state to change, when the machine returns to backup mode from a customer waiting state, when the RAM is cleared, etc.

When a customer waiting demo command is received when not in a customer waiting state (S1: No → S2: Yes), the customer waiting state flag is set to 1 (in a customer waiting state) (S3), and the display of a menu display possible notification image 118a on the image display means 60 is started (S4). Here, the menu display possible notification image (notification image) 118a is for notifying that an operation to display the menu image 118b is possible, and as shown in FIG. 24, it is composed of an illustration showing the effect button 34 used to display the menu being pressed and the words "display menu with."

Then the normal customer waiting performance starts (S5), the demo timer is set to an initial value (S6), and the customer waiting performance processing ends. In the normal customer waiting performance, the image of the performance pattern 114 that was stopped in the previous pattern change continues to be displayed on the image display means 60, the illumination means 159 emits light in a predetermined illumination pattern, and the speakers 18, 25 output predetermined background music. The demo timer is used to count the duration of the normal customer waiting performance, and is initially set to a value corresponding to 180 seconds.

The menu operation possible period starts when the customer waiting demo command is received, but the menu display possible notification image 118a may be displayed on the image display means 60 after a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting command was received. In addition to the predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the customer waiting state begins, the menu display possible notification image 118a may not be displayed during a predetermined period during the customer waiting state (e.g., while the company logo is displayed during the customer waiting demo performance described below).

If the waiting-for-customer state flag is 1 (waiting-for-customer state) in S1 (S1: Yes), it is determined whether the timing for the first and second special symbols to start changing has arrived, i.e., whether the first and second change pattern designation commands have been received (S7). If the first and second special symbols have not yet started changing (S7: No), it is determined whether the normal waiting-for-customer effect is in progress, i.e., whether the normal waiting-for-customer effect is in progress or the demo waiting effect described below is in progress (S8). If the normal waiting-for-customer effect is in progress (S8: Yes), the demo timer is decremented by 1 (S9), and, provided that the value of the demo timer after the decrement is 0 (S10: Yes), the execution of the demo waiting effect is started (S11). On the other hand, if the value of the demo timer after the decrement is not 0 (S10: No), the normal waiting-for-customer effect is continued as is (S10a).

In the customer waiting demo performance, the image display means 60 repeatedly displays a model image, a company logo image, a still image of the performance pattern 114, etc. in a predetermined pattern, the illumination means 159 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern, and the speakers 18, 25 output predetermined background music. Note that the sound output may be stopped in the customer waiting demo performance.

After the customer waiting demo performance starts (S8: No), the customer waiting demo performance is repeatedly executed (S12) until the timing for starting the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols arrives (S7: Yes). Note that the customer waiting demo performance and the customer waiting normal performance may be executed alternately and repeatedly.

In addition, if it is determined in S7 that the timing to start changing the first and second special symbols has arrived (S7: Yes), the customer waiting state flag is set to 0 (S13), the customer waiting normal performance or customer waiting demo performance being executed is terminated (S14), the display of the menu display possible notification image 118a is terminated (S15), the menu no-operation timer is cleared to 0 (S16), and the customer waiting performance processing is terminated. The menu no-operation timer will be described later.

Next, the menu management process shown in FIG. 21 will be described. In this menu management process, first, a subtraction process of the menu no-operation timer is performed, that is, a process of subtracting 1 on the condition that the value is greater than 0 (S21, S22). Here, the menu no-operation timer is used to count the no-operation period while the menu is displayed, and an initial value is set in S48 (FIG. 22) and S66 (FIG. 23) described later.

Next, it is determined whether the effect button 34 or the up and down keys 35a, 35b of the cross operation means 35 have been pressed. If the effect button 34 has been pressed (S23: Yes), a process when the effect button is pressed (S24) is executed. If the up key 35a of the cross operation means 35 has been pressed (S25: Yes), a process when the up key is pressed (S26) is executed. If the down key 35b has been pressed (S27: Yes), a process when the down key is pressed (S28) is executed. Note that in this embodiment, simultaneous pressing of the effect button 34 and the keys of the cross operation means 35 is not permitted.

When the effect button 34 is pressed, the process for when the effect button is pressed (S24) is performed according to the procedure shown in FIG. 22. That is, first, it is determined whether the customer waiting state flag is 1, i.e., whether the menu operation is possible during the period (S41), and if the customer waiting state flag is not 1 (S41: No), the process for when the effect button is pressed ends here.

If the waiting state flag is 1 (S41: Yes), it is determined whether the menu image flag is 1 or not (S42). Here, the menu image flag indicates whether a menu image is being displayed or not, and is set to 1 while a menu image is being displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 25, the menu image 118b is made up of a plurality of (four in this case) selection item images 164a-164d corresponding to a plurality of selection items including "Back" for returning to the previous display state, and a cursor indicating a provisionally selected state is positioned on one of the plurality of selection item images 164a-164d.

The menu image 118b in FIG. 25 is composed of four selection item images 164a to 164d: "History," "Change mode," "Guidance," and "Back." In the initial state, the cursor (shown hatched in the drawing) is positioned on the "Back" selection item image 164d.

If the menu image flag is not 1 in S42 (S42: No), the display of the menu display possible notification image 118a is terminated (S43), and the display of the menu image 118b and the menu operation notification image 118c is started on the image display means 60 (S44, S45), and the menu display sound is output from the speakers 18, 25 (S46). Here, the menu operation notification image 118c is for notifying the operation method related to the menu image 118b, and is composed of an illustration of the up and down keys 35a, 35b of the cross operation means 35 used to move the cursor, the word "select", and an illustration of the performance button 34 used to confirm the selected item (selection confirmation operation) and the word "confirm".

Then, the menu image flag is set to 1 (menu image is being displayed) (S47), the menu no-operation timer is set to an initial value (e.g., a value corresponding to 10 seconds) (S48), and the process when the effect button is pressed is terminated. In this way, if the effect button 34 is pressed while waiting for a customer and the menu image 118b is not being displayed, the menu image 118b is displayed on the image display means 60.

Also, if the menu image flag is 1 (menu image is being displayed) in S42 (S42: Yes), a confirmation sound is output from the speakers 18, 25 (S49), and a specific process corresponding to the selection item image at the cursor position (provisionally selected state) is executed (S50 to S54). That is, if a lower menu exists in the selection item image at the cursor position (S50: Yes), the lower menu is displayed (S51), if the selection item image at the cursor position is "Back" (S52: Yes), the state returns to the previous state (S53), and if the selection item image at the cursor position does not have a lower menu (S50: No) and is not "Back" (S52: No), the process corresponding to the selection item image at the cursor position is executed (S54). Then, the menu non-operation timer is set to an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 10 s) (S48), and the process when the performance button is pressed is terminated. In this way, the act of pressing the performance button 34 while the selection item image is displayed is an example of a selection confirmation operation for selecting the selection item image at the cursor position (provisionally selected state).

In the example of menu image 118b shown in FIG. 25, the selection item image for which a lower menu exists is "mode change." This "mode change" is for changing the mode setting, and when this "mode change" is selected, the lower menu image 119 shown in FIG. 26 is displayed. The lower menu image 119 is made up of multiple selection item images 164a-164e (lower selection items) including "menu screen" for returning to the first menu screen, and the initial position of the cursor is set to any of the selection item images 164a-164d other than "menu screen."

In this embodiment, the arrangement of the first to fourth movable bodies 75a to 78a during the waiting state for customers is different for each of a plurality of types, for example, four types of first to fourth modes, and it is possible to switch between the four types of modes by operating the "mode change" menu. Note that, since the arrangement of the movable bodies 75a to 78a is different for each mode, the movable concealed area C and the non-concealed area D are also different for each mode.

In the first mode, as shown in FIG. 28(a), the first movable body 75a is stopped in the first upper position, the second movable body 76a is stopped in the second lower position, the third movable body 77a is stopped in the third outer position, and the fourth movable body 78a is stopped in the fourth outer position. In the second mode, as shown in FIG. 28(b), only the stopping position of the first movable body 75a is changed from the first upper position to the first lower position, and the lower side of the non-hidden area D is narrower and the upper side is wider than in the first mode.

In the third mode, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the second movable body 76a changes from the second lower position to the second upper position compared to the first mode, and the lower side of the non-hidden area D is narrower than in the first mode. In the fourth mode, as shown in FIG. 28(d), the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a change from the third and fourth outer positions to the third and fourth inner positions, respectively, compared to the third mode, and the width of the non-hidden area D is narrower than in the third mode. Note that the first mode is set as the initial state.

When the lower menu image 119 corresponding to this "mode change" is displayed, it is desirable to set the initial position of the cursor to the selection item image corresponding to the mode at that time (selection item image 164a corresponding to the first mode in the initial state) as shown in FIG. 26, but regardless of the mode at that time, the initial position of the cursor may also be set to the selection item image 164e corresponding to "menu screen" for returning to the initial menu screen.

Note that further submenus may be provided for any of the selection item images of this submenu image 119. In other words, the number of menu hierarchies is arbitrary. Furthermore, the initial position of the cursor when moving to a specific menu image may be different depending on whether the image has been moved from a higher-level menu image or a lower-level menu image, and it is desirable that the initial position of the cursor when returning from a lower-level menu image be set to a selection item image for moving to a higher level, such as "menu screen" or "back."

In the example menu image shown in FIG. 25, the selection item image for which there is no lower menu is "History", and when the selection of this "History" is confirmed, the information on the jackpot history is displayed as shown in FIG. 27. Even when the selection of such a selection item image for which there is no lower menu is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 27, the image display means 60 displays a selection item image such as "Menu screen" for returning to a higher-level menu such as a menu screen, and a menu operation notification image 118c for notifying the confirmation operation of the selection item.

The process when the up key 35a of the directional control means 35 is pressed (S26 in FIG. 21), and the process when the down key 35b is pressed (S28 in FIG. 21) are performed in the procedure shown in FIG. 23. Note that FIG. 23 shows a flowchart of the process when the up key is pressed, and indicates in parentheses only the differences between the process when the down key is pressed and the process when the up key is pressed. Here, the process when the up key is pressed will be explained, and the process when the down key is pressed will also be mentioned.

In the process shown in FIG. 23 when the up key (down key) is pressed, first it is determined whether the menu image flag is 1, i.e., whether a menu image or the like is being displayed (S61), and if the menu image flag is not 1, i.e., if a menu image or the like is not being displayed (S61: No), the process when the up key (down key) is pressed ends here.

If the menu image flag is 1, i.e., if a menu image or the like is being displayed (S61: Yes), it is determined whether the cursor position is at the top position (the bottom position in the case of processing when the down key is pressed) (S62). If it is not at the top position (the bottom position in the case of processing when the down key is pressed) (S62: No), the cursor is moved up one position (down one position in the case of processing when the down key is pressed) (S64). If it is at the top position (the bottom position in the case of processing when the down key is pressed) (S62: Yes), the cursor is moved to the bottom position (the top position in the case of processing when the down key is pressed) (S63). Then, a cursor movement sound is output from the speaker 18, 25 (S65), and the menu no-operation timer is set to an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 10 s) (S66), and the processing when the up key (down key) is pressed is terminated.

In this way, the up and down keys 35a and 35b of the cross operation means 35 are effective for operations related to menu selection when the menu image 118b is displayed, with the up key 35a moving the cursor upward and the down key 35b moving the cursor downward, and successive operations of these keys cause the cursor to move in a cyclical manner through the multiple selection item images.

Returning to FIG. 21, the explanation will continue. Following the above-described processing of S23 to S28, it is determined whether the value of the menu no-operation timer is 0 or not (S29), and if the value of the menu no-operation timer is not 0, that is, if a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has not yet elapsed since the last operation of either the performance button 34 or the up and down keys 35a, 35b of the cross operation means 35, then the menu management processing ends here.

If the value of the menu no-operation timer is 0 in S29, i.e. if a predetermined time (e.g. 10 seconds) has passed since the last operation of the performance button 34 or the up and down keys 35a, 35b of the cross operation means 35 (S29: Yes), and on the condition that the menu image flag is 1 (menu image, etc. is being displayed) (S30: Yes), the display of the menu image 118b and the menu operation notification image 118c is ended (S31, S32), the display of the menu display possible notification image 118a is started (S33), and the menu image flag is set to 0 (S34), and the menu management process is ended. In this way, when the no-operation period during menu display reaches the predetermined time (e.g. 10 seconds), the display of the menu image 118b, etc. is ended and the device enters a state of waiting for operation.

The power saving mode setting means 158 sets the power saving mode, and when a power saving mode that consumes less power than the normal mode is selected, the power saving mode is set while waiting for customers, and a power saving mode notification image 120 (Figure 29, etc.) indicating that the power saving mode is in effect is displayed on the image display means 60. During the power saving mode, power is cut off from the illumination means 159. Note that a switching operation means for selecting either the normal mode or the power saving mode may be provided on the back side of the front frame 3, etc., and may be operable by a member of staff at the amusement hall, etc.

In addition, the device may be set to power-saving mode when the volume is set within a predetermined range (for example, the first level out of the first to fifth levels), and set to normal mode otherwise, and may automatically switch between normal mode and power-saving mode depending on the settings of other settings (for example, volume).

Next, we will explain the relationship between the various images displayed on the image display means 60 and the areas A, B1 to B5, C, and D on the display screen 60a of the image display means 60 for each scene.

Figure 30(a) shows an image displayed on the image display means 60 in one scene while waiting for customers. In the example of Figure 30(a), the first mode (Figure 28(a)) and power saving mode are set, and the normal waiting for customers performance is in progress. Figure 30(b) shows the correspondence between each image in Figure 30(a) and the area on the display screen 60a. Note that in Figure 30(b), images further down the table have a higher display priority (the same applies to Figures 31(b) to 38(b)).

As shown in Figures 30(a) and (b), the display screen 60a displays a background image 160 (shown in grey in Figure 30(a)) covering the entire screen area A, and an image of the performance pattern 114 stopped at the previous pattern change is displayed across the non-concealed area D and the movable concealed area C. Of the performance pattern 114, the pattern image 114a is displayed in its entirety in the non-concealed area D, and part of the decorative image 114b is displayed in the movable concealed area C, behind the first movable body 75a. This makes it possible to effectively use the limited non-concealed area D while clearly reporting the result of the previous pattern change.

Of the three left, right, and center performance patterns 114, the left and right performance patterns 114 may be displayed across the non-concealed area D and at least one of the first to third fixed concealed areas B1 to B3. This allows a wide spacing between the three performance patterns 114, and makes effective use of the limited non-concealed area D to more clearly notify the results of the pattern changes. In this case, it is preferable that the portion displayed in the first to third fixed concealed areas B1 to B3 is the decorative image 114b, but a portion of the pattern image 114a may be displayed in the first to third fixed concealed areas B1 to B3.

The layout of the decorative image 114b, such as its size, may be varied depending on the type (number) of the pattern image 114a. In this case, the decorative image 114b may be displayed across the non-concealed area D and a specified concealed area (which may be any of the concealed areas described above) even if the decorative image 114b differs depending on the type of pattern image 114a. Also, some decorative images 114b may be displayed across the non-concealed area D and a specified concealed area, and other decorative images 114b may be displayed only in the non-concealed area D. Also, the layout of the decorative image 114b may be varied depending on the moving lines of the three performance patterns 114, left, right, and center.

The decorative image 114b is displayed across the non-hidden area D and the specified hidden area, but it is desirable to configure it this way when the pattern is stationary, for example. When the pattern is changing, it does not have to be displayed across the non-hidden area D and the specified hidden area, and various display configurations may be used depending on the changing state of the pattern.

A predetermined animation may be added to the pattern image 114a and the decorative image 114b. For example, the pattern image 114a and the decorative image 114b may be animated when the pattern starts to change or stops temporarily, when a reach occurs or the pattern stops, or when the pattern stops in a losing state or a winning state. There may be multiple animations, and they may be different depending on the type of the pattern image 114a or the decorative image 114b or the above-mentioned situation. Even when such animation is performed, the decorative image 114b may be displayed across the non-hidden area D and the predetermined hidden area.

In addition, the decorative image 114b may be displayed across both the non-hidden area D and the specified hidden area when an animation is being executed, and only in the non-hidden area D when the animation is not being executed. Alternatively, the decorative image 114b may be displayed only in the non-hidden area D when the animation is being executed, and only in the non-hidden area D and the specified hidden area when the animation is not being executed. In this way, the visibility of the decorative image 114b can be improved at least when the animation is being executed.

The decorative image 114b and the pattern image 114a of the performance pattern 114 may be changed depending on the game state (normal/time-saving/latent/high probability), game mode (background A/background B), special game mode (preview mode), etc. In this case, the decorative image 114b may be configured to be displayed differently depending on the game state, game mode, and special game mode, between being displayed across the non-concealed area D and a specified concealed area and being displayed only in the non-concealed area D.

Furthermore, the error notification image 163, the menu display possible notification image 118a, the volume adjustment possible notification image 116a, and the light intensity adjustment possible notification image 116b are all displayed in the non-concealed area D. Since these images have a higher display priority than the performance pattern 114, if they overlap part of the performance pattern 114, they will be displayed in front of it, but in that case it is desirable to display them so as to overlap the decorative image 114b, avoiding the pattern image 114a.

The volume setting image 117a, which is displayed when the player operates the left and right keys 35c, 35d while the volume adjustable notification image 116a is displayed, and the light intensity setting image 117b, which is displayed when the player operates the up and down keys 35a, 35b while the light intensity adjustable notification image 116b is displayed, are also displayed in their entirety in the non-concealed area D as shown in FIG. 30(b) (not shown in FIG. 30(a)).

The reserved pedestal image 161 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 60a, straddling the non-concealed area D and the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and at least a portion of the movable concealed area C (here, the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5). During the waiting state for customers, the first and second special reserved numbers are both 0, so the reserved pedestal image 161 is of low importance, and therefore the non-concealed area D can be used more effectively by displaying at least a portion of it in an area other than the non-concealed area D. Note that the entire reserved pedestal image 161 may be displayed in an area other than the non-concealed area D, or the reserved pedestal image 161 need not be displayed.

The power saving mode notification image 120 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 60a and above the reserved pedestal image 161, spanning the non-hidden area D and at least a part of the first to fifth fixed hidden areas B1 to B5 (here, the first to fourth fixed hidden areas B1 to B4). Since the power saving mode notification is less important than an error notification, etc., the non-hidden area D can be used more effectively by displaying at least a part of the power saving mode notification image 120 in an area other than the non-hidden area D.

When multiple errors are to be notified, the error notification images 163 may all be displayed in the non-hidden area D. When multiple errors are to be notified, a predetermined number (approximately 1 to 4) of error notification images 163 may be displayed in the non-hidden area D, and when more than the predetermined number of errors are to be notified, the errors exceeding the predetermined number may be displayed across the non-hidden area D and at least one of the first to fifth fixed hidden areas B1 to B5, or may be displayed in the first to fifth fixed hidden areas B1 to B5.

The display area may also be set according to the type of error, with error notification images 163 for errors such as a lower tray full error that may occur during normal play being displayed in the non-concealed area D, and error notification images 163 for errors that cannot occur during normal play, such as a door open, being displayed at least in part in the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5. In the case of a lower tray full error, the player must open the lower tray to clear the error, so it is desirable to display the error notification image 163 in the non-concealed area D where it is most easily visible to the player.

In addition, regarding errors that may occur when cheating occurs, such as magnetic detection errors, it is necessary to warn the player and inform hall employees that cheating may have occurred, so it is desirable to display the error notification image 163 in the non-concealed area D, which is most easily visible to players and hall employees.

Figure 31(a) shows a state in which a menu image 118b is displayed on the display screen 60a. This menu image 118b is displayed when the player operates the effect button 34 during the menu operation possible period (waiting for customers state). Also, Figure 31(b) shows the correspondence between each image in Figure 31(a) and the area on the display screen 60a.

As shown in Figures 31(a) and (b), the display screen 60a displays a background image 160 (shown in gray in Figure 31(a)) covering the entire screen area A, and also displays four selection item images 164a to 164d that make up a menu image 118b, and a menu operation notification image 118c. When this menu image 118b is displayed, the cursor (shown in hatching in Figure 31(a)) is positioned on the selection item image 164d that corresponds to "Back."

At least the selection item image (initial provisional selection item image) 164d corresponding to the initial cursor position is displayed entirely in the non-hidden area D, whereas the other selection item images 164a-164c, at least one of which (here, selection item image 164a corresponding to "History") extends outside the non-hidden area D and is displayed straddling the non-hidden area D and the movable hidden area C (for example, behind the first movable body 75a), and the others (here, selection item images 164b, 164c) are displayed entirely in the non-hidden area D. Also, the menu operation notification image 118c is displayed entirely in the non-hidden area D.

In this way, by displaying at least the entire selection item image (initial provisional selection item image) corresponding to the initial cursor position in the non-concealed area D, the player can be sure to recognize the initial cursor position, and can smoothly move on to the subsequent cursor movement operation and selection confirmation operation. Furthermore, by displaying at least one selection item image other than the initial cursor position straddling the non-concealed area D and the area outside it (for example, the movable concealed area C), the non-concealed area D can be used more effectively. Of course, all four selection item images 164a to 164d that make up the menu image 118b may be displayed within the non-concealed area D.

The menu operation notification image 118c may be displayed only in the non-hidden area D, and the selection item images 164a-164d corresponding to the initial cursor position and the other selection item images 164a-164d may be displayed straddling the non-hidden area D and the hidden area. Even with this configuration, each selection item is not hidden from view, and at least the menu operation notification image 118c is visible, so that the player can be reliably notified that a specific menu operation has been activated.

The menu image 118b may have a first menu hierarchical level and a second menu hierarchical level in which the display screen 60a transitions when the selection items displayed in the first menu hierarchical level are operated by the player. For example, the menu hierarchical level shown in FIG. 31 may be the first menu hierarchical level, and when a mode change is selected from among the selection items, a second menu hierarchical level may be displayed in which the player can select which mode to set. The menu hierarchical level is not limited to the first and second hierarchical levels, and multiple hierarchical levels may be provided. It is preferable that the second menu hierarchical level corresponding to each selection item selected by the player has the same display mode as the first menu hierarchical level. It is also preferable that the display mode be different between the first menu hierarchical level and the second menu hierarchical level. However, it is preferable that the display mode be different from the above-mentioned display modes.

Even if a specific error occurs while the menu image 118b is being displayed, it is desirable to display the error notification image 163 in the non-hidden area D. It is also desirable to display the error notification image 163 superimposed on each selection item of the menu image 118b.

Even when the menu image 118b is displayed, the volume or light intensity can be adjusted by operating a predetermined operating means or by selecting and operating a predetermined option. In this case, it is preferable to display the volume setting image 117a or light intensity setting image 117b only in the non-hidden area D.

When the movable bodies 75a, 76a move from the origin position toward the specified performance position, the movable bodies 75a, 76a may stop at the specified performance position and not move due to a malfunction or the like. Even if the menu image 118b is displayed with the movable bodies 75a, 76a still positioned at the performance position, it is preferable that the display mode of each selection item of the menu image 118b, the menu operation notification image 118c, etc., the error notification image 163, the volume setting image 117a, and the light intensity setting image 117b are configured so as not to overlap with the movable bodies 75a, 76a and to be displayed only in the non-hidden area D or in a position that straddles the non-hidden area D and the hidden area.

When initializing the movable body at power-on, RAM clear, or other specified timing, it is desirable to display at least the selection item image (initial provisional selection item image) corresponding to the initial cursor position in a position that does not overlap with the movement path of the movable body at the time of initialization when viewed from the front. This allows the player to reliably recognize the initial cursor position even if a menu display operation is performed while the movable body is being initialized.

Of the selection item image corresponding to the initial cursor position, the portion other than the portion indicating the selection item name (for example, the text portion "Back") may be displayed in a position that overlaps with the movement path of the movable body at the time of initialization when viewed from the front. It is also desirable to display the menu operation notification image 118c in a position that does not overlap with the movement path of the movable body at the time of initialization when viewed from the front.

Figures 32(a) and 33(a) are examples of the fluctuation of the performance pattern 114 due to a reach fluctuation pattern, with Figure 32(a) showing the normal fluctuation before the reach is established, and Figure 33(a) showing the reach fluctuation after the reach is established. As is clear from Figures 32(a) and 33(a), the arrangement (stop position) of the movable body differs during the normal fluctuation shown in Figure 32(a) and during the reach fluctuation shown in Figure 33(a), and as a result the size of the non-concealed area D differs.

In other words, during the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 32(a), the first movable body 75a stops at the upper position, the second movable body 76a stops at the upper position, and the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a stop at the inner position, as in the fourth mode shown in FIG. 28(d). However, at a predetermined timing, just before the end of the normal fluctuation, the second movable body 76a moves to the lower lower position, and the third and fourth movable bodies 77a and 78a move to the outer outer positions, as shown in FIG. 33(a), thereby expanding the non-concealed area D to the lower side and both the left and right sides. Note that the timing for changing the stopping position of the movable body in the pattern fluctuation due to the reach fluctuation pattern may be the start of the reach performance, when the look-ahead performance is executed, when the movable body performance is executed, when the reach performance is ended, etc.

In response to the change (enlargement) of the non-hidden area D, the display mode of the image displayed on the display screen 60a also changes. That is, during the normal change shown in FIG. 32, the reserved pedestal image 161 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 60a, straddling the non-hidden area D and at least a part of the first to fifth fixed hidden areas B1 to B5 (here, the first to fourth fixed hidden areas B1 to B4), and the reserved display images X1 to Y1 and the changing reserved image Z are displayed in front of the reserved pedestal image 161 and within the non-hidden area D. Note that all or part of the reserved display images X1 to Y1 and the changing reserved image Z may be placed in at least one of the movable hidden area C and the first to fifth fixed hidden areas B1 to B5, but in that case, it is desirable that the entirety of them can be seen by the player when he or she looks in.

Meanwhile, during the reach-changing state shown in FIG. 33, the reserved base image 161 and reserved display images X1-, Y1- are erased, leaving only the changing reserved image Z, and the changing reserved image Z moves to the expanded side (here, the lower side) of the non-concealed area D and is displayed straddling the non-concealed area D and the area outside it (for example, the fourth fixed concealed area B4). Note that when viewed from the front, part of the changing reserved image Z during the reach-changing state is hidden behind the central display frame unit 47, but the entire image can be seen if the player looks in from above.

This, combined with the expansion of the non-hidden area D, allows a larger display area to be used for the reach effect. In this case, it is desirable to display the reach effect image 171 covering the entire screen area A, as shown in FIG. 33(b).

The reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1-, Y1-, and the changing reserved image Z may be moved downward in accordance with the movement of the second movable body 76a, and the reserved pedestal image 161 and the reserved display images X1-, Y1- may be displayed so as to disappear outside the display screen 60a, or may be displayed in an enlarged area without being erased. Also, the reserved pedestal image 161 may be erased, and the reserved display images X1-, Y1-, and the changing reserved image Z may be left in the enlarged area.

Furthermore, during the normal change shown in FIG. 32, the performance pattern 114 changes with part of the decorative image 114b displayed in an area outside the non-concealed area D (e.g., the movable concealed area C) and the rest displayed in the non-concealed area D, and during the reach change shown in FIG. 33, the decorative image 114b is erased and only the pattern image 114a is displayed in the non-concealed area D.

The volume setting image 117a that is displayed when the player performs a volume adjustment operation is displayed entirely in the non-concealed area D during both normal fluctuations shown in FIG. 32 and reach fluctuations shown in FIG. 33, but the display position may be moved to the enlarged side (e.g., lower side) of the non-concealed area D compared to normal fluctuations during reach fluctuations. In this case, it is desirable to move the display position of the volume setting image 117a after the movement of the second movable body 76a, etc. is completed.

This is to prevent the player from noticing that the volume setting image 117a will move to a reach variation due to the movement of its display position. Note that the light intensity setting image 117b (not shown in Figures 32(a) and 33(a)) that is displayed when the player performs a light intensity adjustment operation is handled in the same way as the volume setting image 117a.

In addition, for images such as the volume setting image 117a and the light intensity setting image 117b that are displayed in the non-hidden area D during both normal fluctuation (before the non-hidden area D is changed) and reach fluctuation (after the non-hidden area D is changed), the display position may be prevented from moving during reach fluctuation by displaying them in an area belonging to the non-hidden area D both before and after enlargement. Also, as in the examples of Figures 32 and 33, if the position and/or width of the non-hidden area D can be changed by switching the stop position of the movable body during pattern fluctuation, the player may be allowed to arbitrarily select whether or not to make the change. Also, during reach fluctuation, the center performance pattern during the scrolling fluctuation may be displayed larger than the other left performance pattern, right performance pattern, etc. This can shorten the time it takes for one performance pattern to pass on the display screen 60a by scrolling.

When moving the movable bodies 75a, 76a from the origin position to a predetermined performance position during reach fluctuation, it is desirable to display the volume setting image 117a and/or the light intensity setting image 117b in the non-concealed area D even when the movable bodies 75a, 76a are located at the predetermined performance position. Naturally, the player can adjust the volume and/or the light intensity even in such a situation, but it is desirable that the setting results are not actually reflected until the predetermined performance involving the movement of the movable bodies 75a, 76a has ended. Also, the above-mentioned configuration may be used even for performances that do not involve the movement of the movable bodies 75a, 76a.

By doing this, it is possible to execute the specified effects without reducing the interest of the effects produced by sounds and lights when they are executed. In addition, since the setting operations performed by the player are not invalid but are validly accepted, the player will not experience any inconvenience or discomfort such as suddenly being unable to perform setting operations.

Figure 34 (a) shows the display area of step-up preview images SU1 to SU5 that are displayed at each stage in a step-up preview performance, which is an example of a normal preview performance. In this step-up preview performance, the reliability of a jackpot is indicated by the number of stages to which the performance progresses out of the five stages from the first stage to the fifth stage, and the display area gradually changes (expands in this case) from step-up preview image SU1 to step-up preview image SU5.

In the examples of Figs. 34(a) and (b), the step-up preview images SU1 and SU2 are displayed entirely in the non-hiding area D, but part of the step-up preview image SU3 extends beyond the non-hiding area D and is displayed in the movable hidden area C, and the step-up preview image SU4 extends not only into the movable hidden area C but also into the second to fifth fixed hidden areas B2 to B5, and finally the step-up preview image SU5 (not shown in Fig. 34(a)) is displayed in the entire screen area A (Fig. 34(b)). Note that even if part of the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5 are displayed outside the non-hiding area D, it is desirable to display the entire part of each image that suggests the reliability of a jackpot (such as the text part showing the character's lines) in the non-hiding area D.

Also, an introduction effect may be performed when the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5 are displayed at a predetermined display position. The introduction effect is intended to inform the player of the occurrence of the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5 by moving the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5 toward the predetermined display position or by displaying an introduction effect image immediately before the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5 are displayed at the predetermined display position. This introduction effect may be displayed so as to straddle all or at least one of the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the non-concealed area D.

The volume setting image 117a, which is displayed when the player performs a volume adjustment operation, is displayed in its entirety in the non-concealed area D, but it is desirable to display it while avoiding parts that suggest the reliability of a jackpot, etc. (such as text parts showing the character's lines). The same is true for the light intensity setting image 117b (not shown) that is displayed when the player performs a light intensity adjustment operation (not shown in Figure 34 (a)). Note that it is acceptable to display the volume setting image 117a, light intensity setting image 117b, etc., over parts of the step-up preview image other than those that suggest the reliability of a jackpot, etc., or over introductory effects, etc.

By doing this, even if most of the non-hidden area D is used to display the step-up preview image, the volume setting image 117a and the light intensity setting image 117b can be displayed in the non-hidden area D without impairing the visibility of the step-up preview image.

When displaying step-up preview images SU1 to SU5, basically the display starts with step-up preview image SU1, and then step-up preview images SU2, SU3, ... SU5 are displayed in stages, but when displaying the next stage SU image, the previous SU image may be deleted. Also, the next SU image may be displayed without deleting the previous SU image. In this case, it is desirable to display the next SU image so that it overlaps part of the previous SU image. Furthermore, larger SU images may be displayed as the stages progress.

In addition, the next SU image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the previous SU image, but for example, in the case where step-up preview image SU1 is displayed, step-up preview image SU2 is displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of step-up preview image SU1, and step-up preview image SU3 is displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of step-up preview image SU2, step-up preview image SU1 may be deleted when step-up preview image SU3 is displayed. Also, instead of simply deleting, step-up preview image SU1 may be made invisible by superimposing step-up preview image SU3 on step-up preview image SU1.

It may be possible to execute a false step-up preview performance (failed performance). In a false performance, each SU image of the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5 can be displayed, but the display mode is slightly different from that in a successful performance. For example, in a false performance of the step-up preview image SU1, after the introductory performance of the step-up preview image SU1 is executed once, the step-up preview image SU1 in the non-executed state (for example, only the character is displayed and no speech bubble is displayed), and when the step-up preview image SU1 is executed after that, the step-up preview image SU1 in the executed state (the character and speech bubble are displayed) is displayed, but since this is a false performance, the step-up preview image SU1 in the executed state is not displayed, and the step-up performance is ended by deleting the step-up preview image SU1 in the non-executed state (with a fade-out).

When executing a false effect in this way, the SU image for the introductory effect or non-executing state may also be configured to be displayed in a specified display area for each of the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5. Also, the step-up preview image SU5 may be configured so that there is no false effect.

The display areas of the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5 may be in various display modes other than those described in the above embodiment. For example, the display mode of the step-up preview image SU5 may be applied to the step-up preview image SU1 or the step-up preview image SU2, and the display mode of the step-up preview image SU1 or the step-up preview image SU2 may be applied to the step-up preview images SU3 to SU5. In this way, the above-mentioned display modes may be set appropriately for each SU image.

Figures 35(a) and 36(a) show the display image of the image display means 60 in a button conversation preview effect, which is an example of a normal preview effect. Note that this button conversation preview effect is a fusion of a button preview effect and a conversation preview effect, and when the player operates the effect button 34 during the valid operation period, an operation time effect image 165 is displayed showing a scene in which a character speaks a line, and the content of the line suggests the reliability of a jackpot. Note that during the valid operation period, an operation guidance image 166 is displayed to advise the player to operate the effect button (operation means) 34.

Figure 35 (a) shows the state in which an operation guidance image 166 is displayed during the valid operation period. The operation guidance image 166 is composed of an illustration showing the effect button 34 being pressed and the text "PUSH!", and is displayed entirely in the non-concealed area D. In addition, radial and other effect images 167 are displayed around the operation guidance image 166, spanning the non-concealed area D and the area outside it (here, the movable concealed area C and the third fixed concealed area B3).

A gauge image showing the progress of the effective operation period may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable that the gauge image is displayed in the non-hidden area D. The operation guidance image 166 may be displayed so that a part of it (for example, the part showing the performance button 34) straddles at least one of the hidden areas B1 to B5 and C, but even in this case, it is preferable that the gauge part is displayed in the non-hidden area D. When multiple operation means are provided and a preview performance (button preview performance) corresponding to each of the multiple operation means can be executed, it is preferable that each preview performance is configured as described above. Also, when there is a difference in the reliability of a jackpot among multiple preview performances corresponding to multiple operation means, it is possible to configure only the preview performance with a high reliability as described above.

Also, FIG. 36(a) shows a state in which the player operates the effect button 34 in the state shown in FIG. 35(a) and an operation effect image 165 is displayed. This operation effect image 165 is composed of a first display section 165a consisting of characters representing lines suggesting the reliability of a big win, and a second display section 165b consisting of other characters, speech bubbles, etc., and the first display section 165a is displayed in its entirety in the non-concealed area D, and the second display section 165b is displayed across the non-concealed area D and its outer area (here, the transparent concealed area B4a of the fourth fixed concealed area B4, but of course the other concealed areas B1 to B3, B5, and C may also be used). The transparent concealed area B4a is an area corresponding to the rear side of the transparent intrusion prevention means 111, so the second display section 165b behind the intrusion prevention means 111 can be seen even from the front.

In addition, in both Figures 35(a) and 36(a), the changing performance pattern 114 is displayed in its entirety in the non-concealed area D as only the pattern image 114a, and the volume setting image 117a that is displayed when the player performs a volume adjustment operation is also displayed in its entirety in the non-concealed area D. The same is true for the light intensity setting image 117b (not shown) that is displayed when the player performs a light intensity adjustment operation (not shown in Figures 35(a) and 36(a)).

As types of operation guidance images 166, various different operation guidance images 166 such as "repeated press", "long press", "don't press", and "release" may be displayed. Furthermore, as types of operation buttons, when a plurality of operation means are provided, a first button image and a second button image may be displayed. Furthermore, when it is possible to change the mode of one operation means, a button image of the first mode, a button image of the second mode, etc. may be displayed. Furthermore, depending on the reliability of the lottery result of the variable display, the display mode of the button image may be displayed in various display modes such as blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.

It is desirable to display the volume setting image 117a and/or light intensity adjustment image 117b so as not to overlap with the gauge image, including the effect button image and operation guidance image 166. In addition, if the operation effective period differs depending on the display mode of the effect button 34 or the display mode of the operation guidance image 166, it is possible to enlarge or reduce the display area of the gauge image, but in any case, it is desirable to display them in a position that does not overlap with the gauge image.

When performing effects that involve button operations, such as button conversation preview effects, the player can of course adjust the volume and/or light intensity even in such situations, but it is desirable that the setting results are not actually reflected until the button operation effect ends. However, the setting results may actually be reflected at least by the end of the operation valid period during which the button image or gauge image is displayed, or may be reflected after the player performs an operation and before the operation effect image is displayed and the display ends.

By doing this, it is possible to execute the specified effects without reducing the interest of the effects produced by sounds and lights when they are executed. In addition, since the setting operations performed by the player are not invalid but are validly accepted, the player will not experience any inconvenience or discomfort such as suddenly being unable to perform setting operations.

Figures 37(a) and 38(a) show the display images of the image display means 60 in a mini character preview performance, which is an example of a normal preview performance. In this mini character preview performance, as shown in Figure 37(a), first, multiple mini character images appear, for example a first mini character image (first performance body image) 168 and a second mini character image (second performance body image) 169. At this time, both the first mini character image 168 and the second mini character image 169 are displayed straddling the non-concealed area D and the area outside it (here, the movable concealed area C).

As shown in FIG. 38(a), the display positions of the mini character images 168 and 169 are changed so that the proportion of the first mini character image 168 displayed in the non-hidden area D is reduced, and the proportion of the second mini character image 169 displayed in the non-hidden area D is increased, and the reliability display image 170 is displayed in the non-hidden area D corresponding to the second mini character image 169. The reliability display image 170 displays the lines of the second mini character image 169, and is composed of a first display section 170a consisting of characters representing the lines suggesting the reliability of a jackpot, and a second display section 170b consisting of other text such as speech bubbles. Note that the first display section 170a may be displayed in its entirety in the non-hidden area D, and at least a portion of the second display section 170b may be displayed outside the non-hidden area D (for example, in the movable hidden area C).

The changing performance pattern 114 is displayed in its entirety in the non-concealed area D with only the pattern image 114a, and the volume setting image 117a that is displayed when the player performs the volume adjustment operation is also displayed in its entirety in the non-concealed area D. The same is true for the light intensity setting image 117b (not shown) that is displayed when the player performs the light intensity adjustment operation (not shown in Figs. 37(a) and 38(a)). Note that the volume setting image 117a and the light intensity setting image 117b are set to a higher priority than the reliability display image 170, so when they overlap with the reliability display image 170, the volume setting image 117a etc. are displayed in front, but it is desirable to display the volume setting image 117a and the light intensity setting image 117b so that they do not overlap at least the first display portion 170a of the reliability display image 170.

The reserved pedestal image 161 is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 60a, straddling the non-hidden area D and the area outside it (here, the first to fourth fixed hidden areas B1 to B4), and the reserved display images X1-, Y1- and the changing reserved image Z are displayed in front of the reserved pedestal image 161 and within the non-hidden area D. Here, the reserved pedestal image 161 is set to a higher priority than the mini character images 168 and 169, and a part of the second mini character image 169 overlaps with the reserved pedestal image 161 and is hidden behind it (Fig. 37(a)). When the second mini character image 169 moves so that the proportion displayed in the non-hidden area D increases (Fig. 37(a) → Fig. 38(a)), the proportion of the part not hidden by the reserved pedestal image 161 also increases. Note that the mini character images 168 and 169 may be set to a higher priority than the reserved pedestal image 161.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is equipped with an image display means 60 capable of displaying images on a display screen 60a, game members 45, 47, 49, 74 arranged in front of the display screen 60a, movable bodies 75a to 78a configured to be operable in front of the display screen 60a and capable of stopping at a predetermined stopping position, and operation means 34, 35 that can be operated by a player. The display screen 60a has fixed concealed areas (first display areas) B1 to B5 corresponding to the rear of the game members 45, 47, 49, 74 when viewed from the front, and ...2 to B3 corresponding to the rear of the stopping positions of the movable bodies 75a to 78a. It is composed of a movable concealed area (second display area) C corresponding to the side, and a non-concealed area (third display area) D which is neither the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 nor the movable concealed area C, and based on the operation of the operation means 34, 35 by the player, it is possible to set the game, and it is possible to display notification images 116a, 116b, 118a which notify that the operation of the operation means 34, 35 is possible, and it is configured so that the notification images 116a, 116b, 118a are not displayed in the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C, but are displayed in the non-concealed area D.

In addition, a menu image 118b having multiple selection items can be displayed, and the notification image includes a menu display possible notification image 118a indicating that an operation to display the menu image 118b is possible.

A volume setting image 117a showing the volume setting status can be displayed in the non-hidden area D, not in the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C. A light intensity setting image 117b showing the light intensity setting status can be displayed in the non-hidden area D, not in the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C. An error notification image 163 for notifying an error can be displayed in the non-hidden area D, not in the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C. A power saving mode can be switched to in which power consumption is lower than normal, and a power saving mode notification image 120 showing that the power saving mode is in effect can be displayed across the non-hidden area D and the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5.

The game machine further includes a start detection processing means 138 that acquires a random number value each time the start means 56, 57 detects a game ball and stores the random number value in the random number storage means 139 up to a predetermined upper limit, a pattern display means 53, 54 that changes and displays the pattern based on the random number value stored in the random number storage means 139 when a pattern change start condition is met, and a profit state generating means 142 that generates a profit state when the stopped pattern after the change by the pattern display means 53, 54 becomes a specific pattern. By displaying the reserved display images X1-, Y1- superimposed on the reserved base image 161 on the image display means 60, it is possible to notify the reserved number, which is the number of random numbers stored in the random number storage means 139 and not yet used for pattern change by the pattern display means 53, 54, and the reserved base image 161 can be displayed across the non-hidden area D and the fixed hidden areas B1-B5.

The effect pattern 114, which is composed of a pattern image 114a and a decorative image 114b, can be displayed by the image display means 60. During a waiting period when the effect pattern 114 is not displayed, the effect pattern 114 when it stopped at the previous pattern change can be displayed. Of the effect patterns 114 during the waiting period, the pattern image 114a can be displayed in the non-concealed area D, and the decorative image 114b can be displayed straddling the non-concealed area D and the movable concealed area C. In this case, the stopping positions of the movable bodies 75a to 78a can be changed in multiple ways, and in any of the multiple stopping positions, the pattern image 114a can be displayed in the non-concealed area D, and the decorative image 114b can be displayed straddling the non-concealed area D and the movable concealed area C.

Generally, multiple types of performance patterns 114 (e.g., nine types corresponding to the numbers 1 to 9) are prepared, but the decorative image 114b has a different design for each type, so the size and shape may also differ for each type. Even in such cases, it is desirable to adopt the above-mentioned configuration for all types of performance patterns 114.

Also, the above configuration may be adopted for only either the odd symbols, which are often advantageous to the player when forming a jackpot mode (specific mode), or the even symbols. For the performance symbols 114 that form the even symbols, the pattern image 114a may be displayed in the non-concealed area D, and the decorative image 114b may be displayed across the non-concealed area D and the movable concealed area C, and the performance symbols 114 that form the odd symbols may be configured to be displayed in their entirety in the non-concealed area D.

The stopping positions of the movable bodies 75a to 78a may be changed in a number of different ways, and the notification images 116a, 116b, and 118a may be displayed in the non-hidden area D in any of the multiple stopping positions.

In addition, an operation-time display image (preview display image) 165 relating to the reliability of the occurrence of a profitable state can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and the operation-time display image (preview display image) 165 is composed of a first display section 165a indicating the reliability and a second display section 165b other than the reliability, and the first display section 165a can be displayed within the non-concealed area D, and the second display section 165b can be displayed across at least one of the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C and the non-concealed area D.

Furthermore, the game members 45, 47, 49, and 74 have a transparent portion 111, the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 include a transparent concealed area (first transparent display area) B4a corresponding to the rear side of the transparent portion 111, and the second display portion 165b can be displayed across the transparent concealed area B4a and the non-concealed area D. In this case, an intrusion prevention means 111 for preventing game balls from intruding to the rear side is provided on the lower front side of the image display means 60, and at least a part of the intrusion prevention means 111 may be a transparent portion.

In addition, the volume setting image 117a indicating the volume setting status can be displayed on the image display means 60 with a higher priority than the operation performance image (preview performance image) 165, and the volume setting image 117a can be displayed in the non-hidden area D so as not to overlap at least the first display section 165a. Note that the transparent hidden area is an area equivalent to the non-hidden area D, and at least a part of the image described above as being displayed in the non-hidden area D may also be displayed in the transparent hidden area.

In addition, multiple stages of step-up preview images SU1 to SU5 can be displayed on the display screen 60a as a preview effect regarding the reliability of the occurrence of a profitable state, and the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5 are configured so that the display area can be changed according to the stage, and the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5 can be displayed within the non-concealed area D up to a first predetermined stage, and after the first predetermined stage, straddling at least one of the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C and the non-concealed area D.

Furthermore, among the step-up preview images SU1 to SU5, the parts suggesting reliability can be displayed in the non-concealed area D at all of the multiple stages. Also, the volume setting image 117a showing the volume setting status can be displayed on the image display means 60 with a higher priority than the preview performance images SU1 to SU5, and the volume setting image 117a can be displayed in the non-concealed area D so as not to overlap at least the parts suggesting reliability.

In addition, a menu image 118b having a plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and when any of the plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e is selected by a selection operation, a process corresponding to the selection item image is executed. When any of the plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e is in a provisionally selected state and a selection confirmation operation is performed, that selection item image is selected. Of the plurality of selection item images 164a to 164e, an initial provisionally selected item image that is initially set to a provisionally selected state can be displayed in the non-hidden area D.

Furthermore, among the multiple selection item images 164a to 164e, at least a portion of the selection item images other than the initial provisionally selected item image can be displayed across the non-hidden area D and the movable hidden area C. Furthermore, the selection item image corresponding to the process of returning to the upper screen may be the initial provisionally selected item image. Of course, the selection item image may be displayed across the non-hidden area D and at least one of the first to fourth fixed hidden areas B1 to B4.

In addition, when the operating means 34 is operated during the valid operation period, an operation performance image 165 can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and an operation guidance image 166 indicating that the operating means 34 should be operated during the valid operation period and an effect image 167 corresponding to this operation guidance image 166 can be displayed on the display screen 60a, and the entire operation guidance image 166 can be displayed in the non-concealed area D, and the effect image 167 can be displayed across at least one of the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C and the non-concealed area D.

The operation-time display image 165 is composed of a first display section 165a indicating the reliability of the occurrence of a profitable state and a second display section 165b other than that, and the entire first display section 165a can be displayed in the non-concealed area D, and the second display section 165b can be displayed across at least one of the fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C, and the non-concealed area D.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the movable concealed area C and expand the non-concealed area D by moving the movable bodies 75a to 78a at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the patterns. The predetermined timing can be when a reach state is established in the variable display of the patterns or in the vicinity of that timing. In addition, the display position of the predetermined image displayed on the display screen 60a can be changed in response to the expansion of the non-concealed area D. In this case, the display position of the predetermined image can be changed after the movement of the movable bodies 75a to 78a is completed and the non-concealed area D is expanded.

The display position of the specified image can be moved in the direction of expansion of the non-hidden area D. The specified image can be displayed in its entirety within the non-hidden area D both before and after the non-hidden area D is expanded. The specified image includes at least one of a volume setting image 117a indicating the volume setting status and a light intensity setting image 117b indicating the light intensity setting status.

When changing the display position of the specified image, it is also possible to erase a part of the specified image. The specified image includes pending display images X1~, Y1~ and a changing pending image Z. It is also possible to change the display position of the changing pending image Z and erase the pending display images X1~, Y1~. It is also possible to change the display position of the changing pending image Z and erase the pending pedestal image 161.

In addition, in the preview performance regarding the reliability of the occurrence of the profitable state, the display positions of the first performance body image 168 and the second performance body image 169 can be changed so that the proportion of the first performance body image 168 displayed in the non-concealed area D is reduced and the proportion of the second performance body image 169 displayed in the non-concealed area D is increased, and a reliability display image 170 regarding the reliability of the occurrence of the profitable state can be displayed in the non-concealed area D corresponding to the second performance body image 169.

Figures 39 to 60 show an example of the second embodiment. The only structural difference between the pachinko machine of this embodiment and the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is the configuration of the movable performance means. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for configurations common to both embodiments, and explanations will be omitted unless particularly necessary.

As shown in Figs. 39 to 42, the pachinko machine of this embodiment has multiple movable performance means, for example two movable performance means, a tilt movable performance means 201 and a lift movable performance means 202, arranged on the front side of the rear mounting base 61. As shown in Fig. 41 etc., the tilt movable performance means 201 has a tilt movable means 203 and a tilt drive means 204 that drives the tilt movable means 203. The tilt movable means 203 has multiple, for example three display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c on the left, right, and bottom, and two interlocking parts 203d, 203e that interlock the three display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c, and the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are supported from the rear side by mounting bases 205a to 205c fixed to the rear mounting base 61, respectively.

The left display frame movable body 203a is disposed in front of the image display means 60 in correspondence with the left side thereof, and is formed in a generally L-shape in front view with a vertically long vertical frame section and an upper left frame section that protrudes from the upper end of the vertical frame section at a right angle generally to the right. A front-to-rear slide shaft 206 is provided on the upper end of the left display frame movable body 203a, and this slide shaft 206 is slidably attached to a vertical guide hole 207 provided in the mounting base 205a, allowing the left display frame movable body 203a to slide in the vertical direction and rotate about the slide shaft 206.

The right display frame movable body 203b is disposed in front of the image display means 60 in correspondence with the right side thereof, and is formed in a generally L-shape in front view with a vertically long vertical frame portion and an upper right frame portion protruding at a right angle from the upper end of the vertical frame portion to the left. The right display frame movable body 203b is pivoted to the mounting base 205b by a pivot 208 in the front-to-rear direction provided on the lower end side of the right display frame movable body 203b, and a rearward-protruding slide portion 209 provided on the upper end side is slidably inserted into an arc-shaped guide hole 210 provided in the mounting base 205b, allowing it to swing around the pivot 208 within a predetermined angle range.

The lower display frame movable body 203c is disposed horizontally in front of the image display means 60 in correspondence with its lower portion, and is pivotally supported at its right end to the mounting base 205c via a pivot 211 in the front-rear direction. A slide portion 212 is provided at the left end of the lower display frame movable body 203c so as to protrude rearward, and this slide portion 212 is slidably inserted into an arc-shaped guide hole 213 formed in the mounting base 205c, allowing the lower display frame movable body 203c to swing around the pivot 211 between a generally horizontal normal position and a position tilted downward to the left.

The left interlocking part 203d interlocks the left display frame movable body 203a and the lower display frame movable body 203c, and is formed as a roughly triangular plate when viewed from the front, with the upper corner connected to the lower end of the left display frame movable body 203a via a front-to-rear pivot 214, the lower corner slidably connected to a roughly left-right guide hole 216 provided on the left end of the lower display frame movable body 203c via a front-to-rear slide shaft 215, and the remaining left corner pivoted to the mounting base 205a via a front-to-rear pivot 217.

As a result, when the lower display frame movable body 203c transitions from the normal position to the inclined position, the left interlocking part 203d rotates clockwise around the pivot 217 and the pivot 214 moves downward to the right, so that the left display frame movable body 203a swings counterclockwise while moving downward, transitioning from the normal position in which the vertical frame part is approximately vertical to an inclined position in which the vertical frame part is inclined downward to the right (Figure 43 (a) → (b)).

The right interlocking part 203e, which interlocks the right display frame movable body 203b and the lower display frame movable body 203c, is formed in an elongated shape, with one end connected to the lower end side of the right display frame movable body 203b via a pivot 218 in the front-to-rear direction, and a corner on the lower side connected to the right end side of the lower display frame movable body 203c via a pivot 219 in the front-to-rear direction. The pivot 218 is located on the right display frame movable body 203b at a position spaced to the right of the pivot 208, and the pivot 219 is located on the lower display frame movable body 203c at a position spaced to the right of the pivot 211.

As a result, when the lower display frame movable body 203c transitions from the normal position to the inclined position, the pivot 218 is pushed up via the right interlocking portion 203e, causing the right display frame movable body 203b to swing counterclockwise around the pivot 208, transitioning from the normal position in which the vertical frame portion is approximately vertical to an inclined position in which the vertical frame portion is inclined downward to the right (Figure 43 (a) → (b)).

As a result, when the lower display frame movable body 203c swings between the normal position and the inclined position, the left display frame movable body 203a and the right display frame movable body 203b also change between the normal position and the inclined position in conjunction with it. That is, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are capable of changing between the normal position (FIGS. 43(a) and (c)) in which they surround a portion of the display screen 60a of the image display means 60 in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the inclined position (FIGS. 43(b) and (d)) inclined at a predetermined angle to the left from the normal position. The display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c are biased toward the inclined position by their own weight.

As shown in FIG. 41, the tilt drive means 204 is provided on the same mounting base 205c as the lower display frame movable body 203c, and includes a drive source 221 such as a stepping motor, and a drive transmission member 222 that transmits the drive force of the drive source 221 to the lower display frame movable body 203c. The drive transmission member 222 is composed of a spur gear mounted on the mounting base 205c in a state in which it can rotate around a shaft 222a in the front-rear direction, and is engaged with a drive gear 221a mounted on the drive shaft of the drive source 221. The drive transmission member 222 is provided with a first engagement portion 223 in the form of a protrusion on the side surface corresponding to a part of the circumference, and the lower display frame movable body 203c is provided with a second engagement portion 224 corresponding to the first engagement portion 223.

When the drive transmission member 222 rotates in a predetermined direction (e.g., clockwise) by the drive source 221, the first engagement portion 223 abuts from below against the second engagement portion 224 on the lower display frame movable body 203c side at the first angular position, and then pushes the second engagement portion 224 upward as the rotation progresses, so that when the drive transmission member 222 reaches the second angular position, the lower display frame movable body 203c is in the normal position. Therefore, from that state, when the drive transmission member 222 rotates in the opposite direction (e.g., counterclockwise) by the drive source 221, the support position of the second engagement portion 224 by the first engagement portion 223 gradually descends, and when the drive transmission member 222 reaches the first angular position, the lower display frame movable body 203c is in the inclined position. In this way, by operating the drive source 221 in both directions within a predetermined step range, it is possible to deform the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c between the normal position (Figures 43(a) and (c)) and the inclined position (Figures 43(b) and (d)).

As shown in FIG. 42 etc., the lifting and lowering movable performance means 202 includes a sub-screen movable body 231 and a lifting and lowering drive means 232 that drives the sub-screen movable body 231 in the up and down direction, and is arranged in front of the tilting and lowering movable performance means 201. The sub-screen movable body 231 is arranged in a horizontally long shape in front of the image display means 60, and on the front side of the sub-screen movable body 231, a sub-image display means 233 consisting of a liquid crystal display means smaller than the image display means 60 is arranged together with any decoration, and both left and right ends are supported by a pair of lifting and lowering drive means 232, 232 arranged on the left and right sides of the image display means 60, via drive connectors 234, 234, in a state in which they can be moved in the up and down direction, respectively.

The lifting drive means 232 is supported on the rear mounting base 61 via a vertically long mounting base 235, and includes an elongated cylindrical lifting guide 236 that is arranged along the side edge of the image display means 60 from the upper end to the lower end and guides the drive connector 234 in the up and down direction, a drive pulley 237a that is arranged in the vicinity of one end side and the lower end side of the lifting guide 236, a driven pulley 237b that is arranged in the vicinity of the other end side and the upper end side of the lifting guide 236, a drive source 238 consisting of a stepping motor or the like that rotates the drive pulley 237a, and an endless gear belt 239 that is wound around the drive pulley 237a and the driven pulley 237b and to which the drive connector 234 is fixed at a predetermined location on the circumference. The end of the sub-screen movable body 231 is rotatably connected to the drive connector 234 by a pivot 240 in the front-rear direction.

In addition, one of the left and right pivots 240, 240 is slidably connected to a left-right long hole 241 provided on the sub-screen movable body 231 side or the drive connector 234 side, so that even if the left and right lifting drive means 232, 232 perform asymmetric drive operations, the sub-screen movable body 231 can be tilted to follow the asymmetric drive operations within a specified range.

The sub-screen movable body 231 in this embodiment can be changed among four types of stop postures: an upper normal posture (Figure 43(a)) when both the left and right lifting and lowering drive means 232, 232 are stopped at an upper position; an upper inclined posture (Figure 43(b)) when the left lifting and lowering drive means 232 is lowered a predetermined number of steps from the upper normal posture; a lower normal posture (Figure 43(c)) when both the left and right lifting and lowering drive means 232, 232 are stopped at a lower position; and a lower inclined posture (Figure 43(d)) when the right lifting and lowering drive means 232 is raised a predetermined number of steps from the lower normal posture.

The sub-screen movable body 231 is approximately horizontal in the normal positions at the top and bottom (Figures 43(a) and (c)), and is tilted downward to the left corresponding to the tilted positions of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c in the inclined positions at the top and bottom (Figures 43(b) and (d)). The sub-image display means 233 operates integrally with the sub-screen movable body 231, so that the sub-screen movable body 231 is approximately horizontal when in the normal position and is tilted downward to the left when in the inclined position.

Figure 44 is a block diagram of the control system of this pachinko machine. The control system of this embodiment differs from the control system of the first embodiment (Figure 11) in that the control objects of the image display control means 150a are the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233, and the control objects of the movable body control means 150d are the tilt movable performance means 201 and the lift movable performance means 202.

In addition, in this embodiment, at least one (here, both) of the display frame movable bodies 203a-203c of the tilt movable performance means 201 and the sub-screen movable body 231 of the lift movable performance means 202 can be moved from a normal position to a tilted position, and at least a part of the image on the image display means 60 can be tilted and displayed accordingly, which is different from the control system of the first embodiment (Figure 11) in that the pattern change performance control means 152, image display control means 150a, etc. are provided with the configuration for executing the tilt performance.

The tilt transformation here involves performing a rotation process (predetermined transformation process) on a specified image to rotate it around a specified center by a specified angle of less than 90 degrees, and the rotation angle is approximately the same as the tilt angle of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 in their tilted positions.

The configuration for executing the tilt effect is explained below. First, the images displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233 are drawn in a number of layers with a predetermined priority order for each display means 60, 233.

In the example of Figure 49 (a), the background image, performance pattern (pattern image), character image, reserved pedestal image, reserved display image, changing reserved image, volume setting image, error notification image and sub-performance pattern displayed on the image display means 60 are drawn in multiple layers in the order of decreasing display priority. Similarly, as shown in Figure 49 (b), the background image and bubble effect image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 are also drawn in multiple layers in the order of decreasing display priority.

In addition, each image displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233 is provided with transformation information regarding whether or not a specific transformation (here, tilt transformation) is performed, and 1 is set for images that are transformed, and 0 is set for images that are not transformed.

In the example of Figure 49(a), the transformation information for the right-hit guidance image, volume setting image, error notification image, and sub-performance pattern is set to 0 (no transformation), while the transformation information for the other images such as the background image and performance pattern is set to 1 (transformed), and in the example of Figure 49(b), the transformation information for all images displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is set to 0 (no transformation).

In this embodiment, when the sub-screen movable body 231 is in a tilted position, the sub-image display means 233 on the sub-screen movable body 231 is also tilted downward to the left, so that the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is tilted with respect to the image display means 60, etc., even if it is not tilted with respect to the sub-image display means 233. That is, in this embodiment, the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is tilted with respect to the image display means 60, etc., by tilting the sub-image display means 233 via the sub-screen movable body 231, rather than by image processing such as tilt transformation.

Next, the drawing process to the image display means 60 by the image display control means 150a will be described. In this embodiment, among the multiple types of images displayed on the image display means 60, there is a mixture of images that undergo tilt transformation and those that do not. Therefore, instead of drawing all images uniformly in the frame buffer for the image display means 60, as shown in FIG. 45, images that undergo tilt transformation (images with transformation information of 1) are drawn to the frame buffer via a primary buffer separate from the frame buffer, and transformation processing is performed when drawing from the primary buffer to the frame buffer, while images that do not undergo tilt transformation (images with transformation information of 0) are drawn directly to the frame buffer without passing through the primary buffer.

The tilt transformation process (rotation process) performed when drawing from the primary buffer to the frame buffer is performed according to the procedure shown in Figures 46 and 47. That is, first, the image data is read from the primary buffer (S101). Then, the coordinate axes (x, y), radius (r), and rotation angle (a) are specified (S102 to S104), and the coordinates of the four vertices 0 to 3 are calculated (S105).

Then, the UV coordinates (top left, top right, bottom left, bottom right) of the loaded image data are specified (S106), and the UV coordinates of the image data are fixed to the coordinates of vertices 0 to 3 and drawn in the frame buffer (S107). This allows the image in the primary buffer to be rotated a specified angle around a specified center and drawn in the frame buffer (Figure 47).

Next, specific examples of tilt effects will be explained with reference to examples of the display of various images displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233, and the settings of the display priority and transformation information of these various images.

Figure 48 shows the movement of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 when a tilt preview performance is being performed, and the associated change in the displayed image. Here, the tilt preview performance (tilt performance) is an example of a "normal preview performance", in which the movable bodies and the image are tilted, for example, based on the reliability of a jackpot while the first and second special symbols are fluctuating. In the tilt preview performance of Figure 48, the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c change from a normal position to a tilted position, and the sub-screen movable body 231 changes from an upper normal position to an upper tilted position.

In the example of FIG. 48, the image display means 60 displays the background image 160, the performance pattern (pattern image) 114a, the character image 251, the reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1-, Y1-, the changing reserved image Z, the right hit guidance image 162b, the volume setting image 117a, the error notification image 163, and the sub-performance pattern 252 in descending order of priority, and the sub-image display means 233 displays the background image 160a and the bubble effect image 253 in descending order of priority, and a tilt preview performance is executed as shown in FIG. 48(a)→(b). The sub-performance pattern 252 is a so-called fourth pattern that is displayed separately from the performance pattern 114, and is always displayed on the image display means 60 while the first and second special patterns are changing in response to the changes in the first and second special patterns.

As shown in FIG. 49, the deformation information for each of these images is set to 0 (no deformation) for the right-hit guidance image 162b, the volume setting image 117a, the error notification image 163, and the sub-performance pattern 252 displayed on the image display means 60, as well as all images displayed on the sub-image display means 233, and is set to 1 (deformed) for all other images.

As shown in Figures 48(a)-(b), when the tilt preview performance is being performed, the background image 160, performance pattern (pattern image) 114a, character image 251, reserved pedestal image 161, reserved display images X1-, Y1-, and changing reserved image Z on the image display means 60 tilt to the left along with the display frame movable bodies 203a-203c due to tilt deformation, but the right-hit guidance image 162b, volume setting image 117a, error notification image 163, and secondary performance pattern 252, which have a higher priority than these images, do not tilt and remain upright.

Incidentally, since each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is not tilted (Figure 49 (b)), it remains upright without being tilted with respect to the sub-image display means 233 even when the tilt preview performance is executed. However, since the sub-image display means 233 itself is tilted by the tilt preview performance as shown in Figure 48 (b), it becomes tilted with respect to the image display means 60, etc., in the same way as the background image 160 on the image display means 60 side and the performance pattern (pattern image) 114a.

As described above, the right-hit guidance image 162b, the volume setting image 117a, the error notification image 163, and the secondary performance pattern 252 displayed on the image display means 60 are not tilted even if a tilt preview effect occurs during their display and a tilt transformation is performed on the background image 160, etc. This allows the player to easily and reliably recognize various important notification contents while a tilt preview effect is being performed on the image display means 60.

Figure 50 shows the change in the displayed image when a door opening error occurs during the tilt preview performance, or when the player performs a volume adjustment operation. Note that the priority and change information for each image related to the tilt preview performance are the same as in Figure 49.

As shown in FIG. 50(a), when the tilt preview performance is executed during the change of the second special symbol, the display frame movable body 203a-203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 are tilted and tilted to the left. Among the images displayed on the image display means 60, the background image 160, performance pattern (pattern image) 114a, character image 251, reserved pedestal image 161, reserved display image X1-, Y1-, and changing reserved image Z have transformation information of 1 (transformed), so they are tilted and tilted to the left along with the display frame movable body 203a-203c, etc., but the transformation information of the sub-performance pattern 252 is 0 (not transformed), so they are not tilted and remain upright. Note that the transformation information of each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is 0, so they are not tilted, but due to the tilt of the sub-image display means 233 itself, they are tilted to the left relative to the image display means 60, etc.

If a door opening error occurs in this state, an error notification image 163 is displayed on the image display means 60 as shown in Figure 50(b), but because the transformation information for this error notification image 163 is 0 (no transformation) (Figure 49(a)), it is displayed in an upright position without being tilted. Similarly, if the player performs a volume adjustment operation while the tilt preview performance is being performed, a volume setting image 117a is displayed on the image display means 60 as shown in Figure 50(c), but because the transformation information for this volume setting image 117a is 0 (no transformation) (Figure 49(a)), it is displayed in an upright position without being tilted.

Although not shown in the figure, even when a right-hit guiding image 162b is displayed on the image display means 60 while the tilt preview performance is being performed, the transformation information for that right-hit guiding image 162b is 0 (no transformation) (Figure 49 (a)), so it is displayed in an upright state without undergoing any tilt transformation.

Figure 51 shows the movement of the display frame movable body 203a-203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 and the associated change in the display image when the tilt descent notice performance is executed. Here, the tilt descent notice performance is an example of a "normal notice performance" like the tilt notice performance shown in Figure 48 etc., and while the first and second special symbols are fluctuating, the movable body and image are tilted based on the jackpot reliability, but unlike the tilt notice performance, the sub-screen movable body 231 is not simply tilted, but is changed from an upper normal position to a lower tilted position accompanied by descent (Figure 43 (a) → (d)).

In the example of Figure 51, the image display means 60 displays, in descending order of priority, a background image 160, a performance pattern (pattern image) 114a, character images 250, 251, reserved pedestal image 161, reserved display images X1-, Y1-, a changing reserved image Z, and a sub-performance pattern 252, and the sub-image display means 233 displays, in descending order of priority, a background image and a bubble effect image 253, and a tilt descent preview performance is executed as shown in Figure 51 (a) → (b).

Then, when the sub-screen movable body 231 descends from the upper side of the image display means 60 while tilting to approximately the center due to the tilt descent preview performance, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the character image 250 on the image display means 60 changes to a position and state related to the movement action of the sub-screen movable body 231 and its posture after the movement, for example, a state in which the sub-screen movable body 231 is being pushed diagonally downward from above, and a movable body effect image 254 corresponding to the sub-screen movable body 231 after the movement is displayed.

In this way, the character image 250 and movable body effect image 254 displayed in relation to the movement of the sub-screen movable body 231 have transformation information of 1 (transformed) as shown in FIG. 52(a), and therefore are displayed tilted to match the tilt of the sub-screen movable body 231 due to tilt transformation.

When the sub-screen movable body 231 tilts and descends due to the tilt descent notice performance (Fig. 51 (b)), the performance pattern 114 changes to a smaller evacuation pattern 255 and moves to the corner of the image display means 60, avoiding the sub-screen movable body 231. However, since the transformation information of this evacuation pattern 255 is 0 (no transformation) as shown in Fig. 52 (a), no tilt transformation is performed and it is displayed in an upright state. As for the other background image 160, reserved pedestal image 161, reserved display image X1-, Y1-, changing reserved image Z, and sub-performance pattern 252 displayed on the image display means 60, since the transformation information is 0 (no transformation) as shown in Fig. 52 (a), no tilt transformation is performed and they remain in an upright state. Note that since the transformation information of each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is 0, no tilt transformation is performed, but due to the tilt of the sub-image display means 233 itself, they are tilted to the left with respect to the image display means 60, etc.

In this way, images displayed in relation to a movable object may be tilted to match the movement of that movable object, while other images may not be tilted.

Figure 53 shows the operation of the display frame movable body 203a-203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 and the associated change in the displayed image when the tilt preview performance is executed at the start of the pattern change (immediately after the start).

As shown in FIG. 53(a), when the pattern change starts, the image display means 60 displays the background image 160, the performance pattern 114a, the reserved base image 161, the reserved display images X1-, Y1-, the changing reserved image Z, the volume setting image 117a, and the sub-performance pattern 252 in descending order of priority, and the sub-image display means 233 displays the background image 160a and the bubble effect image 253 in ascending order of priority, and the tilt preview performance is executed immediately after the pattern change starts.

This tilt preview effect causes the display frame movable bodies 203a-203c to move from a normal position to a tilted position as shown in FIG. 53(b), and the sub-screen movable body 231 to move from an upper normal position to an upper tilted position, each according to the time chart shown in FIG. 55. Also, among the images displayed on the image display means 60, the background image 160, the performance pattern 114, the reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1-, Y1-, and the changing reserved image Z, which have the deformation information shown in FIG. 54(a) of 1 (deformed), undergo a tilt deformation in synchronization with the display frame movable bodies 203a-203c, etc., as shown in FIG. 55, and are displayed gradually tilted to the left.

Also, at approximately the same time that the tilting operation of the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c, etc. is completed, an effect image 256 (transformation information: 1) showing a crack is displayed on the image display means 60 in a tilted state in accordance with the performance pattern 114, etc.

On the other hand, for the other images displayed on the image display means 60, namely the volume setting image 117a and the sub-performance pattern 252, the transformation information is 0 (no transformation) as shown in FIG. 54(a), so no tilt transformation is performed and they remain in an upright state. Note that, since the transformation information of each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is 0, no tilt transformation is performed, but due to the tilt of the sub-image display means 233 itself, they are tilted to the left relative to the image display means 60, etc.

The tilt preview performance ends at a specified timing thereafter, and the display frame movable bodies 203a-203c return from the tilted position to the normal position, and the sub-screen movable body 231 returns from the upper tilted position to the upper normal position, as shown in Figure 53 (b) → (a). This return action at the end of the tilt preview performance is performed at a slower speed than the tilt action at the start of the tilt preview performance, as shown in Figure 55.

In addition, among the images displayed in a tilted state on the image display means 60, the background image 160, the performance pattern 114, the reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1-, Y1-, and the changing reserved image Z undergo a tilt deformation in the opposite direction, and gradually return to an upright state in synchronization with the return action of the display frame movable bodies 203a-203c, etc., as shown in FIG. 55. On the other hand, the effect image 256 showing a crack, which was displayed when the tilt action of the display frame movable bodies 203a-203c, etc., was completed, is erased from the image display means 60 at approximately the same time as the return action of the display frame movable bodies 203a-203c, etc., begins.

Figure 56 shows the operation of the display frame movable body 203a-203c and the sub-screen movable body 231 and the accompanying change in the display image when the tilt descent notice performance is executed at the start of the pattern change (almost simultaneously with the start). As shown in Figure 56 (a), at the start of the pattern change, the image display means 60 displays the background image 160, the reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1-, Y1-, the changing reserved image Z, the evacuation pattern 255, the volume setting image 117a, and the sub-performance pattern 252 in descending order of priority, and the sub-image display means 233 displays the background image 160a and the bubble effect image 253 in descending order of priority, and the tilt descent notice performance is executed almost simultaneously with the start of the pattern change.

This tilt descent notice performance causes the display frame movable bodies 203a-203c to move from the normal position to a tilted position as shown in FIG. 56(b), and the sub-screen movable body 231 to move from the upper normal position to the lower tilted position, according to the time chart shown in FIG. 58. In addition, the background image 160, reserved pedestal image 161, reserved display images X1-, Y1-, changing reserved image Z, evacuation pattern 255, volume setting image 117a, and sub-performance pattern 252 displayed on the image display means 60 all have transformation information of 0 (no transformation) as shown in FIG. 57(a), so they are not tilted and remain upright. Note that each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 has transformation information of 0, so they are not tilted, but due to the tilt of the sub-image display means 233 itself, they are tilted to the left relative to the image display means 60, etc.

In addition, when the sub-screen movable body 231 descends while tilting from the upper side to approximately the center of the image display means 60 due to the tilt descent preview performance, the character image 250 and movable body effect image 254 are displayed on the image display means 60 at approximately the same time as the movement is completed, as shown in Figure 56 (b).

The character image 250 and the movable body effect image 254 are tilted and transformed because the transformation information is set to 1 (transformed) as shown in FIG. 57(a), and the movable body effect image 254 is displayed along the periphery of the sub-screen movable body 231 and the character image 250 in a position and manner related to the posture of the sub-screen movable body 231 after it has moved, for example, when the character image 250 is pressing the sub-screen movable body 231 diagonally downward from above.

The tilt descent preview performance ends at a specified timing thereafter, and as shown in Figure 56 (b) → (a), the display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c return from the tilted position to the normal position, and the sub-screen movable body 231 returns from the lower tilted position to the upper normal position. This return action at the end of the tilt descent preview performance is performed at a slower speed than the tilt action at the start of the tilt descent preview performance, as shown in Figure 58.

At that time, the character image 250 and the movable body effect image 254 that were displayed in a tilted and deformed state on the image display means 60 are erased at approximately the same time as the start of the return action of the sub-screen movable body 231, etc. Then, the background image 160, which was maintained in an upright state without being tilted and deformed even during the tilt descent notice performance, the reserved pedestal image 161, the reserved display images X1-, Y1-, the changing reserved image Z, the evacuation pattern 255, etc. are left on the image display means 60, and the remaining pattern changes continue.

Figure 59(a) shows the display image when a tilt effect is executed during a normal customer waiting effect while in a customer waiting state, and Figure 60(a) shows the display image when a menu image 118b is displayed by a player operating the effect button 34 while the tilt effect shown in Figure 59(a) is being executed. Also, Figures 59(b) and (c) correspond to Figure 59(a) and show the display priority and transformation information of each image displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233, respectively.

Similarly, Figures 60(b) and (c) correspond to Figure 60(a) and show the display priority and transformation information of each image displayed on the image display means 60 and the sub-image display means 233, respectively. Note that the tilt effect may be executed after a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting state (reception of the customer waiting demo command).

In the example of FIG. 59(a), the image display means 60 displays, in descending order of display priority, a background image 160, a performance pattern 114, a reserved pedestal image 161, a menu display available notification image 118a, a volume adjustment available notification image 116a, a light intensity adjustment available notification image 116b, a power saving mode notification image 120, and an error notification image 163, and the sub-image display means 233 displays, in descending order of display priority, a background image 160a and a bubble effect image 253, and a tilt performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), of the images displayed on the image display means 60 in FIG. 59(a), the transformation information for the background image 160, the performance pattern 114, the reserved pedestal image 161, the menu display available notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, the light intensity adjustable notification image 116b, and the power saving mode notification image 120 is set to 1, so a tilt transformation is performed and they are tilted to the left, but the transformation information for the error notification image 163 is set to 0, so they remain upright even after the tilt performance is executed. The transformation information for each image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is 0, so no tilt transformation is performed, but due to the tilt of the sub-image display means 233 itself, they are tilted to the left relative to the image display means 60, etc.

The menu display available notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light intensity adjustable notification image 116b may be configured to start displaying a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the customer waiting state is initiated by receiving a customer waiting demo command. Also, the menu display available notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light intensity adjustable notification image 116b may be displayed when a tilt effect is executed during the customer waiting state.

In addition, if the player performs a volume adjustment operation or a light adjustment operation in the state shown in FIG. 59(a), the volume adjustable notification image 116a and the light adjustable notification image 116b are erased and the volume setting image 117a and the light setting image 117b are displayed. However, as shown in FIG. 59(b), since the transformation information for the volume setting image 117a and the light setting image 117b is set to 0, the volume setting image 117a and the light setting image 117b are not tilted and are displayed in an upright state (not shown). Note that the transformation information for the menu display possible notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, and the light adjustable notification image 116b may also be set to 0 so that they remain upright even after the tilt effect is executed.

In addition, when the player operates the effect button 34 in the state shown in FIG. 59(a) (when the tilt effect is being executed), a new menu image 118b and a menu operation notification image 118c are displayed on the image display means 60 as shown in FIG. 60(a). However, since the transformation information for the menu image 118b and the menu operation notification image 118c is set to 0 as shown in FIG. 60(b), no tilt transformation is performed and they are displayed in an upright state.

As described above, the pachinko machine of this embodiment includes an image display means 60 capable of displaying an image, a volume setting image 117a indicating the volume setting status can be displayed on the image display means 60, and a performance control means 122 for controlling a specific performance that performs a predetermined transformation process on the image displayed on the image display means 60. When a specific performance is executed while the volume setting image 117a is displayed, the specific image that does not include the volume setting image 117a is subjected to the predetermined transformation process (here, a tilt transformation process), but the specific transformation process is not performed on the volume setting image 117a. When the specific image is subjected to the predetermined transformation process, the movable bodies 203a to 203c, 231 are operated in response to the predetermined transformation process. The image display means 60 can variably display the performance pattern 114, and the specific image includes the performance pattern.

The game machine also includes a start detection processing means 138 that acquires a random number value each time the start means 56, 57 detects a game ball and stores the random number value in the random number storage means 139 up to a predetermined upper limit, a pattern display means 53, 54 that changes and displays the pattern based on the random number value stored in the random number storage means 139 when a pattern change start condition is met, and a profit state generating means 142 that generates a profit state when the stopped pattern after the change by the pattern display means 53, 54 becomes a specific pattern, and by displaying reserved display images X1~, Y1~ on the image display means 60, it is possible to notify the reserved number, which is the number of random numbers stored in the random number storage means 139 and not yet used for pattern change by the pattern display means 53, 54, and the specific image includes the reserved display images X1~, Y1~. The specific image also includes an effect image.

The system is also configured to determine whether or not to perform a specified transformation process based on transformation information previously assigned to each image, with transformation information indicating that the specified transformation process is to be performed being assigned to specific images, and transformation information indicating that the specified transformation process is not to be performed being assigned to the volume setting image 117a.

In addition, when a new image is displayed during the execution of a specific performance, if the image is a specific image that does not include the volume setting image 117a, a predetermined transformation process is performed on this specific image, but if the image is at least the volume setting image 117a, the predetermined transformation process is not performed on the volume setting image 117a.

In addition, when a specific effect is executed while the error notification image 163 is being displayed, a specific image that does not include the error notification image 163 is subjected to a predetermined transformation process, but the system is configured not to perform the predetermined transformation process on at least the error notification image 163.In addition, when a new image is displayed while a specific effect is being executed, if the image is a specific image that does not include the error notification image 163, the system is configured not to perform the predetermined transformation process on the image that is the error notification image 163.

The image display means 60 can display launch guidance images 162a, 162b, which indicate that the ball should be launched toward either the left or right side of the play area 23. When a specific performance is executed while the launch guidance images 162a, 162b are displayed, a specific image that does not include the launch guidance images 162a, 162b is subjected to a predetermined transformation process, but the launch guidance images 162a, 162b are not subjected to the predetermined transformation process.

In addition, the performance pattern 114 can be switched between a normal pattern and a retreat pattern 255 that is smaller than the normal pattern, and when a specific performance is executed while the retreat pattern 255 is displayed, a specific image that does not include the retreat pattern 255 is subjected to a predetermined transformation process, but the retreat pattern 255 is not subjected to the predetermined transformation process.

The first and second embodiments of the present invention have been described above in detail, but they can also be configured as follows. That is, in the first embodiment, the mode may be changed by a player operation other than a selection operation from the menu screen. Also, the mode may be changed by a player operation even during a pattern change other than during a customer waiting state. In this case, it is desirable to enable the mode change on the condition that the operation of the movable body is not reserved in the advance notice related to the pattern change.

In the previews shown in Figures 37 and 38, the first production element image 168, second production element image 169, etc. are not limited to characters, and any production element image can be used. Also, the first production element image 168 does not have to be provided. By using a lightning effect image as the production element image, and changing the lightning effect image so that at least a portion of it is displayed in the first to fifth fixed concealed areas and movable concealed area C, and the proportion displayed in the non-concealed area D becomes larger, it is possible to create an effect in which lightning runs across the screen.

As in the previews shown in Figures 37 and 38, when a performance element image such as a mini character image is changed from a first state in which at least a part of it is displayed in any of the first to fifth fixed hidden areas or the movable hidden area C to a second state in which the proportion displayed in the non-hidden area D is greater than in the first state, the display mode (color, size, shape, etc.) of at least a part of the performance element image (e.g. an item held by the mini character) may be configured to suggest the reliability of a jackpot, etc. In this case, if the proportion of the part suggesting the reliability displayed in the non-hidden area D is also made greater in the second state than in the first state, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the reliability of a jackpot as the preview progresses, and the interest of the preview performance can be increased.

When the display mode of the reserved display images X1~, Y1~ is changed based on the results of the pre-reading pending change performance, the reserved display image before the change may be displayed in its entirety in the non-concealed area D, and the reserved display image after the change may be displayed straddling the non-concealed area D and the area outside it, such as by displaying the enlarged portion or the added effect portion so that it extends beyond the non-concealed area D.

Note that if the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C are made wider, the non-concealed area D will become narrower, but it is preferable to make the non-concealed area D wider than the first to fifth fixed concealed areas B1 to B5 and the movable concealed area C. In addition, any still image or video can be used for the background image 160.

In the first embodiment, the area behind the stopped movable bodies 75a to 78a is set as the movable concealed area C, but of course the movable bodies may move during a preview performance or mode change. Therefore, the area of the entire screen area A corresponding to the rear of all the movable areas of the movable bodies (all areas where the movable bodies may move) may be set as the movable concealed area C. In this case, the non-concealed area D is narrower than the movable concealed area C for the stopped movable bodies, but the image displayed in the non-concealed area D is always visible from the front regardless of the state of the movable bodies, and higher visibility can be ensured for images of high importance. In addition, even when the movable concealed area C for the stopped movable bodies is adopted, it is desirable to display the error notification image 163 regarding an abnormality (movable body error) of the movable body by avoiding the rear of all the movable areas of the movable bodies.

When adopting a movable concealment area C for a stopped movable body as in the first embodiment, if a movable body performance is executed while an image of high importance (volume setting image 117a, light intensity setting image 117b, error notification image 163, etc.) is being displayed, the movable body may move in front of those images, temporarily impeding visibility. Therefore, if the movable body temporarily stops at a performance position other than the origin position during a movable body performance, it is desirable to display images of high importance while avoiding the area behind the movable body at the performance position. This makes it possible to prevent a prolonged state of invisibility, even if visibility may be temporarily impeded by the passage of the movable body.

However, when a moving body effect in which multiple moving bodies operate simultaneously (such as a moving body effect during a pattern change due to a jackpot change pattern, or a moving body effect executed when an SP reach progresses to an SPSP reach), it is unavoidable that the visibility of images of high importance will be hindered for long periods of time.

If high visibility were required even in such cases, it would likely result in the freedom of the moving object being taken away, resulting in a decrease in the presentation effect. Furthermore, since such moving object presentations are often performed in situations that are advantageous to the player, it is believed that a certain degree of decrease in visibility is acceptable even for images of high importance.

In the embodiment, a launch guidance notification indicating that the ball should be launched toward either the left or right side of the game area has been exemplified as an example of a launch notification related to a launch operation, but a launch warning notification indicating that the game ball has been launched in the opposite direction to the direction to be aimed may also be executable. It is desirable to display launch notification images (launch guidance image, launch warning image) related to such launch notifications as launch guidance notification and launch warning notification so as not to overlap with the volume and light intensity setting images 117a, 117b. In this case, the launch notification images such as the launch guidance image may be displayed large so that a part of them extends into the concealed areas B1-B3, B5, C, but it is desirable to display important message parts such as "To the right!" in the non-concealed area D.

The step-up preview performance may gradually change (expand) the display area from the first stage to the final stage, or may not change the display area over multiple consecutive stages. It may also be configured so that the display area does not change up to a certain stage (e.g., the fourth stage), and then changes (expands) the display area at the next stage (e.g., the fifth stage).

The step-up preview performance may be executed in a way that is divided into a teasing portion where the step-up preview performance is not yet determined, and an execution portion where the stage of the step-up preview performance is determined. In the teasing portion, the step-up preview performance is raised step by step, and in the execution portion, the step-up preview performance is executed at a predetermined stage that is determined in advance. In this case, the raised step-up preview performance in the teasing portion is not necessarily executed in the subsequent execution portion, and even if it is raised from the first stage to the fourth stage, the display of the step-up preview performance may then cease, resulting in the step-up preview performance not being executed.

This is what is known as a false performance (false step-up preview performance). By doing this, it is possible to increase the occurrence rate of step-up preview performances and give the player a sense of expectation that a rarely seen higher-level step-up preview performance may be executed. In the case of such a step-up preview performance, the display area may not be changed when the player rises to the top in the teasing stage, and when the step-up preview performance is executed in the execution portion, the display area may be changed according to the stage of the step-up preview performance.

In addition, even in such a case, in addition to gradually changing (expanding) the display area from the first stage to the final stage, there may be cases where the display area is not changed over multiple consecutive stages, such as not changing the display area until a certain stage (e.g., the fourth stage) and then changing (expanding) the display area at the next stage (e.g., the fifth stage).

In the second embodiment, it is desirable to display the entire image that is not to be deformed in the non-hidden area, but it is also acceptable to display a portion of the image so that it extends outside the non-hidden area. Note that, although the second embodiment does not mention the non-hidden area, the area displayed in gray in FIG. 43 indicates the non-hidden area that is not blocked by any of the window frame portion 74, base plate 45, central display frame unit 47, big prize unit 49, display frame movable bodies 203a to 203c, and sub-screen movable body 231 when viewed from the front.

The modified performance such as the tilt notice performance may be executed as a "pre-read notice performance" based on the result of the pre-read judgment by the pre-read judgment means 138a, or may be executed as a "normal notice performance" based on the result of the jackpot judgment at the start of the pattern change by the special pattern processing means 140. It may also be executed in the promotion performance (round promotion or probability change promotion) in the case of a jackpot, or during the reach change.

In the second embodiment, the launch guidance image is configured not to be transformed (not tilted) even when a specific effect involving a transformation process is executed, but it may be configured not to execute (not select) a specific effect while the launch guidance image is displayed. In other words, the launch guidance notification is performed when the game state transitions from the normal game state to the special game state (time-saving state, probability change state), when the game state transitions from the special game state to the normal game state, etc., and when the launch direction advantageous to the player changes, until a predetermined condition is met (for example, until a predetermined time (3 seconds, etc.) has passed, until a predetermined number of pattern changes have ended, until the second special pattern has changed a predetermined number of times, etc.), but during that time, it may be configured not to execute (not select) a specific effect involving a transformation process, such as a tilt notice effect. The same treatment as for the launch guidance image can be applied to the launch warning image in the launch warning notification.

The execution of a transformation effect such as a tilt preview effect may be announced by a countdown or the like. In this case, the countdown announcement effect may be performed as part of the tilt preview effect, or the countdown announcement effect may be performed before the tilt preview effect, separately from the tilt preview effect, etc.

For the menu display possible notification image 118a, the volume adjustable notification image 116a, the light intensity adjustable notification image 116b, etc., tilt transformation may not be performed in either case when a transformation effect is performed while they are displayed, or when they are displayed after the transformation effect is performed.

When in the waiting state for customers, it is preferable not to perform a transformation effect if the player is performing operations such as adjusting the volume or the light intensity, but even if a transformation effect is performed, it is preferable not to perform a tilt transformation on the volume setting image 117a and the light intensity setting image 117b.

It may also be possible to display the menu when not waiting for customers, for example while the pattern is changing. In this case, a sub-window may be displayed in part of the display screen 60a to display the menu image 118b, etc. When the menu image 118b, etc. is displayed while the pattern is changing, it is preferable not to tilt the menu image 118b together with the sub-window, even if a transformation effect such as a tilt preview effect is executed.

It may also be possible to execute effects using an RTC (real-time clock). This RTC is a chip dedicated to timing, and even when the power is off, it counts the date and time by using power supplied from an internal battery. The RTC effect may be executed when a predetermined time based on the RTC has elapsed (for example, when a predetermined date and time has elapsed since the power was turned on). This RTC effect is executed as an effect commonly set on the same gaming machine, so if multiple identical gaming machines are installed side by side in an amusement hall, a common RTC effect will be executed simultaneously for all of them, such as after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on.

In addition, since such RTC effects are executed regardless of the progress of the game, there may be cases where the timing for their execution comes during the execution of other effects such as reach effects. In such cases, the reach effects etc. may be given priority, and the RTC effect may be executed in a sub-window displayed in a part of the display screen 60a. Furthermore, at this time, when a transformation effect such as a tilt preview effect is executed, it is desirable not to perform tilt transformation on the RTC effect being executed in the sub-window. Also, when a transformation effect is executed on the RTC effect side of the sub-window, it is desirable to perform tilt transformation on the RTC effect, but not on the reach effect side.

Whether or not a given image is tilted may vary depending on the preview content, etc. The reserved pedestal image 161 may be tilted in the first preview performance, but not tilted in the second preview performance. The same applies to the background image 160, performance pattern 114, reserved display images X1-, Y1-, and changing reserved image Z, etc. However, for images that are not dependent on the performance content, such as the error notification image 163, volume setting image 117a, and light intensity setting image 117b, it is preferable to set them without deformation regardless of the preview content, etc.

When performing a transformation effect on the effect pattern 114, which is composed of a pattern image 114a such as a number and a decorative image 114b such as a character, it is possible to configure it so that only the decorative image 114b is tilted. Since the number portion directly indicates the lottery result through its display content, it is desirable to exclude it from the target of tilt transformation and maintain a display form that is easy for the player to recognize.

In the embodiment, an example of tilt transformation is shown as an example of a predetermined transformation process for an image, but in addition to rotation processing that rotates an image by a predetermined angle around a predetermined center, any image processing can be used, such as enlargement processing, reduction processing, translation processing, or a combination of these. Regarding enlargement and reduction processing, the enlargement/reduction ratio may be uniform, or the enlargement/reduction ratio may be different in multiple directions.

In the second embodiment, the system is configured to determine whether or not to perform a specified transformation process based on transformation information previously assigned to each image, but it may also be configured to classify multiple layers into first layers that are subject to the specified transformation process and second layers that are not subject to the process, and to perform the specified transformation process on images in the first layer and not on images in the second layer.

In the second embodiment, the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is tilted relative to the image display means 60 etc. by tilting the sub-image display means 233 via the sub-screen movable body 231, rather than by image processing such as tilt transformation. However, a predetermined transformation process such as tilt transformation may also be performed on the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233.

In this case, if the specified transformation process is a rotation process such as tilt transformation, the rotation process on the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 may be in the same direction as the rotation of the sub-image display means 233, or it may be in the opposite direction. If the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 is rotated in the opposite direction to the rotation of the sub-image display means 233 and at approximately the same angle, the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 will appear upright to the player. Note that the specified transformation process may be performed on the image displayed on the sub-image display means 233 without operating the sub-image display means 233.

In the second embodiment, the predetermined transformation process for the image displayed on the image display means 60, etc., is configured to be performed in accordance with the transformation movement of the movable bodies 203a to 203c, 231, but the predetermined transformation process for the image may be performed independently of the transformation movement of the movable bodies (for example, without transforming the movable bodies).

The secondary performance pattern 252 shown in the embodiment is assumed to be a so-called fourth pattern that is always present on the liquid crystal and flashes in response to the change of the first and second special patterns, but even if this fourth pattern is provided separately from the image display means 60 using an LED or the like, a so-called mini pattern may be displayed on the image display means 60 as the secondary performance pattern 252. This mini pattern is a simplified, small representation of the changing performance pattern 114 using numbers and symbols, and is always displayed on the image display means 60 while the first and second special patterns are changing. It is preferable not to perform deformation processing such as tilting deformation on this mini pattern. It is also preferable to display this mini pattern in the non-concealed area D.

For convenience of explanation, the configuration of the movable effect means is different between the first and second embodiments, and the first embodiment mainly describes the relationship between the image display area and the displayed image, while the second embodiment mainly describes the deformation process of the displayed image, but both embodiments may be combined in any way. The second embodiment may be applied to the first embodiment to enable deformation effects such as tilt preview effects, and the relationship between the image display area and the displayed image in the first embodiment may be applied to the second embodiment.

If an illumination panel is mounted on the front side of the game board 16, the illumination panel may be used to emit light when performing transformation effects such as tilt preview effects. In this case, the design part of the illumination panel may impede the visibility of the displayed objects on the LCD screen, so it is desirable to display at least a portion of images that do not undergo a predetermined transformation process, such as the volume setting image 117a and light intensity setting image 117b, in a position that does not overlap with the design part of the illumination panel.

Regarding the preview performance in which a specified transformation process is performed, the type of image to be transformed, the time (period) and number of times the transformation process is performed, the degree of transformation of the transformation process, etc. may be varied depending on the reliability of the result of the lottery for the variable display. For example, if the result of the lottery for the variable display is a miss, a preview performance in which a specified transformation process with a low reliability is performed is likely to be performed, and a preview performance involving transformation processing with fewer types of images to be transformed, a shorter time (period) for performing the transformation process, a smaller number of times, and a smaller degree of transformation process is executed compared to when the lottery result is a win. In this way, a preview performance involving different transformation processes may be configured to be executed depending on the result of the lottery for the variable display.

Although no transformation processing is performed on the volume setting image 117a or light intensity setting image 117b, it may be configured to perform the transformation processing. In this case, however, it is preferable to configure it so that the volume/light intensity can be adjusted based on the player's operation even during the transformation processing. It is also preferable to configure it so that the volume setting image 117a and light intensity setting image 117b can be updated and displayed to reflect the adjustments made by the player even during the transformation processing.

In advance notices that suggest the results of the lottery for the variable display and in messages that inform the player of certain information, etc., a message may be displayed indicating that the volume or light intensity can be adjusted by a certain operation. Naturally, it is desirable to enable the volume or light intensity adjustment functions even during such advance notices or message displays. When a certain operation is performed by the player, it is desirable to display the volume setting image 117a or light intensity setting image 117b in a position that does not overlap with the advance notice or message display.

For a preview performance in which a predetermined transformation process is executed, the predetermined image that has undergone the predetermined transformation process may be changed to a new predetermined image and displayed. Specifically, when the background image 160 is transformed by the predetermined transformation process, the background image 160 is displayed in a reduced size at the same time as the transformation, so that it fades out from the liquid crystal. At the same time, the new background image 160 is displayed in an enlarged size while being transformed, so that it fades in on the liquid crystal. In this way, a background change performance in which the background image 160 is changed by executing the predetermined transformation process may be executed. Even in this case, it is preferable to display displayed objects that do not undergo the aforementioned transformation process without executing the transformation process.

When executing a background change performance in which a specified transformation process is performed to change the background image 160, it may be configured so that not only the background image 160 but also other specified images are changed in the same way. For example, if the display mode of the reserved images differs for each background, it may be configured so that the background image 160 is changed and the reserved images are also changed. Also, even if there is no need to change the display, it may be configured so that the background image 160 is faded out once and then faded in again with a new background image 160.

In addition to background change effects, a specified transformation process may be executed to change the displayed object before and after the specified transformation process. By using the specified transformation process to change/update the displayed object in this way, it is possible to increase the interest of the effect rather than simply changing/updating the displayed object by fading it out/in.

When executing a predetermined transformation process to perform a change performance, the display mode of the reserved display may be changed, for example. Specifically, if the reserved display mode before executing the predetermined transformation process is blue, the reserved display mode after executing the predetermined transformation process may be displayed in red. In this way, in a reserved change performance in which the reserved display mode is changed, the interest of the reserved change performance can be increased by utilizing the predetermined transformation process.

When executing a specified transformation process to perform a change performance, for example, the SU stage of the step-up performance (e.g. SU1 → SU2) may be changed. Specifically, if the stage before executing the specified transformation process is step-up image SU1, the stage after executing the specified transformation process may be displayed as step-up image SU2. In this way, in a step-up preview where the SU stage is updated, the interest of the step-up performance can be increased by utilizing the specified transformation process.

When executing a specified transformation process to perform a change effect, for example, the button image, gauge image, and operation guide image 166 of the button effect may be changed. Specifically, if the button image before executing the specified transformation process is the first button image, the button image after executing the specified transformation process may be displayed as the second button image. In this way, in button effects using an operating means, the interest of the button effects can be increased by utilizing the specified transformation process.

The button effect may also be valid for operation during the specified transformation process. If the player performs an operation during the specified transformation process, the specified transformation process may be interrupted and the operation-time effect may be executed. The operation-time effect may also be executed after the specified transformation process has ended.

In addition, the operation of the button effect may be disabled during the specified transformation process. The operation valid period may be configured to start after the specified transformation process is executed.

It is desirable that the button presentation is composed of a fade-in period in which the button-like image or button image is faded in, an operation period in which the button image, gauge image, and operation guide image 166 are displayed and the operation valid period is started, a fade-out period in which the button-like image or button image is faded out after the operation period ends, and an operation presentation period that is executed after that. When a predetermined transformation process is executed in the button presentation, the predetermined transformation process may be executed during the entire period, at least one period, or multiple periods.

It may be configured to execute a predetermined effect involving a predetermined transformation process while a vibration effect is being executed by a vibration means provided on the operation means etc. (it may be provided outside the operation means). As described above, if the predetermined transformation process is configured to be executed in various effects, a vibration effect may be executed during the predetermined transformation process. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the predetermined transformation process is in progress via a vibration effect.

The effect involving the predetermined transformation process may be configured to be executed more easily in the reach fluctuation period after the pattern has reached the reach state than in the normal fluctuation period before the pattern reaches the reach state. The effect in which the predetermined transformation process is executed during the normal fluctuation period may be different from the effect in which the predetermined transformation process is executed during the reach fluctuation period, or they may be the same effect. Also, it may be configured so that no effect that executes the predetermined transformation process is executed during the normal fluctuation period, but there is a possibility that an effect that executes the predetermined transformation process is executed during the reach fluctuation period. In any case, it may be configured so that the effect in which the predetermined transformation process is executed is executed more easily during the reach fluctuation period by making the appearance rate of the effect in which the predetermined transformation process is executed different between the normal fluctuation period and the reach fluctuation period.

When multiple reach performances can be executed during the reach fluctuation period, the system may be configured to have reach performances in which a predetermined transformation process is executed and reach performances in which a predetermined transformation process is not executed depending on the type of reach. Furthermore, the reach performance in which a predetermined transformation process is executed and the reach performance in which a predetermined transformation process is not executed may be different reach performances, or may be a common reach performance. Furthermore, in cases where a reach performance being executed develops and a reach performance after the development is executed, the reach performances may be the reach performance before the development and the reach performance after the development. Furthermore, the reach performances may be low-reliability and high-reliability. In any case, the system may be configured to differ in the probability of executing the predetermined transformation performance by differing the possibility of executing the predetermined transformation process depending on the type of reach performance.

As mentioned above, a predetermined transformation process may be executed in various effects, but more optimally, a predetermined lamp effect may be executed while the predetermined transformation process is being executed. In this case, a lamp effect corresponding to the image display that is subjected to the predetermined transformation process is executed. Specifically, when the image that is transformed by the predetermined transformation process rotates left, it is desirable to execute a lamp effect in which the light-emitting means arranged on the board or frame are turned on/off in a counterclockwise direction. Also, in the case of a clockwise rotation, the light effect is turned on/off clockwise, and when enlargement/reduction is involved, the lamp effect of each light-emitting means flashing may be executed.

When executing a predetermined transformation process in various effects as described above, the reliability of the lottery results of the variable display may be configured to differ between cases where the predetermined transformation process is not performed and cases where the predetermined transformation process is performed in the same preview effect. In other words, the preview effect may be configured to show a higher reliability when the predetermined transformation process is performed than when it is not performed.

Figures 61 to 89 show an example of the third embodiment. In Figures 61 and 62, the gaming machine main body 300 comprises an outer frame (first support frame) 301 and a front frame (second support frame) 302 arranged in front of the outer frame 301. The front frame 302 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 301 via a pair of upper and lower first hinges 303 arranged on the left end side so that it can be opened, closed, and detached, and can be locked in a closed state relative to the outer frame 301 by a locking means 304 provided on the right end side opposite the first hinge 303 in the left-right direction.

The front frame 302 comprises a main frame 305 and a glass door 306 arranged in front of the main frame 305. The glass door 306 is pivotally attached to the main frame 305 via a pair of upper and lower second hinges 307 arranged on the left end side so that it can be opened, closed, and detached, and can be locked in the closed state relative to the main frame 305 by the locking means 304. The first hinge 303 and the second hinge 307 are arranged so as to be coaxial.

As shown in FIG. 62, the outer frame 301 is formed in a rectangular shape with a pair of left and right vertical frame members 308 and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 309. A front cover member 310 made of synthetic resin is attached to the lower horizontal frame member 309 so as to cover the horizontal frame member 309 from the front and connect the front lower parts of the left and right vertical frame members 308. The front cover member 310 protrudes further forward than the left and right vertical frame members 308, and the main frame 305 is disposed above it.

The main frame 305 is made of synthetic resin and is rectangular in shape so that it can abut the front edge of the outer frame 301 above the front cover member 310. It is integrally equipped with a game board mounting section 311 that is provided in the shape of a rectangular opening on the upper side, and a lower mounting section 312 that is provided below this game board mounting section 311.

As shown in Figures 65 to 68, the game board mounting part 311 allows the game board 313 to be attached and detached from the front side, and this game board mounting part 311 is provided with an abutment part 314 against which the game board 313 abuts from the front side, an engagement part 315 that engages with the game board 313 when one of the left and right ends of the game board 313 is inserted into the game board mounting part 311, and a fixing means 316 for removably fixing the other end side of the game board 313 in the game board mounting part 311 to the main frame 305. Note that the game board mounting part 311 may allow the game board 313 to be attached and detached from the back side.

When mounting the game board 313 on the game board mounting part 311, one end of the game board 313 is inserted between the abutment part 314 and the engagement part 315 of the game board mounting part 311 from the front side of the game board mounting part 311, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 65. Next, when the other end of the game board 313 is pressed into the main body frame 305, the game board 313 rotates backward in the direction of arrow 313A in FIG. 65 with the engagement part 315 side or the intermediate side between the abutment part 314 and the engagement part 315 as the rotation center O, so that the game board 313 can be pushed into the game board mounting part 311 as shown by the solid line in FIG. 65 against the sliding resistance between the game board 313 and the game board mounting part 311.

Once the game board 313 is placed in the game board mounting section 311, the other end of the game board 313 is fastened and fixed to the game board mounting section 311 by a pair of upper and lower fixing means 316. This allows the game board 313 to be easily mounted. To remove the game board 313, simply place your fingers on an appropriate part of the game board 313 and rotate it around the rotation center O in the direction opposite to the arrow 313A in the reverse order.

As shown in Figures 62 to 68, the main frame 305 is provided with an enclosing wall 317 that protrudes rearward from the outer periphery of the game board mounting part 311, either integrally or separately. The enclosing wall 317 encloses and protects the back mechanism of the game board 313 mounted on the game board mounting part 311 from the outer periphery, and includes an upper wall part 318 that protrudes rearward from the top of the game board mounting part 311, a pair of left and right side walls 319 that protrude rearward from both the left and right sides of the game board mounting part 311, and a bottom wall part 320 that protrudes rearward from the bottom of the game board mounting part 311.

The top wall 318 and bottom wall 320 are arranged on both the top and bottom of the game board mounting part 311 in the left-right direction, and the side wall 319 is arranged on both the left and right of the rear side of the game board mounting part 311 in the up-down direction. The bottom wall 320 is provided with an outlet 321 that discharges game balls that have passed through the back side of the game board 313 downward.

As shown in Figures 61 and 62, the glass door 306 is provided with a synthetic resin door base 322 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the main frame 305. This door base 322 has a window hole 324 formed in correspondence with the front side of the play area 323 formed on the play board 313, and multiple speakers 325 are arranged at predetermined locations around the window hole 324, such as above, below, left, and right, and each speaker 325 is fitted with a decorative cover 326 that substantially covers the front side.

Also, as shown in FIG. 61, on the lower front side of the door base 322, there are arranged an upper tray (launched ball storage tray) 328 that stores game balls and supplies them to the launching means 327, a lower tray (surplus ball receiving tray) 329 that stores surplus balls that overflow from the upper tray 328 when the upper tray 328 is full of game balls, and a launch handle 330 that is operated to operate the launching means 327, and further, a lower decorative cover 331 is attached that roughly covers the upper tray 328, lower tray 329, etc. from the front.

The lower decorative cover 331 is formed into a forward-facing bulge, and on its upper side are provided operation means such as a performance button 332 that the player can press, and a cross operation means 333. The cross operation means 333 has four operation parts 334: an up key on the rear side, a down key on the front side, a left key on the left side, and a right key on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 62, a glass unit 340 is removably attached to the rear side of the door base 322 so as to substantially cover the window hole 324 from the rear side, and a reinforcing metal plate 335 arranged vertically along the edge of the first and second hinges 303, 307, a reinforcing metal plate 336 arranged vertically along the edge of the opening and closing end, and a reinforcing metal plate 337 arranged horizontally below the window hole 324 are removably fixed by screws or the like.

A ball feeding means 338, a ball guiding means 339, etc. are attached to the back side of the reinforcing sheet metal 337. The ball feeding means 338 is for supplying the game balls in the upper tray 328 one by one to the launching means 327, and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the launching means 327. The ball guiding means 339 is for guiding surplus balls that overflow from the upper tray 328 when the upper tray 328 is full of game balls, and foul balls that return without reaching the playing area 323, to the lower tray 329, and is arranged adjacent to the ball feeding means 338 on the first and second hinges 303, 307 side.

As shown in Figures 62 to 69, the game board 313 is removably attached to the game board mounting section 311 of the main frame 305, and the performance control board 345, power module board 346, and main control board 354 are arranged on the back side of the game board 313. Also, on the back side of the main frame 305, a ball tank 347, a ball guide rail 348, and an external information retrieval means 349 are arranged on the upper end side, and a ball payout means 350, a ball guide means 351, and a relay board 352 are arranged vertically on one side in the left-right direction, and an LED connection board 353 is arranged vertically on the other side in the left-right direction. Furthermore, on the back side of the main frame 305, a payout board 355 and a ball lending board 356 are arranged on the left and right below the main control board 354.

The ball tank 347, ball guide rail 348, and external information retrieval means 349 are arranged in the left-right direction along the upper side of the upper wall portion 318 of the enclosing wall 317, as shown in Figures 63 and 64. The ball tank 347 is used to store game balls for prize balls and loan balls, and is configured as a rectangle long in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and is fixed removably by abutting against the step portion 318a of the upper wall portion 318 of the enclosing wall 317. The ball tank 347 is open at the top so as to receive game balls supplied from the supply means 357 on the island side.

The ball guide rail 348 is for guiding game balls from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350, and is arranged at an angle in the left-right direction from the underside of the ball tank 347 to the upper side of the ball payout means 350, and is removably attached to the back side of the main body frame 305. A ball crushing mechanism 358 is provided midway along the ball guide rail 348 as necessary. The external information retrieval means 349 is for retrieving various game information to the outside, and is equipped with multiple retrieval terminals 359 arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and is arranged above the ball guide rail 348.

Of the left and right side wall portions 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall portion 319 on the side of the first and second hinges 303, 307 is integrally provided with a rear mounting base 360 that bends inward in the left-right direction from its rear end as shown in Figures 63 to 68, and the ball dispensing means 350 and ball guiding means 351 are arranged in a vertical line on the back side of this rear mounting base 360 and are removably attached.

The ball payout means 350 is for paying out game balls in the ball tank 347 based on a prize ball payout command from the payout board 355 and a ball lending command from the ball lending board 356. As shown in FIG. 64, the ball payout means 350 includes a payout case 362 formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape that is flat in the front-rear direction, a storage passage 363 provided in a zigzag shape in the payout case 362, a rotor 364 that pays out game balls in the storage passage 363, and a drive motor (not shown) that drives the rotor 364, and is detachably attached to the back side of the rear mounting base 360. The game balls paid out from the ball payout means 350 are guided to the upper tray 328 via the ball guide means 351.

As shown in FIG. 64, the ball guiding means 351 has a payout passage 366 and an extraction passage 367. When the ball payout means 350 pays out a game ball, the game ball from the ball payout means 350 is guided to the upper tray 328 via the payout passage 366, and when a game ball is extracted from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350, the game ball can be extracted from the extraction passage 367 to the outside of the machine via an extraction port (not shown). A relay board 352 is provided on the back side of the ball guiding means 351.

Of the left and right side walls 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall 319 located opposite the center of rotation O when the game board 313 is attached or detached is provided with a side wall reinforcing member 368 made of sheet metal that reinforces the side wall 319 from the outside, as shown in Figures 64 to 68, and a frame side joint 369 is provided along the bottom wall 320 from the side wall 319 in an L-shape when viewed from the front. The side wall reinforcing member 368 has the function of protecting the side wall 319 and the back mechanism of the game board 313 from damage caused by contact with other members when the front frame 302 is opened or closed.

As shown in Figures 66 and 69, the frame-side joint part 369 is arranged in front-to-back correspondence with the board-side joint part 370 on the back side of the game board 313, and is electrically connected to the board-side joint part 370 in a detachable manner when the game board 313 is attached to or detached from the game board mounting part 311.

As shown in FIG. 62, the launching means 327, the lower speaker 325a, etc. are arranged on the front side of the lower mounting part 312. Also, as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, a first board mounting base 371 is attached to the back side of the lower mounting part 312 so as to cover the back side mechanism of the lower mounting part 312, and a payout board 355 housed in a payout board case 372 and a ball lending board 356 housed in a ball lending board case 373 are arranged on the left and right sides on the back side of this first board mounting base 371.

As shown in FIG. 69, the launching means 327 includes a sheet metal support plate 374, a launching rail 375 attached to the front of the support plate 374, a ball holding section 376 attached to the front of the support plate 374 and holding the game ball to be launched on the launching rail 375, a striking hammer 378 supported on the front of the support plate 374 so as to be able to swing freely around a drive shaft 377 in the front-rear direction, and a launching drive means 379 such as a rotary solenoid attached to the back side of the support plate 374 and driving the striking hammer 378 in the striking direction via the drive shaft 377. When the launch handle 330 is rotated, the striking hammer 378 is driven in the striking direction (clockwise) by the launching drive means 379 according to the amount of rotation, and the game ball on the launching rail 375 is launched toward the game board 313.

The payout board 355 is for controlling the ball payout means 350 in accordance with a payout command. The payout board case 372 that houses the payout board 355 is removably fixed to the first board mounting base 371 by engagement means 380 on one of the left and right ends and a fastener 381 on the other end, as shown in Figures 63 and 64. The fastener 381 has a knob 382 that can be rotated around a front-to-rear axis on the first board mounting base 371, and the knob 382 is used to tighten the payout board case 372 to the first board mounting base 371.

As shown in Figures 63 and 64, the ball lending board 356 is for controlling the ball dispensing means 350 in accordance with ball lending commands from a ball lending button or the like. The ball lending board case 373 that houses the ball lending board 356 is pivotally attached around a vertical axis by pivot means 383 on one of the left and right ends, and is removably fixed to the first board mounting base 371 by locking means 384 on the other end. The locking means 384 has a locking button 385 that can be operated in the forward and backward directions, and when the locking button 385 is pressed forward, the ball lending board case 373 is locked to the first board mounting base 371, and when the locking button 385 is pulled rearward, the locking is released.

The game board 313 is made of a non-translucent material such as plywood or a transparent material such as synthetic resin, and is generally rectangular in shape. As shown in FIG. 70, the front side of the game board 313 is provided with the game area 323, a guide rail 387 that guides the game balls launched from the launching means 327 to the upper side of the game area 323, and a central display frame (center case) 388 that is located approximately in the center and is detachably attached to the front side of the game board 313. In addition, a front decorative member 389 is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 323 on the front side of the game board 313.

As shown in Figures 65 to 68 and 71 to 75, the rear side of the game board 313 is fitted with a mounting frame 391 and a second board mounting base 392 arranged to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391. The mounting frame 391 is fitted with an image display means 393 such as a liquid crystal type arranged on the rear side of the game board 313 corresponding to the central display frame 388, first to fourth movable performance means 394 to 397 arranged between the central display frame 388 and the image display means 393, an LED connection board 353 to which the LEDs for light emission on the front side of the front frame 302 are connected, and a harness receiving base 399 for receiving a harness arranged on the rear side.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 72, the performance control board 345 and the power supply module board 346 are attached to the back side of the image display means 393. As shown in FIG. 72, the back side of the second board mounting base 392 is provided with a main control board case 513 that houses the main control board 354, and a board-side joint part 370 that is electrically attached and detached to the frame-side joint part 369 when the game board 313 is attached and detached.

The mounting frame 391 is a short rectangular cylinder in the front-to-rear direction, and is removably attached to the back side of the game board 313. The first to fourth movable performance means 394 to 397 are incorporated within the mounting frame 391 as shown in Figures 70 and 73 to 75, and can be attached and detached from the back side of the game board 313 together with the mounting frame 391 by attaching and detaching the mounting frame 391 to the game board 313.

As shown in FIG. 70, a central display frame 388 is located approximately in the center of the play area 323, with a left flow path 401 and a right flow path 402 formed on either side of the central display frame 388, and a start winning means 403 is located approximately in the center of the lower side of the central display frame 388, with a big winning means 404 and a normal winning means 405 located on either side of the start winning means 403. Various display means including a normal symbol display means 406, a normal reserved number display means 407, a first special symbol display means 408, and a second special symbol display means 409 are located at appropriate positions on the front side of the central display frame 388.

The guide rail 387 is disposed on the front side of the game board 313 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 323, and guides the game ball launched from the launching means 327 to the upper side of the game area 323 via the guide path 411. A large number of game pegs (not shown) are disposed in the game area 323, and the game ball that is shot into the upper part of the game area 323 via the guide rail 387 is sorted by the central display frame 388 etc. into either the left flow path 401 or the right flow path 402 and flows down while colliding with the game pegs.

As shown in FIG. 70, the game board 313 has a central display frame 388, a number of mounting holes 413-415 for mounting the start winning means 403, the big winning means 404, the normal winning means 405, and an outlet 416, which are formed in a penetrating manner in the front-to-rear direction. The mounting hole 413 is for mounting the central display frame 388, and is provided in approximately the center of the game area 323. The mounting hole 414 is for mounting the start winning means 403, and the mounting hole 415 is for mounting the normal winning means 405, and is provided below the mounting hole 413. The outlet 416 is located at the bottom of the game area 323.

As shown in Figures 76 to 80, the central display frame 388 covers the outer periphery of the image display means 393 from the front side and forms a display window 418 corresponding to the image display means 393 on the inside. This central display frame 388 is provided with a first display frame 419 and a second display frame 420 that are divided in two in the circumferential direction so as to surround the display window 418, and is detachably attached to the front side of the game board 313 with screws or the like so that the outer periphery of the display window 418 is located within the mounting hole 413. Note that the central display frame 388 is provided with the first display frame 419 and the second display frame 420 that are divided in two in the circumferential direction, but the entire frame may be divided into three or more parts as necessary, or may be divided into multiple parts in the front-to-rear direction.

As shown in Figures 73, 76 to 80, the first display frame 419 is detachably attached to the front of the game board 313. It is provided with a plate-like or other front mounting part 421 that is arranged along the front of the game board 313 outside the mounting hole 413 and allows game balls to pass through its front side, a decorative front frame part 422 that is provided in the front of the front mounting part 421 from the top side to both the left and right sides in a roughly gate-like shape when viewed from the front and protrudes forward from the inner periphery of the front mounting part 421, a window frame part 423 that is bent backward from the inner periphery of the front frame part 422 and is arranged inside the mounting hole 413 and surrounds the display window 418 from the outer periphery, and left and right decorative members 424 that are arranged vertically behind the window frame part 423 on both the left and right sides of the display window 418, and is detachably attached to the front of the game board 313.

The decorative members 424 are plate-shaped or have other shapes, and as shown in Figures 73, 76, and 77, are arranged to protrude toward the display window 418 from the inner circumference of the window frame portion 423. Of the left and right decorative members 424, one decorative member 424 is fixed to the front frame portion 422 etc. via the attachment portion 424a, and the other decorative member 424 is fixed to the window frame portion 423 etc. via the attachment portion 424a.

The front mounting portion 421, the front frame portion 422, and the window frame portion 423 form a front member 426 that defines the play area 323 on the outer periphery of the central display frame 388, and the decorative member 424 forms a rear member 427 that is located behind the front member 426 and on the outer periphery of the image display means 393. Various display means such as the normal symbol display means 406, the normal reserved number display means 407, the first special symbol display means 408, and the second special symbol display means 409 are arranged in appropriate positions on the front side of the first display frame 419.

The second display frame 420 is provided with a stage 429 that drops the game ball from the front side of the game board 313 to the start winning means 403, and a warp port 430 that guides the game ball flowing down the left flow path 401 to the stage 429.

This second display frame 420 is disposed between the left and right lower ends of the window frame portion 423 of the first display frame 419, and is equipped with a plate-shaped front mounting member 432 that abuts against the front of the game board 313 at the lower side of the mounting hole 413, a stage 429 disposed above the front mounting member 432, and an intrusion prevention member 431 disposed from the top to the rear of the stage 429, and both left and right ends are detachably connected to the left and right lower ends of the first display frame 419 with screws or the like.

The front mounting member 432 is integrally provided with a reinforcing peripheral wall portion 433 that is disposed on the inner circumference of the mounting hole 413 and extends over substantially the entire length in the left-right direction on the rear side. As shown in Figures 76 to 80, this front mounting member 432 is formed with a warp port 430 that opens to the left flow-down path 401 side, and a guide passage 434 that guides game balls from this warp port 430 to the stage 429 side. The guide passage 434 is connected to a guide passage 435 formed in the entry prevention member 431 on the rear side, and guides and directs game balls that enter the warp port 430 while flowing down the left flow-down path 401 from this guide passage 434 through the guide passage 435 to one end of the stage 429.

The warp port 430 is provided on the front side of the front mounting member 432. The front mounting member 432 has an opening 437 on the front side of the warp port 430, and a passage wall 438 for the guide passage 434 that protrudes forward in a U-shape is provided integrally on the lower side of the warp port 430. The rear side of the guide passage 434 is connected to the guide passage 435 via a connection hole 439. The guide passage 435 is formed between the front mounting member 432 and a passage wall 440 that is provided on the intrusion prevention member 431 with a U-shaped cross section.

By providing the warp port 430 and guide passage 434 of this structure in the front mounting member 432, it is possible to mold the warp port 430 and guide passage 434 integrally with the front mounting member 432 using a mold divided into front and rear parts. This reduces the number of parts in the second display frame 420 and cuts manufacturing costs compared to when a warp port member including the warp port 430 and guide passage 434 is provided on the front mounting member 432 so that it can be freely attached and detached from the front side.

The rear sides of both the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 may be open, and the open side, excluding the connection hole 439 with the guide passage 435, may be blocked by other members such as the game board 313, the stage 429, or the intrusion prevention member 431. In short, it is sufficient that the warp port 430 and the front attachment member 432 including the guide passage 434 can be molded as a single unit using a mold divided into two parts for the front and rear.

The stage 429 is generally arc-shaped when viewed from the front, with higher left and right sides, and has a central drop section 450 located approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and left and right drop sections 451 located on both the left and right sides of the central drop section 450. After the game ball guided from the warp port 430 rolls freely in the left-right direction, it falls from either the central drop section 450 or the left and right drop sections 451 to the front of the game board 313. The central drop section 450 is located approximately directly above the start winning means 403, and when the game ball falls from this central drop section 450, there is a high possibility that the game ball will win the start winning means 403.

In addition to the guide passage 435, the intrusion prevention member 431 is provided with a rear intrusion prevention plate 443 that is provided approximately parallel to the game board 313 so as to cover the stage 429 from the rear side, and an upper intrusion prevention plate 444 that is bent forward from the upper end of the rear intrusion prevention plate 443 to cover the stage 429 from above. These intrusion prevention plates 443, 444 are designed to prevent game balls flowing down each flow path 401, 402 or game balls that have bounced off the stage 429 from entering the rear side. The intrusion prevention member 431 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the display image displayed on the image display means 393 can be viewed from the front side through this intrusion prevention member 431.

As shown in Figures 71 to 75, 81 to 83, etc., the mounting frame 391 is integrally provided with a rear wall 446 formed approximately parallel to the game board 313 and having a rectangular opening 455 formed approximately in the center, a peripheral wall 447 extending forward from the outer edge of the rear wall 446 to the back surface of the game board 313, and a fixing part 448 bent outward from the front edge side of the peripheral wall 447 along the game board 313 and fixed to the game board 313 by fixing screws or the like. The top, bottom, left and right walls of the peripheral wall 447 are located close to the upper wall 318, side wall 319 and bottom wall 320 of the outer surrounding wall 317.

As shown in Figures 73, 75, and 81, the rear side of the rear wall 446 of the mounting frame 391 is provided with a display means mounting section 453 to which the image display means 393 is removably mounted in the vertical direction along the game board 313, bulging sections 454 that are arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the display means mounting section 453 and have a U-shaped cross section in a plan view that bulges out rearward from the image display means 393, and a harness receiving base 399 that is arranged below the bulging sections 454 and on the back side of the display means mounting section 453.

As shown in Figures 72, 73, 75, 81, etc., each of the left and right bulges 454 has multiple openings 456 formed in the vertical direction on the outside of the left and right direction, and the rear side of the openings 456 serves as a handle portion 457. A plurality of handle portions 457 are provided in the vertical direction on each bulge 454, and by hooking one of the handle portions 457 on either the left or right side with one's fingers, the game board 313 can be easily transported even with each component attached. In particular, since the mounting frame 391 has multiple handle portions 457 on both the left and right sides in the vertical direction, it is possible to use the handle portion 457 that is in the optimal position in terms of weight balance, taking into account the mounting status of each component on the game board 313, etc.

As shown in Figures 65, 67, 68, 73, 81 and 82, the display means mounting section 453 is provided with a receiving section 460 on the outer periphery of the opening 455 and receives the outer periphery of the front side of the image display means 393 from the front side, bulging sections 454 on both the left and right sides of the receiving section 460 and guide both the left and right sides of the image display means 393 in the insertion/removal direction, and a protruding wall 461 on the lower side of the receiving section 460 against which the image display means 393 abuts on the insertion end side, and the upper side is an insertion/removal section 462 for the image display means 393.

The protruding wall 461 protrudes rearward to a height approximately half that of the bulge 454, and bends upward from both the left and right ends of the receiving portion 460 to reach the underside of the bulge 454. The upper end of the image display means 393 is removably fixed to the upper receiving portion 460 by a plurality of fixing means 463 in the left-right direction, and the lower end of the image display means 393 is removably fixed to the protruding wall 461 by a plurality of fixing means 464 in the left-right direction.

The insertion/removal section 462 of the display means mounting section 453 is provided on the upper end side of the mounting frame 391 as shown in Figures 65, 67, 68, 81, and 82. When the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting section 311 of the front frame 302, the upper wall section 318 of the surrounding wall 317 of the front frame 302, the ball tank 347, and other frame side members are close to the upper side of this insertion/removal section 462, and it is covered from above by the upper wall section 318, ball tank 347, and other frame side members. Therefore, when the game board 313 is mounted, the image display means 393 cannot be removed from the insertion/removal section 462.

As shown in FIG. 73, the bulging portions 454 are U-shaped in cross section in plan view with the front open, and are arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the display means mounting portion 453. The left and right bulging portions 454 and the left and right receiving portions 460 form guide rails 465 that guide the image display means 393 on both the left and right sides.

The internal space of the bulge 454 functions as a storage section that stores part or all of the internal mechanism (game parts) inside the mounting frame 391. Of the left and right bulge sections 454, the bulge section 454 on the ball payout means 350 side is arranged adjacent to the rear mounting base 360 and overlaps front to back, and the bulge section 454 on the opposite side to the ball payout means 350 is provided with a side board mounting base 467 that protrudes rearward beyond the image display means 393. The side board mounting base 467 is a vertically elongated rectangle, and the outer sides in the left and right directions are detachably fixed to the rear side of the bulge 454 and the lower end side is detachably fixed to the rear side of the harness receiving base 399 by fasteners such as screws.

The side circuit board mounting base 467 is fixed at one side to the bulge 454 of the mounting frame 391 by multiple upper and lower fasteners 473, and at the bottom to the harness receiving base 399 by multiple left and right fasteners 474. The harness receiving base 399 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by fasteners 475 such as screws. Screws or the like are used for the fasteners 473 to 475.

The side board mounting base 467 and harness receiving base 399 constitute protruding members (fixing members) that protrude further back than the display means mounting portion 453, overlapping the left and right sides and the bottom of the display means mounting portion 453 from the back side, and constitute a back guide means that presses and guides the image display means 393 from the back side when inserting and removing the image display means 393. In addition to the back guide means, the side board mounting base 467 and harness receiving base 399 constitute a limiting means (back press means) that limits the movement of the image display means 393 to the rear side. The side board mounting base 467 and harness receiving base 399 are close to the image display means 393 with a small gap between them, but may be in sliding contact with the image display means 393.

As shown in Figs. 71 to 73 and 82, the LED connection board 353 is removably attached to the side board mounting base 467 without using screws or the like. LEDs (not shown) are connected to the LED connection board 353 to illuminate the front side of the front frame 302. The side board mounting base 467 has a peripheral wall portion 469 that surrounds the LED connection board 353, a board contact portion 470 against which the LED connection board 353 contacts from the back side, a board engagement portion 471 that engages with one left and right edge of the LED connection board 353, and a board engagement claw 472 that engages with the other left and right edge of the LED connection board 353, which are used to removably fix the LED connection board 353.

Multiple board contact portions 470 are provided in the circumferential direction on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 469 in correspondence with the outer circumference of the LED connection board 353. Multiple board engagement portions 471 are provided in the vertical direction on the inside of one of the left and right sides of the peripheral wall portion 469 in correspondence with the middle between the board contact portions 470. Multiple board engagement claws 472 are elastically deformable in the direction of engagement and disengagement with respect to the LED connection board 353, and multiple board engagement claws 472 are provided in the vertical direction on the other of the left and right sides of the peripheral wall portion 469.

When mounting the LED connection board 353 on the side board mounting base 467, first one end of the LED connection board 353 is inserted between the board contact portion 470 and the board engagement portion 471. Next, when the LED connection board 353 is pressed toward the side board mounting base 467 using the board contact portion 470 and the board engagement portion 471 as fulcrums, the board engagement claws 472 elastically deform outward and the LED connection board 353 fits within the peripheral wall portion 469, with its outer periphery abutting against the board contact portions 470. Then, when the LED connection board 353 passes through the board engagement claws 472, the board engagement claws 472 return to their original shape due to their elastic force and engage with the other side edge of the LED connection board 353.

Therefore, with this configuration, the LED connection board 353 can be easily attached and detached to the side board mounting base 467, and the side board mounting base 467 can be removed and easily reused as synthetic resin material. In addition, no screws are required to fix the LED connection board 353, and the amount of screws used can be reduced as much as possible.

The mounting structure of the LED connection board 353 to the side board mounting base 467 can also be used when mounting a mounting member to another mounting base.

The image display means 393 is configured by housing a rectangular liquid crystal type image display panel 481 in a housing case 482, and as shown in Figures 65, 67, 68, 73, 85, and 86, it is inserted from the insertion/removal part 462 side into the display means mounting part 453 in a vertically removable manner, and both upper and lower ends of the housing case 482 are fixed by fixing means 463, 464. The housing case 482 is flat from front to back, and the image display panel 481 is housed in a removable manner from the front open side. The image display panel 481 is held by the housing case 482 and a pressing frame 483 arranged corresponding to the front outer periphery of the image display panel 481. The pressing frame 483 is fixed to the peripheral wall part 484 of the housing case 482.

The fixing means 463, 464 are provided in multiple sets in the left-right direction on both the top and bottom sides of the image display means 393. As shown in FIG. 67, the upper fixing means 463 has an attachment part 485 that protrudes upward from the storage case 482, an attachment hole 486 that corresponds to the attachment part 485 and is provided in the receiving part 460 of the display means mounting part 453, and a fastener 487 such as a screw that is inserted from the attachment part 485 to the attachment hole 486.

As shown in FIG. 68, the lower fixing means 464 includes an attachment portion 488 that protrudes downward from the storage case 482, an attachment hole 489 provided in the protruding wall 461 of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the attachment portion 488, and a fastener 490 such as a screw that passes through the attachment hole 489 from the attachment portion 488. The protruding wall 461 is provided with a positioning portion 491 that positions the image display means 393 to the left and right between the attachment portion 488 and the attachment portion 488.

The positioning portion 491 is formed as a notch in the protruding wall 461 so that the mounting portion 488 can be inserted and removed in the vertical direction, and a mounting hole 489 is provided within the positioning portion 491. The mounting portion 488 and the positioning portion 491 form a positioning means for the image display means 393. The harness receiving base 399 is provided with an opening or notch-shaped operating portion 492 facing the fixing means 464, and a tool for the fixing device 490 or the like is inserted through this operating portion 492 to perform operations such as turning the fixing device 490.

As shown in Figures 85 and 86, the storage case 482 has a peripheral wall portion 484, and an upper rear wall portion 493 and a lower rear wall portion 494 that are integrally formed at the rear end side of the peripheral wall portion 484 and abut the back surface of the image display panel 481. The storage case 482 has a large depth in the front-to-rear direction on the upper rear wall portion 493 side, and has ribs and other reinforcing parts 493a on the front side or both front and rear sides, and protrudes slightly rearward from the lower rear wall portion 494. The performance control board 345 and power module board 346 are attached to the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 493. The lower rear wall portion 494 is close to the back surface of the image display panel 481, and a harness receiving stand 399 is provided close to the back side of the lower rear wall portion 494.

The performance control board 345 has the function of controlling the various performance images displayed on the image display means 393, or the function of controlling the performance images and the function of controlling the various other movable performance means 394-397, and is housed in a performance control board case 495. As shown in FIG. 85(a), the performance control board case 495 is configured by connecting a front case 495a and a rear case 495b so that they can be opened and closed in the front-to-rear direction. An opening 498 is provided in the rear case 495b corresponding to the connector 497 on the back surface of the performance control board 345, and a harness (not shown) is connected to the connector 497 on the opening 498 side.

The performance control board case 495 is removably attached to the back side of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393 by a fixed engagement part 499, an abutment part 500, a fastener 501, and an engagement claw 502. The fixed engagement part 499 and the abutment part 500 protrude rearward from the storage case 482 with a gap of the performance control board case 495 between them, and the performance control board case 495 removably engages with the fixed engagement part 499, and the abutment part 500 sandwiches the performance control board case 495 in the left-right direction between the fixed engagement part 499 and the abutment part 500.

The fastener 501 is supported on the abutment portion 500 by a pivot 505 so as to be freely rotatable, and is adapted to be operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the performance control board case 495 to the storage case 482. The fastener 501 can be positioned on the abutment portion 500 at a fastening position and a release position. The engagement claw 502 protrudes from the rear side of the storage case 482 and is positioned above the abutment portion 500, and engages with the performance control board case 495 so as to be freely engaged and disengaged.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the abutment portion 500, fastener 501, and engagement claw 502 are arranged so as not to interfere with the side board mounting base 467 when the image display means 393 is inserted into or removed from the display means mounting portion 453. On the other hand, the fixed engagement portion 499 is located on the left-right edge side of the storage case 482, and if an attempt is made to insert the image display means 393 into the display means mounting portion 453 with the left and right sides incorrect, the fixed engagement portion 499 interferes with the upper end of the side board mounting base 467 as shown in FIG. 89(b), preventing the image display means 393 from being inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 in that state.

Therefore, the fixed engagement portion (first member) 499 and the side board mounting base (second member) 467 constitute an erroneous installation prevention means 516 that prevents the image display means 393 from being erroneously installed on the display means mounting portion 453.

The fixed engagement portion (first member) 499 constitutes a mounting fixture for detachably mounting the performance control board case 495 to the storage case 482, but the mounting fixture may be used to mount other parts besides the performance control board case 495. The first member may also be a protrusion that is provided in a protruding shape for another purpose, and is not limited to a mounting fixture.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), the power supply module board 346 is housed in a power supply module board case 506 and is detachably attached to the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 493 of the housing case 482 above the performance control board 345 via engagement means 503, 504, etc.

When mounting the image display means 393 on the mounting frame 391 on the back side of the game board 313, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 from the insertion/removal portion 462 side and mounted. Note that in FIG. 89, for convenience of drawing, the game board 313 and the image display means 393 are shown in an upright position, but when mounting the image display means 393 during assembly of the game board 313, the work is performed with the game board 313 laid horizontally with the front side facing downwards, for example.

When mounting the image display means 393, insert the image display means 393 from the insertion/removal section 462 side along the guide rail 465 of the display means mounting section 453 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 89(a). Then, insert the image display means 393 into the display means mounting section 453 until the insertion end side of the storage case 482 abuts against the protruding wall 461.

When the mounting portion 485 on the insertion end side of the storage case 482 enters the positioning portion 491 of the protruding wall 461, the positioning function of this mounting portion 485 and the positioning portion 491 allows the image display means 393 in the display means mounting portion 453 to be positioned at an appropriate position in the left-right direction. Next, the image display means 393 can be fixed to the receiving portion 460 of the display means mounting portion 453 by the fixing means 463, 464 on both the top and bottom sides.

In this way, when the insertion/removal section 462 side of the display means mounting section 453 is in an open state, the image display means 393 can be attached and detached from the insertion/removal section 462 side approximately parallel to the game board 313. This has the advantage that, even though there are other components such as the side board mounting base 467 and harness receiving base 399 around the display means mounting section 453 so as to overlap the image display means 393, the image display means 393 can be easily attached and detached without having to be removed. Therefore, other components can be positioned so as to overlap the back side of the image display means 393.

When inserting the image display means 393 into the display means mounting portion 453, one of the left and right ends of the image display means 393 enters underneath the side board mounting base 467, and then the lower side of the image display means 393 enters underneath the harness receiving base 399, so that the side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 can be used as a kind of guide member. Therefore, even when inserting or removing the image display means 393 with the game board 313 in an upright position, there is no risk of the image display means 393 falling off backwards, and the image display means 393 can be easily and safely inserted or removed.

During assembly, if the image display means 393 is inserted in the wrong direction into the display means mounting section 453 as shown in Figure 89 (b), the fixing engagement section 499 for fixing the performance control board case 495 will interfere with the side board mounting base 467 on the back side of the display means mounting section 453, making it impossible to insert the image display means 393 into the display means mounting section 453. This makes it possible to prevent incorrect insertion or mounting of the image display means 393.

In addition, the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 constitute the mis-installation prevention means 516, and since the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 serve as the mis-installation prevention means 516, the structure can be simplified compared to when a dedicated mis-installation prevention means 516 is provided.

Even if the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 are used to prevent erroneous installation, other members than the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 may be used. It is also possible to provide a dedicated means or member for preventing erroneous installation without using other members for both purposes.

When the presentation control board 345 is attached, one end of the presentation control board case 495 is engaged with the fixed engagement portion 499, and then the presentation control board case 495 is abutted against the back surface of the storage case 482 and sandwiched between the fixed engagement portion 499 and the abutment portion 500. When the presentation control board case 495 is abutted against the back surface of the storage case 482, the engagement claw 502 engages with the presentation control board case 495. Therefore, even when the game board 313 is in an upright position, the presentation control board case 495 will not fall off. Finally, the fastener 501 is rotated around the pivot 505 toward the presentation control board case 495, and the fastener 501 tightens and fixes the presentation control board case 495 to the back surface of the storage case 482.

A harness receiving stand 399 is provided on the rear side of the protruding wall 461, located behind the lower side of the display means mounting section 453 so as to be adjacent to the lower rear wall section 494 of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393. As shown in Figures 82 to 84, the harness receiving stand 399 is fixed to the protruding wall 461 on the lower side and on the left and right sides by fasteners 475 such as screws.

As shown in FIG. 72, the back surface of the harness receiving base 399 is provided with multiple hanging parts 507 for the harness 476 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the harness 467 is secured using the hanging parts 507 at appropriate locations. The hanging parts 507 are for securing the harness 476 wired along the back surface of the harness receiving base 399, and are arranged in the vertical or horizontal directions approximately parallel to the harness receiving base 399, with one end in the longitudinal direction being elastically deformable and connected to the harness receiving base 399. The hanging parts 507 are configured in a claw or hook shape.

When wiring the harness 476, the harness 476 is wired left and right along the back surface of the harness receiving base 399 or in another specified direction, while the harness 476 is hooked onto some or all of the hooks 507 as necessary. The hooks 507 are configured in a claw or hook shape with appropriate elasticity, making it difficult for the harness 476 to come off.

In this way, by providing the harness receiving stand 399 on the lower rear side of the display means mounting section 453 and arranging the harness 476 on the back side of this harness receiving stand 399, it is possible to prevent entanglement of the image display means 393 and the harness 476 even when inserting and removing the image display means 393 into and from the display means mounting section 453. In addition, by arranging the harness receiving stand 399 close to the back side of the image display means 393, this harness receiving stand 399 can also be used to guide the image display means 393.

As shown in FIG. 72, the second board mounting base 392 is attached to the back of the game board 313 so as to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391 including the harness receiving base 399. This second board mounting base 392 has a rear wall portion 508 located on the back side of the harness receiving base 399, side wall portions 509 fixed to the game board 313 on both the left and right sides of the lower part of the mounting frame 391, and a bottom wall portion 511 in which a ball discharge port 510 is formed and which is fixed to the game board 313 below the mounting frame 391.

The second board mounting base 392 has a rear wall 508 that defines an opening 512 corresponding to the rear side of the harness wired on the rear side of the harness receiving base 399, and a main control board case 513 that houses the main control board 354 is removably attached to the rear side of the rear wall 508 so as to cover the opening 512 from the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 83, the main control board case 513 is constructed by connecting a front case 513a and a rear case 513b so that they can be opened and closed in the front-rear direction. This main control board case 513 is arranged horizontally adjacent to the underside of the performance control board case 495, and is removably attached to the second board mounting base 392 by engagement means 514, 515 on both the left and right sides.

The frame-side joint part 369 and the board-side joint part 370 are configured in a roughly L-shape when viewed from the front as shown in Figures 66, 69, 71, and 72, with the frame-side joint part 369 facing forward at the lower part on the side farther from the hinges 303, 307 of the front frame 302, and the board-side joint part 370 facing backward at the lower part on the side farther from the hinges 303, 307 of the game board 313, so that they face each other in the front-to-rear direction.

As shown in Figures 66 and 69, the frame side joint section 369 includes a joint support section 519 that bends inward from the rear end of the side wall section 319, a joint reinforcement section 520 that bends inward from the rear end of the side wall reinforcement member 368 to reinforce the joint support section 519 from the back side, a frame side mounting plate 521 that is disposed in front of the joint support section 519, and first to third frame side connectors 525 to 527 that are attached to the frame side mounting plate 521 facing forward.

The frame side mounting plate 521 has a first frame side mounting part 522 arranged in the vertical direction and second and third frame side mounting parts 523, 524 arranged in the left-right direction, with the first frame side connector 525 attached to the first frame side mounting part 522 facing forward, and the second and third frame side connectors 526, 527 attached to the second and third frame side mounting parts 523, 524 facing forward, respectively. The first to third frame side connectors 525-527 are supported in a floating manner via mounting fixtures 528 on both ends.

As shown in Figures 66, 71, and 72, the panel-side joint 370 is disposed in the lower corner of the rear wall 508 of the second board mounting base 392, facing the frame-side joint 369, and has a first panel-side mounting part 530 in the vertical direction and second and third panel-side mounting parts 531, 532 in the horizontal direction formed on the rear wall 508, with the first panel-side connector 533 disposed in the first panel-side mounting part 530 and the second and third panel-side connectors 534, 535 disposed in the second and third panel-side mounting parts 531, 532 facing backwards.

The first to third frame side mounting parts 522-524 and the first to third frame side connectors 525-527 are positioned so that the side closer to the rotation center O of the game board 313 is located at the front, while the first to third board side mounting parts 530-532 and the first to third board side connectors 533-535 are positioned so that the side closer to the rotation center O of the game board 313 is located at the front. The first to third frame side connectors 525-527 and the first to third board side connectors 533-535 are configured so that when the game board 313 is rotated with the engagement part 315 side as the rotation center O, the pin insertion/removal parts are connected in the tangential direction around the rotation center O in sequence from the side closer to the rotation center O.

The first to third board side mounting parts 530-532 are arranged on a line that passes approximately through the rotation center O, and the first to third board side connectors 533-535 are attached to the first to third board side mounting parts 530-532 via the first to third board side relay boards 536-538. Therefore, the pin insertion and removal parts of the first to third board side connectors 533-535 are approximately parallel to the first to third board side mounting parts 530-532 and are arranged close to the front side of the first to third board side mounting parts 530-532. The first to third board side relay boards 536-538 are provided with first to third relay connectors 539-541 for connecting the harnesses 476 between each board on the game board 313 side.

The first to third frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint section 369 are configured to correspond to the first to third board-side connectors 533-535 of the board-side joint section 370. The second and third frame-side connectors 526, 527 and the second and third board-side connectors 534, 535 are arranged such that the second frame-side connector 526 and the second board-side connector 534 on the far side from the rotation center O are arranged above the third frame-side connector 527 and the third board-side connector 535 on the closer side. The first to third frame-side connectors 525-527 and the first to third board-side connectors 533-535 may be arranged so that the pin insertion/removal parts are inserted and removed approximately simultaneously, or may be arranged so that the pin insertion/removal parts are inserted and removed sequentially from the side farthest from the rotation center O.

By providing the frame-side joint portion 369 and board-side joint portion 370 in this configuration, when the game board 313 is attached to the game board attachment portion 311, the game board 313 is rotated around the rotation center O, so that the frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 and the board-side connectors 533-535 of the board-side joint portion 370 connect tangentially, allowing the board-side connectors 533-535 to be effortlessly connected to the frame-side connectors 525-527.

That is, one end of the game board 313 is inserted between the abutment portion 314 and engagement portion 315 of the game board mounting portion 311, and the other end of the game board 313 is pressed from the front in the direction of the arrow to rotate the game board 313 around the rotation center O. This connects the frame side connectors 525-527 of the frame side joint portion 369 to the board side connectors 533-535 of the board side joint portion 370 in the tangential direction, so that the board side connectors 533-535 can be smoothly connected to the frame side connectors 525-527.

When mounting the game board 313 on the game board mounting section 311, one end of the game board 313 is inserted between the abutment section 314 and the engagement section 315 of the game board mounting section 311 from the front side of the game board mounting section 311, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 65, and then the other end of the game board 313 is pressed into the main body frame 305. Then, the game board 313 rotates around the rotation center O in the direction of the arrow 313A in FIG. 65, so that the game board 313 can be pushed into the game board mounting section 311.

When the game board 313 rotates in the direction of the arrow 313A, the board-side connectors 533-535 of the board-side joint portion 370 and the frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 approach each other as shown in FIG. 87(b) through the state shown in FIG. 87(a), and the corresponding board-side connectors 533-535 and frame-side connectors 525-527 connect in the tangential direction in sequence from the side closest to the rotation center O. Therefore, the board-side connectors 533-535 and the frame-side connectors 525-527 can be connected effortlessly.

In addition, by arranging the multiple frame-side joint parts 369 and board-side joint parts 370 in an L-shape, it is possible to effectively utilize two sides of the corners of the second board mounting base 392 to arrange the board-side joint part 370, for example, on the board-side joint part 370 side. Therefore, even if there are multiple frame-side connectors 525-527 and board-side connectors 533-535, the frame-side joint parts 369 and board-side joint parts 370 can be efficiently arranged by effectively utilizing the small space on the two sides.

As shown in Figures 70, 73 to 75, within the mounting frame 391, first and second movable performance means 394, 395 are arranged above and below the front side of the image display means 393, and third and fourth movable performance means 396, 397 are arranged on the left and right sides of the front side of the image display means 393.

As shown in Figures 70, 73 to 75, the first movable performance means 394 comprises a first movable performance body 546 and a first driving means 547 for driving the first movable performance body 546 in the vertical direction, and can be moved in the vertical direction between an upper position on the upper front side of the image display means 393 and a lower position on the lower front side while maintaining a substantially horizontal state by driving the first driving means 547. The first driving means 547 also serves as a support mechanism for supporting the first movable performance body 546.

The first movable performance body 546 comprises a support body 548 arranged horizontally at the upper front side of the image display means 393, and a decorative body 549 attached to the front side of this support body 548, and both left and right ends of the support body 548 are supported by a pair of first drive means 547 arranged on the left and right sides of the image display means 393 via a first drive connector 550 so that they can move up and down.

The first driving means 547 is supported by the mounting frame 391 via a vertically long support member 551. The first driving means 547 includes an elongated cylindrical lift guide 552 that is arranged vertically along the outer edge of the image display means 393 from both the upper and lower ends and that guides the first driving connector 550 in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 553 arranged near the lower end of the lift guide 552, a driven pulley 554 arranged near the upper end of the lift guide 552, a drive source 555 such as a stepping motor that rotates the drive pulley 553, and an endless timing belt 556 that is wound around the drive pulley 553 and the driven pulley 554 and has the first driving connector 550 fixed to a predetermined location in the circumferential direction.

The end of the first movable performance body 546 is rotatably connected to the first drive connector 550 by a pivot 557 in the front-to-rear direction. A long hole 558 is formed on one end of the first movable performance body 546, through which the pivot 557 is inserted so as to be able to slide freely in the left-to-right direction. Therefore, the first movable performance body 546 can also tilt diagonally within the range in which the pivot 557 slides within the long hole 558.

The decorative body 549 employs a three-dimensional decoration based on an airplane motif, and has a fuselage section 559 and wings 560 extending from the fuselage section 559 on both the left and right sides. The tip of the fuselage section 559 of the decorative body 549 is positioned so that it protrudes into the display window 418 of the central display frame 388. The tip of the wing section 560 is positioned in front of the decorative members 424 on the left and right sides of the central display frame 388.

The wing portion 560, which is part of the decorative body 549, constitutes a front portion that is positioned in front of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388, and the other portions, excluding the body portion 559, etc., constitute a rear portion that is positioned behind the decorative member 424. Therefore, by arranging the decorative body 549 on both the front and rear sides of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388 in this manner, it is possible to sufficiently secure an area for the placement of the first movable performance means 394.

In addition, the spacing between the left and right decorative members 424 of the central display frame 388 is different at the top and bottom, and the decorative body 549 can pass in the front-to-back direction relative to the left and right decorative members 424 at the wider spacing position. For example, in this embodiment, since the spacing between the left and right decorative members 424 is wider at the bottom, when assembling the first movable performance means 394 to the mounting frame 391, the first movable performance body 546 is moved to the lower side of the decorative member 424, and the wing portion 560 of the decorative body 549 is positioned in front of the decorative member 424.

An LED board 542 is provided on the inside of both the left and right side walls of the mounting frame 391 to illuminate the first movable performance body 546 of the first movable performance means 394, particularly the decorative body 549. The LED board 542 is equipped with multiple LEDs 543 in the vertical direction corresponding to the movement range of the first movable performance body 546, and the LEDs 543 are illuminated to illuminate the decorative body 549 during a specified movable performance.

The decorative body 549 may have a motif other than an airplane, and when it moves left and right, it may be assembled in a state where the decorative body 549 is moved to a position where it is removed from the decorative member 424 inward. The decorative body 549 may move between the front side of the decorative member 424 and a position where it is removed from the front side of the decorative member 424, and may move linearly in the up and down or left and right directions, as well as rotate or swing. It may also be removed from the front side of the decorative member 424 by elastic deformation. Furthermore, at least a part of the first movable performance means 394 may be arranged in front of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388, and the other main parts may be arranged on the back side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388.

As shown in Figures 70, 73 to 75, the second movable performance means 395 comprises a second movable performance body 562 and a second driving means 564 that is supported by a support member 563 fixed to the mounting frame 391 and drives the second movable performance body 562 in the vertical direction, and the second movable performance body 562 can be moved between a lower position on the lower front side of the image display means 393 and an upper position on the front side of the upper and lower middle parts while maintaining a substantially horizontal state by being driven by the second driving means 564. The second driving means 564 also serves as a support mechanism that supports the second movable performance body 562.

The second driving means 564 is disposed on the rear side of the first driving means 547 and in front of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, and includes an elongated cylindrical lift guide 566 that is disposed vertically along the side edge of the image display means 393 at the lower side thereof and guides the second driving connector 565 in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 567 disposed near the upper end side of the lift guide 566, a driven pulley 568 disposed near the lower end side of the lift guide 566, a drive source 569 such as a stepping motor that rotates the drive pulley 567, and an endless timing belt 570 that is wound around the drive pulley 567 and the driven pulley 568 and has the second driving connector 565 fixed to a predetermined location in the circumferential direction.

The driving source 569 is fixed to the back side of the support member 563, and its rear end is disposed within the bulge 454 of the mounting frame 391. Of course, in this case, the driving source 569, which is part of the second driving means 564, is disposed within the bulge 454, but at least a part of the second movable performance means 395, for example the support mechanism of the second movable performance means 395 and/or at least a part of the second driving means 564, may be incorporated within the bulge 454.

By incorporating the game components, which are the internal mechanism arranged inside the mounting frame 391, into the bulge 454 in this way, even when the first movable performance means 394 and the second movable performance means 395 are arranged in front of the image display means 393, there is no need to ensure a large gap between the game board 313 and the image display means 393, and the image display means 393 can be arranged close to the game board 313.

The end of the second movable performance body 562 is rotatably connected to the second drive connector 565 by a pivot 571 in the front-to-rear direction. In addition, a long hole 572 is formed on one end side of the first movable performance body 546, through which the pivot 571 is inserted so as to be able to slide freely in the left-to-right direction. Therefore, the second movable performance body 562 can also tilt diagonally within the range in which the pivot 571 slides within the long hole 572.

The first movable performance body 546 and the second movable performance body 562 are arranged one above the other, but the movement path of the first movable performance body 546 and the movement path of the second movable performance body 562 are arranged to be offset in the front-to-back direction. Therefore, the first movable performance body 546 and the second movable performance body 562 can move freely in the vertical direction without interfering with each other.

The third and fourth movable performance means 396, 397 are arranged symmetrically to correspond to the left and right sides of the image display means 393, as shown in Figures 70, 73 to 75, and comprise a vertically elongated movable performance body 574 and a driving means 575 for driving the movable performance body 574 in the left and right direction, and can be moved between an external position on the outside in the left and right direction relative to the image display means 393 and an internal position on the inside in the left and right direction by the driving means 575. The driving means 575 also serves as a support mechanism for supporting the movable performance body 574.

The movable performance body 574 has optional decorations (not shown) on the front side, and is arranged vertically in front of the image display means 393 along the left and right edges of the image display means 393. The drive means 575 is composed of an electromagnetic sliding means including a support part 576 fixed to the inside of the peripheral wall part 447 of the mounting frame 391, and a sliding part 577 that is slidable in the left-right direction relative to the support part 576 and has the movable performance body 574 fixed to the front side. The movable performance body 574 can be moved by the drive means 575 between an external position on the outside in the left-right direction relative to the image display means 393 and an internal position on the inside in the left-right direction.

The movable performance bodies 574 of the third movable performance means 396 and the fourth movable performance means 397 are spaced apart on both the left and right sides, and do not interfere with each other even when they move to their internal positions. In addition, the movement paths of each movable performance body 574 of the third and fourth movable performance means 396, 397 are between the movement path of the first movable performance body 546 and the movement path of the second movable performance body 562, and the movable performance bodies 574 of the third and fourth movable performance means 396, 397 do not interfere with each other when moving.

The first to fourth movable performance means 394 to 397 can be used for the same movable performance as in the first embodiment, and all or part of the first to fourth movable performance means 394 to 397 can be moved as appropriate to narrow or expand the image display area 579 of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393.

For example, during normal play, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the first to fourth movable presentation means 394-397 restrict the display screen 578, allowing play to be played in a narrow image display area 579. However, in the case of a particular game state such as a reach that is advantageous to the player, or a game state that is a precursor to such a game state, as shown in FIG. 88(b), the first to fourth movable presentation means 394-397 can be moved back to the outside of the display screen 578, expanding it to cover the entire area of the display screen 578, allowing play to be played in a wide image display area 579.

There are two methods for limiting the image display area 579: a first method in which one or both of the top and bottom first and second movable performance means 394, 395 are moved toward the center of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 to limit the vertical width of the image display area 579, and a second method in which one or both of the left and right third and fourth movable performance means 396, 397 are moved toward the center of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 to limit the horizontal width of the image display area 579. There is also a method in which the first and second methods are combined to limit the vertical and horizontal widths of the image display area 579. The expansion and contraction of the vertical and/or horizontal widths of the display area may be repeated intermittently multiple times using all or part of the first to fourth movable performance means 394 to 397.

Figures 90 to 107 show a fourth embodiment of the present invention, which illustrates a horizontal insertion/removal type in which the image display means 393 can be inserted and removed horizontally into the display means mounting portion 453 on the back side of the game board 313.

The game board 313 has a mounting frame 391 on the back side as shown in Figures 90 to 92. On the back side of this mounting frame 391, there are attached an image display means 393 such as a liquid crystal type that corresponds to the central display frame 388 on the front side of the game board 313, an LED connection board 353 to which an LED (not shown) for light emission on the front side of the front frame 302 is connected, a harness receiving base 399 that receives the harness arranged on the back side, and a relay board 352 that relays each harness.

On the back side of the image display means 393, there are attached a performance control board case 495 that houses the performance control board 345, and a power supply module board case 506 that houses the power supply module board 346, and a harness receiving stand 399 is provided on the underside of the performance control board case 495.

As shown in Figures 93 to 98, the mounting frame 391 has a rear wall 446 formed approximately parallel to the game board 313 and with a rectangular opening 455 formed approximately in the center, and a peripheral wall 447 extending forward from the outer edge of the rear wall 446 to the back of the game board 313, and the front end of the peripheral wall 447 is fixed to the back side of the game board 313 by fasteners 586 such as screws or nails.

As shown in FIG. 93, on the back side of the rear wall 446 of the mounting frame 391, there is a display means mounting section 453 that allows the image display means 393 to be inserted and removed in the left-right direction along the game board 313, and a side board mounting base 467 that is disposed vertically and protrudes rearward from the image display means 393 on one of the left and right ends of the display means mounting section 453, and has an LED connection board 353 removably mounted thereon.

As shown in FIG. 99, the image display means 393 is configured by housing a rectangular image display panel 481, such as a liquid crystal type, in a housing case 482. The image display means 393 can be inserted and removed from the display means mounting section 453 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) through an insertion and removal section 462 that is provided in an open manner on the left-right opposite side of the side board mounting base 467 of the display means mounting section 453, and is fixed in a predetermined mounting position by fixing means 584, 585 at both left and right ends.

The storage case 482 is flat in the front-rear direction, and as shown in Figures 94 to 99, the image display panel 481 is removably housed in it from the open front side, and the image display panel 481 is removably held in place by fasteners 586 such as screws that are inserted through the peripheral wall 484 from both the left and right sides and abut the sides of the image display panel 481. The storage case 482 has an upper rear wall 493 and a lower rear wall 494, and the upper rear wall 493 is provided with reinforcing ribs 587 and reinforcing protrusions 588 with a U-shaped cross section in predetermined directions such as the vertical and horizontal directions to ensure the strength of the storage case 482.

As shown in FIG. 99, a small gap s is provided in the front-rear direction between the front end faces of the reinforcing ribs 587, reinforcing protrusions 588, etc. on the upper and lower rear wall portions 493, 494 of the storage case 482 and the back surface of the image display panel 481. Therefore, even if one or both of the upper and lower rear wall portions 493, 494 of the storage case 482 are pressed toward the image display panel 481 when the image display means 393 is handled alone, the upper and lower rear wall portions 493, 494 of the storage case 482 are only slightly deformed toward the image display panel 481 within the range of the gap s between the reinforcing ribs 587, reinforcing protrusions 588, etc. and the image display panel 481, and the image display panel 481 is not immediately deformed or damaged due to the deformation of the upper and lower rear wall portions 493, 494 of the storage case 482.

As shown in Figures 90 to 92, the fixing means 584, 585 are provided in a plurality of sets in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the image display means 393. As shown in Figure 98, each fixing means 584, 585 has mounting parts 589, 590 that protrude in the horizontal direction from the storage case 482, mounting holes 591, 592 provided in the display means mounting part 453 corresponding to the mounting parts 589, 590, and fasteners 593, 594 such as screws that pass from the mounting parts 589, 590 to the mounting holes 591, 592.

The mounting hole 591 of the fixing means 584 on the tip side of the image display means 393 is provided in a notch 596 of a protruding wall 595 that protrudes rearward from the rear wall 446. The notch 596 is formed to correspond to the mounting portion 589, and the mounting portion 589 can be freely inserted and removed laterally into the notch 596. Therefore, the notch 596 functions as a positioning portion, and constitutes a positioning means for positioning the storage case 482 between itself and the mounting portion 589 on the storage case 482 side.

A sloping guide portion 598 is provided on the tip side of the mounting portion 589, and a guide portion 599 is provided on the protruding wall 595 corresponding to the cutout portion 596. These guide portions 598, 599 guide the mounting portion 589 to the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595. The guide portions 598, 599 are composed of sloping portions, but may also be arc surfaces, etc.

As in the third embodiment, a performance control board case 495 that houses the performance control board 345 and a power supply module board case 506 that houses the power supply module board 346 are detachably arranged on the back side of the upper rear wall portion 493 of the storage case 482. The performance control board case 495 is elongated in the left-right direction, and the power supply module board case 506 is arranged on the upper side.

As shown in FIG. 90, the performance control board case 495 is removably attached to the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 493 by the fixed engagement portion 499, the abutment portion 500, the fastener 501, and the engagement claw 502 with respect to the storage case 482 of the image display means 393. The fixed engagement portion 499 and the abutment portion 500 protrude rearward from the storage case 482 with a gap of the performance control board case 495, and the engagement protrusion 503 of the performance control board case 495 engages with the fixed engagement portion 499 in a releasable manner, and the abutment portion 500 sandwiches the performance control board case 495 in the left-right direction between the fixed engagement portion 499 and the fixed engagement portion 499.

The fastener 501 is supported by a pivot 505 so as to be freely rotatable on the abutment portion 500, and is adapted to be operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the performance control board case 495 to the upper rear wall portion 493. The engagement claw 502 protrudes from the rear side of the storage case 482 and is positioned above the abutment portion 500, and engages with the performance control board case 495 so as to be freely engaged and disengaged.

As shown in Figures 91-92 and 100-103, a harness receiving stand 399 is provided on the underside of the performance control board case 495 on the back side of the lower rear wall 494 of the storage case 482. This harness receiving stand 399 is formed by the lower rear wall 494 of the storage case 482 itself, and various harnesses 600 such as flat harnesses that connect the performance control board 345 and the movable performance means (not shown) are arranged in a predetermined direction and are secured by fasteners 601.

The back side of the lower rear wall 494 of the storage case 482 that constitutes the harness receiving stand 399 has multiple recessed mounting parts 602, and each mounting part 602 has multiple mounting holes 603 arranged vertically and horizontally.

The mounting part 602 has a vertical part 602a that is long in the up-down direction and a horizontal part 602b that is long in the left-right direction, and multiple pairs of mounting holes 603 for the fastener 601 are provided in the vertical and horizontal parts 602a, 602b of the mounting part 602. By attaching the fastener 601 using any of the mounting holes 603, the attachment position of the fastener 601 can be freely changed in the up-down direction and left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 103, the stopper (stopper portion) 601 has a base portion 604, a pressing portion 605 formed integrally with one end of the base portion 604, and a locking means 606 that locks the other end of the pressing portion 605 to the other end of the base portion 604 in a freely detachable manner, and the harness 600 is sandwiched between the base portion 604 and the pressing portion 605, and the other end of the pressing portion 605 is locked to the other end of the base portion 604 by the locking means 606. The locking means 606 has a locking portion 607 on the base portion 604 side and a locked portion 608 on the pressing portion 605 side, and the locking portion 607 and the locked portion 608 are capable of being engaged and disengaged.

The base 604 has a thickness approximately equal to the recess depth of the mounting portion 602, and is provided with two (or more) mounting protrusions 609 that can be inserted into the mounting hole 603, and the mounting protrusions 609 are inserted into the mounting hole 603 to removably attach the stopper 601. The stopper (stopper portion) 601 may be provided integrally with the harness receiving base 399.

One end of the harness 600 is connected to the performance control board 345. The other end of the harness 600 is led from the side of the storage case 482 through the side of the mounting frame 391 to the inside of the mounting frame 391, as shown in Figures 101 and 102, and is connected to the movable performance means 394 to 397 inside the mounting frame 391. The middle of the harness 600 is pressed along the side of the peripheral wall portion 447 of the mounting frame 391 by a pressing member 638. The pressing member 638 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by a fixing device 637 such as a screw.

By providing multiple sets of mounting holes 603 in the mounting portion 602 of the storage case 482 in this way, it is possible to place the stoppers 601 at required locations depending on the wiring position, wiring direction, etc. of the harness 600, and it is possible to freely respond to changes in the wiring of the harness 600 and other changes. In addition, by placing the stoppers 601 on the mounting portion 572, which is recessed, the amount of rearward protrusion of the base 604 of the stopper 601 can be reduced. As a result, the harness 600 can be placed along the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482.

As shown in Figures 93 to 98 and 106, the display means mounting section 453 includes a receiving section 460 that is provided on the outer periphery of the opening 455 and receives the image display means 393 from the front side, and guide ridges 610 that are provided on both the top and bottom of the receiving section 460 and guide both the top and bottom of the image display means 393 in the lateral insertion/removal direction, with the other end opposite the side board mounting base 467 located on one of the left and right ends forming the insertion/removal section 462. The upper guide ridges 610 are formed in a rib shape, and the lower guide ridges 610 are formed in a U-shaped cross section, but the upper and lower guide ridges 610 may have approximately the same structure.

The receiving portion 460 and the guide protrusion 610 form a pair of upper and lower guide rails 611 that guide the image display means 393 in the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the opening 455. The guide rail 611 has a front rail portion 613 that is formed by the receiving portion 460 and guides the sliding portion including the tip sliding portion 612 of the storage case 482, and an outer rail portion 614 that protrudes from the outside of the front rail portion 613 to the back side and guides both the upper and lower sides of the storage case 482 from the outside. The tip sliding portion 612 is provided at both the upper and lower ends of the insertion end side of the storage case 482 and protrudes from the peripheral wall portion 484 of the storage case 482 to the tip side.

As shown in Figures 106 and 107, the removable portion 462 is disposed on the rear side of the other end of the display means mounting portion 453. This removable portion 462 only needs to be able to tilt the image display means 393 diagonally from the rear side relative to the guide rail 611 at the other end of the display means mounting portion 453 and to abut the tip sliding portion 612 against the front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611 in this state. Therefore, the removable portion 462 is provided in a predetermined range on the other end of the display means mounting portion 453.

The front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611 has a cut-out insertion portion 615 that corresponds to the front side of the side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353, and is configured so that when the image display means 393 is tilted diagonally from the insertion/removal portion 462 side relative to the guide rail 611, the tip sliding portion 612 side of the image display means 393 enters the insertion portion 615 and intersects with the front rail portion 613.

As shown in Figures 96 and 104, the upper guide rail 611 is provided with a restricting portion 616 against which the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 abuts when the tip sliding portion 612 enters the insertion portion 615, and a fulcrum portion 617 that serves as a fulcrum when the rear end side of the image display means 393 is rotated toward the front rail portion 613 while the tip sliding portion 612 is abutted against the restricting portion 616 and restricted.

The tip sliding portion 612 and the restricting portion 616 have guide portions 618 and 619 that relatively guide the tip sliding portion 612 so that it rises when the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum portion 617 so that the rear end approaches the front rail portion 613.

The edge of the side board mounting base 467 on the side of the insertion/removal section 462 serves as an abutment section 620 against which the insertion end side or the vicinity of the insertion end side of the image display means 393 abuts when the image display means 393 in an inclined position is moved along the guide rail 611 toward the mounting position side.

The lower guide rail 611 has a fulcrum portion 617, but does not have a restricting portion 616. However, the lower guide rail 611 may be configured in the same manner as the upper guide rail 611. Therefore, it is sufficient that the restricting portion 616 is provided on at least one of the upper and lower guide rails 611.

The mounting portion 572 of the storage case 482 protrudes further than the tip sliding portion 612. However, while the tip sliding portion 612 corresponds to the front rail portion 613, the mounting portion 572 corresponds to the opening 455. Therefore, even when the tip sliding portion 612 abuts against the restricting portion 616, the mounting portion 572 does not interfere with other members.

As shown in Figures 90, 92, 96 and 105, the display means mounting section 453 is provided with pushing means (movement assisting means) 623 on both the upper and lower sides corresponding to the rear end side of the image display means 393. This pushing means 623 is for pushing the rear end of the image display means 393 in the direction of the arrow 613A along the front rail portion 613 to a predetermined mounting position (assisting the movement of the image display means 393 in the direction of the arrow 613A) when the rear end side of the image display means 393 is rotated in the direction of the arrow 617A toward the front rail portion 613 around the fulcrum portion 617 in FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 follows the front rail portion 613. It has a pressed portion 624 provided at the rear end of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393, and a pressing guide portion 625 formed in an inclined shape on the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 and pressing and guiding the storage case 482 to the mounting position when the pressed portion 624 abuts.

The pushing means 623 are provided on both the top and bottom of the display means mounting section 453 in correspondence with the front rail section 613, and are adapted to push both the top and bottom ends of the storage case 482. The rear wall section 446 of the mounting frame 391 is provided with a reinforcing section 626 that is bent into a U-shape in cross section in correspondence with the pushing guide section 625. This reinforcing section 626 may be provided along the entire length of the opening 455 in the vertical direction along the edge of the opening.

The pressed portion 624 is provided in an angular shape on the side of the storage case 482, and the pressing guide portion 625 is fixed in an inclined manner on the side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, but the configuration may be reversed, and both the pressed portion 624 and the pressing guide portion 625 may be configured in an inclined or curved shape.

The pushing means 623 may be located at the end opposite the direction of movement of the image display means 393 to the mounting position of the display means mounting section 453, i.e., at the end opposite the side board mounting base 467 with respect to the opening 455, and may be located in one or more positions in the vertical direction, such as at the middle or center in the vertical direction in addition to at both the top and bottom. The pressing guide section 625 may also be configured with a rotating body that rotates around a vertical axis.

As shown in Figures 96 and 97, the front rail portion 613 is provided with a ride-up portion 627 on the pushing means 623 side of the insertion portion 615. The storage case 482 for the image display means 393 is provided with a storage recess 628 into which the ride-up portion 627 fits when the image display means 393 is in a predetermined mounting position.

When the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum 617 in the direction of the arrow 617A in FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 runs along the front rail portion 613, the front surface of the storage case 482 comes into contact with the riding portion 627, and the tip sliding portion 612 side of the storage case 482 is lifted around the riding portion 627 in the direction of the arrow 627A in FIG. 104, and is removed upward from the restricting portion 616.

The storage recesses 628 are formed as recesses in the front surface at both the upper and lower ends of the storage case 482, and the riding portion 627 is adapted to fit in when the image display means 393 is located at a predetermined mounting position. The riding portion 627 is formed with an inclination on the pressing guide portion 625 side so that the tip sliding portion 612 of the storage case 482 can slide easily. The lower guide rail 611 has a notch 639 in the front rail portion 613, but the notch 639 is not necessary.

When mounting the image display means 393 to the display means mounting section 453, for example, the game board 313 is turned over so that the front side of the game board 313 is on the bottom and the mounting frame 391 is on the top, and in this state, the procedure is carried out as shown in Figures 107 (a) to (c).

First, on the side of the insertion/removal section 462, the image display means 393 is placed in an inclined state inclined diagonally relative to the front rail section 613 of the pair of guide rails 611 as shown in FIG. 107(a), and the tip sliding section 612 on the tip side is brought into contact with the guide rail 611. Next, the tip sliding section 612 is slid in the direction of arrow 613A along the front rail section 613, and moved to the mounting position below the side board mounting base 467 as shown in FIG. 107(b).

At this time, when the image display means 393 abuts against the abutment portion 620 of the side board mounting base 467, the tip side of the image display means 393 is inserted under the side board mounting base 467 while tilting the image display means 393 around the tip sliding portion 612 so as to follow the guide rail 611 as necessary.

When the image display means 393 is moving in an inclined state to the mounting position and its tip sliding portion 612 enters the underside of the side board mounting base 467 and corresponds to the insertion portion 615, as shown in FIG. 107(c), the tip side of the image display means 393 including the tip sliding portion 612 enters the insertion portion 615, and the tip of the tip sliding portion 612 abuts against the restricting portion 616.

Therefore, even though the side circuit board mounting base 467 is located on the back side of the display means mounting portion 453 so as to be close to the back side of the image display means 393 in the installed state, the tip side of the image display means 393 can be inserted far below the side circuit board mounting base 467.

When the image display means 393 is at a large inclination angle, the image display means 393 abuts against the abutment portion 620 when it approaches the side board mounting base 467. Therefore, when the image display means 393 abuts against the abutment portion 620, the image display means 393 is tilted so that the anti-insertion end of the image display means 393 approaches the guide rail 611. This allows the image display means 393 to be inserted into the insertion portion 615 at a predetermined angle.

Next, when the end opposite to the insertion of the image display means 393 is pressed toward the guide rail 611, the image display means 393 rotates around the fulcrum 617 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, and is aligned with the front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611. At this time, the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 is guided by the restricting portion 616 as it rotates around the fulcrum 617 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, and disengages from the restricting portion 616.

When the opposite end of the image display means 393 approaches the front rail portion 613, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 105, the pressed portion 624 on the opposite end of the image display means 393 comes into contact with the pressing guide portion 625 on the mounting frame 391 side, and guides the pressed portion 624 in the pushing direction in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A along the inclination of the pressing guide portion 625. This allows the image display means 393 to be pressed in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A in FIG. 107 along the guide rail 611 to a specified mounting position.

Therefore, by placing the image display means 393 at an angle between the upper and lower guide rails 611 and sliding the tip sliding portion 612 along the guide rails 611 while tilting the image display means 393 between the guide rails 611 so that the rear end side of the image display means 393 is placed on the guide rails 611, the image display means 393 can be easily and reliably guided along the guide rails 611 to the specified mounting position.

When the image display means 393 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, the front surface of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393 abuts against the lift-up portion 627 before the pushing means 623 pushes the image display means 393 on the guide rail 611 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A to the mounting position. This causes the tip side of the image display means 393 to be slightly raised, and in this state the image display means 393 slides in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A to the mounting position.

In addition, there are guide portions 598, 599 between the mounting portion 589 and the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595, and the mounting portion 589 is guided to the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595 via these guide portions 598, 599. Therefore, even though the mounting portion 589 protrudes from the tip side of the image display means 393, the mounting portion 589 can be easily inserted into the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595.

When the image display means 393 moves to the specified mounting position, the riding portion 627 corresponds to the storage recess 628, so that the front surface of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393 abuts against the receiving portion 460 including the front rail portion 613. After that, by fixing the image display means 393 to the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 by the multiple fixing means 584, 585 on both the left and right sides of the image display means 393, the image display means 393 can be attached as shown in FIG. 98.

When removing the image display means 393 from the display means mounting section 453, the procedure is reversed. First, the image display means 393 is released from its fixing means 584, 585, and then the image display means 393 is moved in the removal direction by placing fingers on the performance control board case 495 attached to the back side of the image display means 393 or other suitable locations. Then, the pressed portion 624 of the image display means 393 slides along the inclined surface of the pressing guide portion 625, and the rear end side of the image display means 393 lifts up from the front rail portion 613, so that the rear end side of the image display means 393 can be grasped with fingers. This allows the image display means 393 to be easily removed from the display means mounting section 453.

When mounting the image display means 393, it is also possible to slide the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 in contact with the front rail portion 613 while inserting the tip side below the side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353. In this case, therefore, the insertion portion 615, the restriction portion 616, the fulcrum portion 617, etc. of the guide rail 611 can be omitted.

The side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353 is arranged vertically with a gap between it and the front rail portion 613 of the display means mounting portion 453 that is large enough to accommodate the image display means 393, and is detachably fixed from the back side to the upper support base 629 and the lower support base 630 that are arranged on either side of the opening 455 of the display means mounting portion 453, as shown in Figures 90, 91, and 93.

The upper support base 629 has a number of bases 631, 632 that protrude rearward from the rear wall 446 of the mounting frame 391 above the opening 455, and a mounting portion 633 that bends from the rear ends of the bases 631, 632 toward the opening 455. Of the multiple bases 631, 632, one base 631 is arranged in the left-right direction above the opening 455, and the other base 632 is arranged in the up-down direction at the end of the opening 455, with an opening 634 formed therebetween. A restricting portion 616 is formed corresponding to this opening 634, and the upper tip sliding portion 612 of the storage case 482 protrudes.

The lower support base 630 has a number of bases 635 that protrude rearward from the rear wall 446 of the mounting frame 391 at the lower side of the opening 455, and a mounting portion 636 that bends upward from the rear end of the bases 635 toward the opening 455, and is configured in an L-shape. The side board mounting base 467 is detachably attached to the mounting portions 633, 636 of the upper and lower support bases 629, 630 from the backside with fasteners 640, 641 such as screws. The LED connection board 353 is detachably attached to the backside of the side board mounting base 467, as in the third embodiment.

When providing the side board mounting base 467 in this way in correspondence with the opening 455 for the display means mounting portion 453 of the mounting frame 391, it is also possible to provide it integrally with the mounting frame 391. However, by providing support bases 629, 630, each having bases 631, 632 and mounting portions 633, 636 that bend from their rear ends toward the opening 455 side, on the top and bottom, and attaching the side board mounting base 467 to these support bases 629, 630, the support bases 629, 630 and the side board mounting base 467 can be constructed to be strong, thereby improving the durability of the mounting frame 391 including the display means mounting portion 453.

The LED connection board 353 is attached to the side board mounting base 467 as in the third embodiment, but an intermediate board other than the LED connection board 353 or other boards may be used. The side board mounting base 467 may also be provided integrally with the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391.

In the fourth embodiment, the image display means 393 is first tilted obliquely from the insertion/removal section 462 side relative to the guide rail 611, and then in this state, the tip sliding section 612 is slid left and right along the guide rail 611 while the rear end side of the image display means 393 is tilted toward the guide rail 611 side with the tip sliding section 612 as a fulcrum, so that the image display means 393 is slid left and right to be attached, but it may also be slid up and down to be attached. The other configurations are the same as those of the third embodiment.

Although the third and fourth embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to the third and fourth embodiments, and various modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a game board 313 detachably mounted on the support frames 301 and 302 and an image display means 393 mounted on a display means mounting section 453 on the back side of the game board 313, the image display means 393 may be removable from one of the insertion and removal sections 462 in the vertical direction (for example, the upper insertion and removal section 462 side shown in the third embodiment), or from one side in the horizontal direction (for example, the left or right side in the horizontal direction shown in the fourth embodiment). In the former case, the frame side members on the support frame 302 side arranged on the insertion and removal section 462 side of the image display means 393 are the ball tank 347, ball guide rail 348, external information retrieval means 349, etc., while in the latter case, the ball payout means 350, etc. are considered. Of course, other frame side members may be used.

In the case of a gaming machine having a display means mounting section 453 on the mounting frame 391 on the rear side of the gaming board 313, and an image display means 393 that can be detached from the display means mounting section 453, in the third embodiment, bulging sections 454 that bulge rearward from the mounting frame 391 and guide the image display means 393 in the detachment direction are provided on both sides of the display means mounting section 453 in a direction that intersects with the detachment direction (up-down or left-right direction) of the image display means 393, and the gaming parts in the mounting frame 391 are arranged within the bulging sections 454, but the bulging sections 454 may be provided on one side of the direction that intersects with the detachment direction (up-down or left-right direction) of the image display means 393.

In addition, the internal mechanism within the mounting frame 391 includes movable performance means 394-397 in the mounting frame 391 in front of the image display means 393, and it is possible to arrange part of the mechanism of the movable performance means 394-397 within the bulge 454, but other mechanisms are also possible. The bulge 454 may be the full length of the guide rail 611 or more, or it may be only a part of it. The movable performance means 394-397 may be any other than those exemplified in the third embodiment as long as they include movable performance bodies 546, 562, 574 arranged in front of the image display means 393, a support mechanism that movably supports the movable performance bodies 546, 562, 574, and drive means 547, 564, 575 that drive the movable performance bodies 546, 562, 574. In that case, at least a part of the support mechanism and/or drive means 547, 564, 575 may be arranged within the bulge 454.

The mis-attachment prevention means 516 for preventing the image display means 393 from being erroneously attached to the display means attachment section 453 is sufficient if it is provided with a first member 499 provided on the image display means 393 side and a second member 467 provided on the display means attachment section 453 side and interferes with the first member 499 in the event of mis-attachment, and as exemplified in the third embodiment, it is possible to use various other means in addition to a combination of an engagement section (fixing device) for fixing the performance control board case 495 and a side board mounting base 467. The mis-attachment prevention means 516 may be a dedicated means, or may share some components.

When the image display means 393 is attached to the display means mounting portion 453 of the mounting frame 391 so as to be freely insertable and detachable from the insertion/detachment portion 462 side, it is desirable to provide a pressing member that presses the image display means 393 from the back side at the insertion end side of the image display means 393, but this pressing member may be a dedicated member or may also be another fixed member fixed to the mounting frame 391. In that case, the mounting frame 391 may be provided with a protruding member that protrudes to the back side of the image display means 393, and this protruding member may also be used as a back side pressing member. In the embodiment, the side board mounting base 467 is exemplified as the protruding member, and a board is placed on the back side of this side board mounting base 467, but something other than the side board mounting base 467 may be used.

When the image display means 393 and the movable presentation means 394 are used together, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the movable presentation means 394 is located forward of the image display means 393. In addition, the center case 388, which is attached from the front side to approximately the center of the game board 313, may be provided with a front member 426 that is located in front of the game board 313 and forms the game area 323 where game balls flow down to the outer periphery, and a rear member 427 that is located behind the front member 426 and on the outer periphery of the image display means 393, either integrally or separately.

By arranging at least a part of the movable performance means 394 in front of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, the arrangement area of the movable performance means 394 can be expanded. In this case, it is desirable for the movable performance means 394 to be configured with a rear side portion arranged on the rear side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, and a front side portion that extends from this rear side portion through the inside of the rear member 427 of the center case 388 and overlaps with the front side.

The LED board may not be provided at the front of the movable performance means 394, but may be provided at the rear of the movable performance means 394. As the LED boards are arranged from the rear to the front in the order of rear section → rear member 427 → front section, it is possible to reflect the light emission performance from the LED board provided at the rear section in the rear member 427 and front section. An LED board may also be provided at the front section. In that case, it is preferable not to provide an LED board at the rear section. Furthermore, if LED boards are provided on both sides, it is preferable to arrange them so that at least a portion of each LED board does not overlap in the front-to-rear direction.

When at least a portion of the front side of the movable performance body 546 is positioned so as to overlap the rear member 427 of the center case 388, a predetermined light-emitting performance may be performed by a light-emitting means provided on at least one of the rear side, the rear member 427, or the front side. Also, when an LED board is attached to a part of the center case 388, a predetermined light-emitting performance may be performed by a light-emitting means provided on the LED board. Also, a predetermined light-emitting performance may be performed by a light-emitting means of an LED board provided on the game board 313 side or the frame side, not limited to the center case 388.

When at least a portion of the front part of the movable performance body 546 is positioned so as to overlap the rear member 427 of the center case 388, a front part movable performance may be performed in which the front part is moved. Also, a rear part movable performance may be performed in which the rear part is moved, or both may be performed.

It is desirable that at least a portion of the rear side of the center case 388 be molded from a transparent or translucent resin material. This makes it possible to visually confirm the rear member 427 disposed at the rear from the front.

It is desirable that at least a portion of the front part of the movable performance means 394 is molded from a transparent or translucent resin material. This makes it possible to see the rear member 427 and the rear part located at the rear from the front.

When the front portion of the movable performance body 546 is positioned at a position overlapping the rear member 427 of the center case 388, it may be configured so that they overlap when the movable performance body 546 is in a movable performance, or it may be configured so that they overlap when the movable performance body 546 is in a non-movable performance (origin position). Here, when they are in a movable performance, it is assumed that the movable performance body 546 is located at a predetermined performance position, and that the movable performance body 546 is moving toward the predetermined performance position. Also, it may be configured so that the entire front portion of the movable performance body 546 overlaps with the rear member 427, or it may be configured so that at least a portion of them overlap.

The part of the center case 388 that overlaps with the front part of the movable performance body 546 may be used as a wall part that forms the rear of the stage 429, or it may be used as a ball bounce prevention part located at the upper rear part of the stage 429.

A specified decorative portion may be provided on the rear member 427 of the center case 388. For example, textual or numerical information may be displayed. Furthermore, by displaying at least a portion of the decorative portion in a position that does not overlap with the front portion of the movable performance body 546, the decorativeness of the rear member 427 can be enhanced without reducing the visibility of the decorative portion.

When the front part of the movable performance body 546 is positioned so as to overlap the rear member 427 of the center case 388, a predetermined performance image may be displayed on the LCD screen in correspondence with the movable performance body 546. Here, the performance image may be, for example, a predetermined effect display corresponding to the reliability (e.g. blue, green, red, gold) showing the expected winning probability of the variable display. In addition, it is preferable that the display mode of the effect display is displayed according to the movable performance body 546, and the display mode may be determined according to, for example, the shape and size of the front part, the driving mode, etc.

The front portion of the movable body 546 is positioned so that it overlaps with the rear member 427 of the center case 388, but it is desirable to leave a predetermined gap between the rear member 427 and the front portion. It is also desirable to leave a predetermined gap between the rear portion and the rear member 427. This makes it possible to prevent interference between the movable body 546 and the center case 388. Furthermore, the shorter the predetermined gap, the more of a sense of unity between part of the movable body 546 and the center case 388 will be created, thereby enhancing the decorativeness.

In addition, a certain distance is provided to prevent interference, but this is not limiting; the movable performance body 546 and the center case 388 may be arranged so that they interfere with each other in order to create a greater sense of unity between them.

The front part of the movable performance body 546 is positioned so as to overlap the rear member 427 of the center case 388, but this is not limited to this, and any part of the game component that is attached to the front side of the game board 313 can be used, and is not limited to the center case 388.

When the movable performance body 546 is positioned at the origin position and configured so that its front portion is positioned in front of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, there is a problem that assembly is difficult when assembling the game board 313, since the movable performance body 546 is attached from the rear side of the game board 313 and the center case 388 is attached from the front side of the game board 313. For example, when attaching the movable performance body 546 to the game board 313 and then attaching the center case 388, assembly must be performed while avoiding the rear member 427 of the center case 388 coming into contact with the front portion of the movable performance body 546. This can make the assembly process more complicated.

Therefore, by configuring the movable performance body 546 to be positioned in a different position during assembly, interference between the two can be prevented and assembly work can be performed easily. Then, during the initialization operation of the movable performance body 546, which is performed after assembly when the power is turned on, etc., the movable performance body 546 can be moved to the origin position of the main body, so that the front part is positioned in front of the rear member 427 of the center case 388.

Generally, the center case 388 can be attached to and detached from the front side of the game board 313, while the movable presentation means 394 can be attached to and detached from the back side of the game board 313. Therefore, the front part of the movable presentation means 394 needs to be movable relative to the rear member 427 so as to be removed inward from the rear member 427. In this case, as long as the front part can move relative to the rear member 427, any type of movement such as swinging movement or linear movement may be adopted, and either one of the front member 426 and the rear member 427 may move relative to the other, or both may move. In addition, the front part of the movable presentation means 394 may be on one or both sides in the left-right direction of the image display means 393, or on one or both sides in the up-down direction. The shape and structure of the front parts of the movable presentation means 394 to 397 are not important.

When inserting and removing the image display means 393 from the insertion/removal section 462 side to a predetermined mounting position of the display means mounting section 453, one end side of the guide rail 611 may be used as the insertion/removal section 462, and the image display means 393 may be moved in the insertion/removal direction from the insertion/removal section 462 along the guide rail 611. However, in this case, the insertion/removal section 462 side of the display means mounting section 453 must be configured to be open, and the moving distance of the image display means 393 during insertion and removal becomes longer.

In contrast, if the image display means 393 is inclined obliquely with respect to the guide rail 611, its tip end abuts against the guide rail 611, and then the image display means 393 is moved along the guide rail 611 to a predetermined mounting position while tilting the image display means 393 toward the guide rail 611 from that inclined position, there is no need to open the insertion/removal section 462 side of the guide rail 611, and the movement distance of the image display means 393 can be shortened. The image display means 393 is inserted and removed along the guide rail 611, but the insertion and removal direction may be vertical or vertical or diagonal when viewed from behind, in addition to horizontal.

When inserting and removing the image display means 393 in an inclined position relative to the guide rail 611, it is desirable to hold the insertion side of the image display means 393 in an inclined position with a holding part and then tilt the image display means 393 toward the guide rail 611, but the holding part may abut the back side of the image display means 393 in an inclined position, or may be a part that the tip side abuts when the image display means 393 reaches a predetermined mounting position. Also, the restricting part 616 that the tip side of the image display means 393 abuts against when the tip side of the image display means 393 is inserted into the insertion part 615 of the guide rail 611 is also one of the holding parts. In the case where the tip side of the image display means 393 abuts against the holding part when it reaches a predetermined mounting position, the insertion part 615 of the guide rail 611 is not necessary.

If the display means mounting section 453 is provided with a guide rail 611 that guides the image display means 393 to the mounting position, and a pushing means 623 that pushes the image display means 393 along the guide rail 611 to the mounting position when the image display means 393 is moved from an inclined position toward the guide rail 611, the image display means 393 can be easily and reliably moved to the mounting position along the guide rail 611. It is preferable to provide this pushing means 623 at the rear end side of the image display means 393 on the opposite side to the direction in which the image display means 393 moves to the mounting position, but it can also be provided midway in the direction in which the image display means 393 moves.

In addition, it is desirable that the pushing means 623 is configured so that when the image display means 393 is moved from the inclined position toward the guide rail 611, the inclined pushing guide portion 625 pushes the pressed portion 624 on the image display means 393 side to guide the image display means 393 to the mounting position, but it is also possible to configure the pressed portion 624 on the image display means 393 side to be inclined, and the pushing guide portion 625 to be rod-shaped, spherical, or other shape that abuts against the pressed portion 624. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to pachinko machines, and can be implemented in other gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and mahjong ball gaming machines in the same way.

61 to 177 illustrate a third embodiment of the present invention. As shown in Figs. 1 and 62, this pachinko machine 300 comprises an outer frame 301 and a front frame 302 arranged in front of the outer frame 301.
The outer frame 301 and the front frame 302 constitute the gaming machine body.

The front frame 302 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 301 via a pair of upper and lower first hinges 303 located on the left end side so that it can be opened, closed, and detached freely, and can be locked in the closed state relative to the outer frame 301 by a locking means 304 provided on the right end side opposite the first hinge 303 in the left-right direction.

The front frame 302 comprises a main frame 305 and a front door 306 arranged in front of the main frame 305. The front door 306 is pivotally attached to the main frame 305 via a pair of upper and lower second hinges 307 arranged on the left end side so that it can be opened, closed, and detached, and can be locked in the closed state relative to the main frame 305 by the locking means 304. The first hinge 303 and the second hinge 307 are arranged so as to be coaxial.

As shown in FIG. 62, the outer frame 301 is formed in a rectangular shape with a pair of left and right vertical frame members 308 and a pair of upper and lower horizontal frame members 309. A synthetic resin front decorative member 310 is attached to the lower horizontal frame member 309 so as to cover the horizontal frame member 309 from the front and connect the front lower parts of the left and right vertical frame members 308. The front decorative member 310 protrudes further forward than the left and right vertical frame members 308, and the main frame 305 is positioned above it.

The main frame 305 is made of synthetic resin and is rectangular in shape so that it can abut the front edge of the outer frame 301 above the front decorative member 310. It is integrally equipped with a game board mounting section 311 that is provided with a rectangular opening on the upper side, and a lower mounting section 312 that is provided below this game board mounting section 311.

As shown in Figures 65 to 68, the game board mounting part 311 allows the game board 313 to be attached and detached from the front side, and this game board mounting part 311 is provided with an abutment part 314 against which the game board 313 abuts from the front side, an engagement part 315 that engages with the game board 313 when one of the left and right ends of the game board 313 is inserted into the game board mounting part 311, and a fixing means 316 for removably fixing the other end side of the game board 313 in the game board mounting part 311 to the main frame 305. Note that the game board mounting part 311 may allow the game board 313 to be attached and detached from the back side.

When mounting the game board 313 on the game board mounting part 311, one end of the game board 313 is inserted between the abutment part 314 and the engagement part 315 of the game board mounting part 311 from the front side of the game board mounting part 311, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 65. Next, when the other end of the game board 313 is pressed into the main body frame 305, the game board 313 rotates backward in the direction of arrow 313A in FIG. 65 with the engagement part 315 side or the intermediate side between the abutment part 314 and the engagement part 315 as the rotation center O, so that the game board 313 can be pushed into the game board mounting part 311 as shown by the solid line in FIG. 65 against the sliding resistance between the game board 313 and the game board mounting part 311.

Once the game board 313 is placed in the game board mounting section 311, the other end of the game board 313 is fastened and fixed to the game board mounting section 311 by a pair of upper and lower fixing means 316. This allows the game board 313 to be easily mounted. To remove the game board 313, simply place your fingers on an appropriate part of the game board 313 and rotate it around the rotation center O in the direction opposite to the arrow 313A in the reverse order.

As shown in Figures 62 to 68, the main frame 305 is provided with an enclosing wall 317 that protrudes rearward from the outer periphery of the game board mounting part 311, either integrally or separately. The enclosing wall 317 encloses and protects the back mechanism of the game board 313 mounted on the game board mounting part 311 from the outer periphery, and includes an upper wall part 318 that protrudes rearward from the top of the game board mounting part 311, a pair of left and right side walls 319 that protrude rearward from both the left and right sides of the game board mounting part 311, and a bottom wall part 320 that protrudes rearward from the bottom of the game board mounting part 311.

The top wall 318 and bottom wall 320 are arranged on both the top and bottom of the game board mounting part 311 in the left-right direction, and the side wall 319 is arranged on both the left and right of the rear side of the game board mounting part 311 in the up-down direction. The bottom wall 320 is provided with an outlet 321 that discharges game balls that have passed through the back side of the game board 313 downward.

As shown in Figures 61 and 62, the front door 306 is provided with a synthetic resin door base 322 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the main body frame 305. This door base 322 has a window hole 324 formed in correspondence with the front side of the play area 323 formed on the play board 313, and multiple speakers 325 are arranged at predetermined locations around the window hole 324, such as above, below, left, and right, and each speaker 325 is fitted with a decorative cover 326 that substantially covers the front side.

Also, as shown in FIG. 61, on the lower front side of the door base 322, there are arranged an upper tray (launched ball storage section) 328 that stores game balls and supplies them to the launching means 327, a lower tray (surplus ball receiving section) 329 that stores surplus balls that overflow from the upper tray 328 when the upper tray 328 is full of game balls, and a launch handle 330 that is operated to activate the launching means 327, and further, a lower decorative cover 331 is attached that roughly covers the upper tray 328, lower tray 329, etc. from the front.

The lower decorative cover 331 is formed into a forward-facing bulge, and on its upper side are provided operation means such as a performance button 332 that the player can press, and a cross operation means 333. The cross operation means 333 has four operation parts 334: an up key on the rear side, a down key on the front side, a left key on the left side, and a right key on the right side.

As shown in FIG. 62, a glass unit 340 is removably attached to the rear side of the door base 322 so as to substantially cover the window hole 324 from the rear side, and a reinforcing metal plate 335 arranged vertically along the edge of the first and second hinges 303, 307, a reinforcing metal plate 336 arranged vertically along the edge of the opening and closing end, and a reinforcing metal plate 337 arranged horizontally below the window hole 324 are removably fixed by screws or the like.

A ball feeding means 338, a ball guiding means 339, etc. are attached to the back side of the reinforcing sheet metal 337. The ball feeding means 338 is for supplying the game balls in the upper tray 328 one by one to the launching means 327, and is arranged corresponding to the front side of the launching means 327. The ball guiding means 339 is for guiding surplus balls that overflow from the upper tray 328 when the upper tray 328 is full of game balls, and foul balls that return without reaching the playing area 323, to the lower tray 329, and is arranged adjacent to the ball feeding means 338 on the first and second hinges 303, 307 side.

As shown in Figures 62 to 69, the game board 313 is removably attached to the game board mounting section 311 of the main frame 305, and the performance control board 345, power module board 346, and main control board 354 are arranged on the back side of the game board 313. Also, on the back side of the main frame 305, a ball tank 347, a ball guide rail 348, and an external information retrieval means 349 are arranged on the upper end side, and a ball payout means 350, a ball guide means 351, and a relay board 352 are arranged vertically on one side in the left-right direction, and an LED connection board 353 is arranged vertically on the other side in the left-right direction. Furthermore, on the back side of the main frame 305, a payout board 355 and a ball lending board 356 are arranged on the left and right below the main control board 354.

The ball tank 347, ball guide rail 348, and external information retrieval means 349 are arranged in the left-right direction along the upper side of the upper wall portion 318 of the enclosing wall 317, as shown in Figures 63 and 64. The ball tank 347 is used to store game balls for prize balls and loan balls, and is configured as a rectangle long in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and is fixed removably by abutting against the step portion 318a of the upper wall portion 318 of the enclosing wall 317. The ball tank 347 is open at the top so as to receive game balls supplied from the supply means 357 on the island side.

The ball guide rail 348 is for guiding game balls from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350, and is arranged at an angle in the left-right direction from the underside of the ball tank 347 to the upper side of the ball payout means 350, and is removably attached to the back side of the main body frame 305. A ball crushing mechanism 358 is provided midway along the ball guide rail 348 as necessary. The external information retrieval means 349 is for retrieving various game information to the outside, and is equipped with multiple retrieval terminals 359 arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and is arranged above the ball guide rail 348.

Of the left and right side wall portions 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall portion 319 on the side of the first and second hinges 303, 307 is integrally provided with a rear mounting base 360 that bends inward in the left-right direction from its rear end as shown in Figures 63 to 68, and the ball dispensing means 350 and ball guiding means 351 are arranged in a vertical line on the back side of this rear mounting base 360 and are removably attached.

The ball payout means 350 is for paying out game balls in the ball tank 347 based on a prize ball payout command from the payout board 355 and a ball lending command from the ball lending board 356. As shown in FIG. 64, the ball payout means 350 includes a payout case 362 formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape that is flat in the front-rear direction, a storage passage 363 provided in a zigzag shape in the payout case 362, a rotor 364 that pays out game balls in the storage passage 363, and a drive motor (not shown) that drives the rotor 364, and is detachably attached to the back side of the rear mounting base 360. The game balls paid out from the ball payout means 350 are guided to the upper tray 328 via the ball guide means 351.

As shown in FIG. 64, the ball guiding means 351 has a payout passage 366 and an extraction passage 367. When the ball payout means 350 pays out a game ball, the game ball from the ball payout means 350 is guided to the upper tray 328 via the payout passage 366, and when a game ball is extracted from the ball tank 347 to the ball payout means 350, the game ball can be extracted from the extraction passage 367 to the outside of the machine via an extraction port (not shown). A relay board 352 is provided on the back side of the ball guiding means 351.

Of the left and right side walls 319 of the surrounding wall 317, the side wall 319 located opposite the center of rotation O when the game board 313 is attached or detached is provided with a side wall reinforcing member 368 made of sheet metal that reinforces the side wall 319 from the outside, as shown in Figures 64 to 68, and a frame side joint 369 is provided along the bottom wall 320 from the side wall 319 in an L-shape when viewed from the front. The side wall reinforcing member 368 has the function of protecting the side wall 319 and the back mechanism of the game board 313 from damage caused by contact with other members when the front frame 302 is opened or closed.

As shown in Figures 66 and 69, the frame-side joint part 369 is arranged in front-to-back correspondence with the board-side joint part 370 on the back side of the game board 313, and is electrically connected to the board-side joint part 370 in a detachable manner when the game board 313 is attached to or detached from the game board mounting part 311.

As shown in FIG. 62, the launching means 327, the lower speaker 325a, etc. are arranged on the front side of the lower mounting part 312. Also, as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, a first board mounting base 371 is attached to the back side of the lower mounting part 312 so as to cover the back side mechanism of the lower mounting part 312, and a payout board 355 housed in a payout board case 372 and a ball lending board 356 housed in a ball lending board case 373 are arranged on the left and right sides on the back side of this first board mounting base 371.

As shown in FIG. 69, the launching means 327 includes a sheet metal support plate 374, a launching rail 375 attached to the front of the support plate 374, a ball holding section 376 attached to the front of the support plate 374 and holding the game ball to be launched on the launching rail 375, a striking hammer 378 supported on the front of the support plate 374 so as to be able to swing freely around a drive shaft 377 in the front-rear direction, and a launching drive means 379 such as a rotary solenoid attached to the back side of the support plate 374 and driving the striking hammer 378 in the striking direction via the drive shaft 377. When the launch handle 330 is rotated, the striking hammer 378 is driven in the striking direction (clockwise) by the launching drive means 379 according to the amount of rotation, and the game ball on the launching rail 375 is launched toward the game board 313.

The payout board 355 is for controlling the ball payout means 350 in accordance with a payout command. The payout board case 372 that houses the payout board 355 is removably fixed to the first board mounting base 371 by engagement means 380 on one of the left and right ends and a fastener 381 on the other end, as shown in Figures 63 and 64. The fastener 381 has a knob 382 that can be rotated around a front-to-rear axis on the first board mounting base 371, and the knob 382 is used to tighten the payout board case 372 to the first board mounting base 371.

As shown in Figures 63 and 64, the ball lending board 356 is for controlling the ball dispensing means 350 in accordance with ball lending commands from a ball lending button or the like. The ball lending board case 373 that houses the ball lending board 356 is pivotally attached around a vertical axis by pivot means 383 on one of the left and right ends, and is removably fixed to the first board mounting base 371 by locking means 384 on the other end. The locking means 384 has a locking button 385 that can be operated in the forward and backward directions, and when the locking button 385 is pressed forward, the ball lending board case 373 is locked to the first board mounting base 371, and when the locking button 385 is pulled rearward, the locking is released.

The game board 313 is made of a non-translucent material such as plywood or a transparent material such as synthetic resin, and is generally rectangular in shape. As shown in FIG. 70, the front side of the game board 313 is provided with the game area 323, a guide rail 387 that guides the game balls launched from the launching means 327 to the upper side of the game area 323, and a central display frame (center case) 388 that is located approximately in the center and is detachably attached to the front side of the game board 313. In addition, a front decorative member 389 is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 323 on the front side of the game board 313.

As shown in Figures 65 to 68 and 71 to 75, the rear side of the game board 313 is fitted with a mounting frame 391 and a second board mounting base 392 arranged to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391. The mounting frame 391 is fitted with an image display means 393 such as a liquid crystal type arranged on the rear side of the game board 313 corresponding to the central display frame 388, first to fourth movable performance means 394 to 397 arranged between the central display frame 388 and the image display means 393, an LED connection board 353 to which the LEDs for light emission on the front side of the front frame 302 are connected, and a harness receiving base 399 for receiving a harness arranged on the rear side.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 72, the performance control board 345 and the power supply module board 346 are attached to the back side of the image display means 393. As shown in FIG. 72, the back side of the second board mounting base 392 is provided with a main control board case 513 that houses the main control board 354, and a board-side joint part 370 that is electrically attached and detached to the frame-side joint part 369 when the game board 313 is attached and detached.

The mounting frame 391 is a short rectangular cylinder in the front-to-rear direction, and is removably attached to the back side of the game board 313. The first to fourth movable performance means 394 to 397 are incorporated within the mounting frame 391 as shown in Figures 70 and 73 to 75, and can be attached and detached from the back side of the game board 313 together with the mounting frame 391 by attaching and detaching the mounting frame 391 to the game board 313.

As shown in FIG. 70, a central display frame 388 is located approximately in the center of the play area 323, with a left flow path 401 and a right flow path 402 formed on either side of the central display frame 388, and a start winning means 403 is located approximately in the center of the lower side of the central display frame 388, with a variable winning means 404 and a normal winning means 405 located on either side of the start winning means 403. Various display means including a normal symbol display means 406, a normal reserved number display means 407, a first special symbol display means 408, and a second special symbol display means 409 are located at appropriate positions on the front side of the central display frame 388.

The guide rail 387 is disposed on the front side of the game board 313 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 323, and guides the game ball launched from the launching means 327 to the upper side of the game area 323 via the guide path 411. A large number of game pegs (not shown) are disposed in the game area 323, and the game ball that is shot into the upper part of the game area 323 via the guide rail 387 is sorted by the central display frame 388 etc. into either the left flow path 401 or the right flow path 402 and flows down while colliding with the game pegs.

As shown in FIG. 70, the game board 313 has a number of mounting holes 413-415 for mounting the central display frame 388, the start winning means 403, the variable winning means 404, the normal winning means 405, and the outlet 416, which are formed in a penetrating manner in the front-to-rear direction. The mounting hole 413 is for mounting the central display frame 388, and is provided in approximately the center of the game area 323. The mounting hole 414 is for mounting the start winning means 403, and the mounting hole 415 is for mounting the normal winning means 405, and is provided below the mounting hole 413. The outlet 416 is located at the bottom of the game area 323.

As shown in Figures 76 to 80, the central display frame 388 covers the outer periphery of the image display means 393 from the front side and forms a display window 418 corresponding to the image display means 393 on the inside. This central display frame 388 is provided with a first display frame 419 and a second display frame 420 that are divided in two in the circumferential direction so as to surround the display window 418, and is detachably attached to the front side of the game board 313 with screws or the like so that the outer periphery of the display window 418 is located within the mounting hole 413. Note that the central display frame 388 is provided with the first display frame 419 and the second display frame 420 that are divided in two in the circumferential direction, but the entire frame may be divided into three or more parts as necessary, or may be divided into multiple parts in the front-to-rear direction.

As shown in Figures 73, 76 to 80, the first display frame 419 is detachably attached to the front of the game board 313. It is provided with a plate-like or other front mounting part 421 that is arranged along the front of the game board 313 outside the mounting hole 413 and allows game balls to pass through its front side, a decorative front frame part 422 that is provided in the front of the front mounting part 421 from the top side to both the left and right sides in a roughly gate-like shape when viewed from the front and protrudes forward from the inner periphery of the front mounting part 421, a window frame part 423 that is bent backward from the inner periphery of the front frame part 422 and is arranged inside the mounting hole 413 and surrounds the display window 418 from the outer periphery, and left and right decorative members 424 that are arranged vertically behind the window frame part 423 on both the left and right sides of the display window 418, and is detachably attached to the front of the game board 313.

The decorative members 424 are plate-shaped or have other shapes, and as shown in Figures 73, 76, and 77, are arranged to protrude toward the display window 418 from the inner circumference of the window frame portion 423. Of the left and right decorative members 424, one decorative member 424 is fixed to the front frame portion 422 etc. via the attachment portion 424a, and the other decorative member 424 is fixed to the window frame portion 423 etc. via the attachment portion 424a.

The front mounting portion 421, the front frame portion 422, and the window frame portion 423 form a front member 426 that defines the play area 323 on the outer periphery of the central display frame 388, and the decorative member 424 forms a rear member 427 that is located behind the front member 426 and on the outer periphery of the image display means 393. Various display means such as the normal symbol display means 406, the normal reserved number display means 407, the first special symbol display means 408, and the second special symbol display means 409 are arranged in appropriate positions on the front side of the first display frame 419.

The second display frame 420 is provided with a stage 429 that drops the game ball from the front side of the game board 313 to the start winning means 403, and a warp port 430 that guides the game ball flowing down the left flow path 401 to the stage 429.

This second display frame 420 is disposed between the left and right lower ends of the window frame portion 423 of the first display frame 419, and is equipped with a plate-shaped front mounting member 432 that abuts against the front of the game board 313 at the lower side of the mounting hole 413, a stage 429 disposed above the front mounting member 432, and an intrusion prevention member 431 disposed from the top to the rear of the stage 429, and both left and right ends are detachably connected to the left and right lower ends of the first display frame 419 with screws or the like.

The front mounting member 432 is integrally provided with a reinforcing peripheral wall portion 433 that is disposed on the inner circumference of the mounting hole 413 and extends over substantially the entire length in the left-right direction on the rear side. As shown in Figures 76 to 80, this front mounting member 432 is formed with a warp port 430 that opens to the left flow-down path 401 side, and a guide passage 434 that guides game balls from this warp port 430 to the stage 429 side. The guide passage 434 is connected to a guide passage 435 formed in the entry prevention member 431 on the rear side, and guides and directs game balls that enter the warp port 430 while flowing down the left flow-down path 401 from this guide passage 434 through the guide passage 435 to one end of the stage 429.

The warp port 430 is provided on the front side of the front mounting member 432. The front mounting member 432 has an opening 437 on the front side of the warp port 430, and a passage wall 438 for the guide passage 434 that protrudes forward in a U-shape is provided integrally on the lower side of the warp port 430. The rear side of the guide passage 434 is connected to the guide passage 435 via a connection hole 439. The guide passage 435 is formed between the front mounting member 432 and a passage wall 440 that is provided on the intrusion prevention member 431 with a U-shaped cross section.

By providing the warp port 430 and guide passage 434 of this structure in the front mounting member 432, it is possible to mold the warp port 430 and guide passage 434 integrally with the front mounting member 432 using a mold divided into front and rear parts. This reduces the number of parts in the second display frame 420 and cuts manufacturing costs compared to when a warp port member including the warp port 430 and guide passage 434 is provided on the front mounting member 432 so that it can be freely attached and detached from the front side.

The rear sides of both the warp port 430 and the guide passage 434 may be open, and the open side, excluding the connection hole 439 with the guide passage 435, may be blocked by other members such as the game board 313, the stage 429, or the intrusion prevention member 431. In short, it is sufficient that the warp port 430 and the front attachment member 432 including the guide passage 434 can be molded as a single unit using a mold divided into two parts for the front and rear.

The stage 429 is generally arc-shaped when viewed from the front, with higher left and right sides, and has a central drop section 450 located approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and left and right drop sections 451 located on both the left and right sides of the central drop section 450. After the game ball guided from the warp port 430 rolls freely in the left-right direction, it falls from either the central drop section 450 or the left and right drop sections 451 to the front of the game board 313. The central drop section 450 is located approximately directly above the start winning means 403, and when the game ball falls from this central drop section 450, there is a high possibility that the game ball will win the start winning means 403.

In addition to the guide passage 435, the intrusion prevention member 431 is provided with a rear intrusion prevention plate 443 that is provided approximately parallel to the game board 313 so as to cover the stage 429 from the rear side, and an upper intrusion prevention plate 444 that is bent forward from the upper end of the rear intrusion prevention plate 443 to cover the stage 429 from above. These intrusion prevention plates 443, 444 are designed to prevent game balls flowing down each flow path 401, 402 or game balls that have bounced off the stage 429 from entering the rear side. The intrusion prevention member 431 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the display image displayed on the image display means 393 can be viewed from the front side through this intrusion prevention member 431.

As shown in Figures 71 to 75, 81 to 83, etc., the mounting frame 391 is integrally provided with a rear wall 446 formed approximately parallel to the game board 313 and having a rectangular opening 455 formed approximately in the center, a peripheral wall 447 extending forward from the outer edge of the rear wall 446 to the back surface of the game board 313, and a fixing part 448 bent outward from the front edge side of the peripheral wall 447 along the game board 313 and fixed to the game board 313 by fixing screws or the like. The top, bottom, left and right walls of the peripheral wall 447 are located close to the upper wall 318, side wall 319 and bottom wall 320 of the outer surrounding wall 317.

As shown in Figures 73, 75, and 81, the rear side of the rear wall 446 of the mounting frame 391 is provided with a display means mounting section 453 to which the image display means 393 is removably mounted in the vertical direction along the game board 313, bulging sections 454 that are arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the display means mounting section 453 and have a U-shaped cross section in a plan view that bulges out rearward from the image display means 393, and a harness receiving base 399 that is arranged below the bulging sections 454 and on the back side of the display means mounting section 453.

As shown in Figures 72, 73, 75, 81, etc., each of the left and right bulges 454 has multiple openings 456 formed in the vertical direction on the outside of the left and right direction, and the rear side of the openings 456 serves as a handle portion 457. A plurality of handle portions 457 are provided in the vertical direction on each bulge 454, and by hooking one of the handle portions 457 on either the left or right side with one's fingers, the game board 313 can be easily transported even with each component attached. In particular, since the mounting frame 391 has multiple handle portions 457 on both the left and right sides in the vertical direction, it is possible to use the handle portion 457 that is in the optimal position in terms of weight balance, taking into account the mounting status of each component on the game board 313, etc.

As shown in Figures 65, 67, 68, 73, 81 and 82, the display means mounting section 453 is provided with a receiving section 460 on the outer periphery of the opening 455 and receives the outer periphery of the front side of the image display means 393 from the front side, bulging sections 454 on both the left and right sides of the receiving section 460 and guide both the left and right sides of the image display means 393 in the insertion/removal direction, and a protruding wall 461 on the lower side of the receiving section 460 against which the image display means 393 abuts on the insertion end side, and the upper side is an insertion/removal section 462 for the image display means 393.

The protruding wall 461 protrudes rearward to a height approximately half that of the bulge 454, and bends upward from both the left and right ends of the receiving portion 460 to reach the underside of the bulge 454. The upper end of the image display means 393 is removably fixed to the upper receiving portion 460 by a plurality of fixing means 463 in the left-right direction, and the lower end of the image display means 393 is removably fixed to the protruding wall 461 by a plurality of fixing means 464 in the left-right direction.

The insertion/removal section 462 of the display means mounting section 453 is provided on the upper end side of the mounting frame 391 as shown in Figures 65, 67, 68, 81, and 82. When the game board 313 is mounted on the game board mounting section 311 of the front frame 302, the upper wall section 318 of the surrounding wall 317 of the front frame 302, the ball tank 347, and other frame side members are close to the upper side of this insertion/removal section 462, and it is covered from above by the upper wall section 318, ball tank 347, and other frame side members. Therefore, when the game board 313 is mounted, the image display means 393 cannot be removed from the insertion/removal section 462.

As shown in FIG. 73, the bulging portions 454 are U-shaped in cross section in plan view with the front open, and are arranged vertically on both the left and right sides of the display means mounting portion 453. The left and right bulging portions 454 and the left and right receiving portions 460 form guide rails 465 that guide the image display means 393 on both the left and right sides.

The internal space of the bulge 454 functions as a storage section that stores part or all of the internal mechanism (game parts) inside the mounting frame 391. Of the left and right bulge sections 454, the bulge section 454 on the ball payout means 350 side is arranged adjacent to the rear mounting base 360 and overlaps front to back, and the bulge section 454 on the opposite side to the ball payout means 350 is provided with a side board mounting base 467 that protrudes rearward beyond the image display means 393. The side board mounting base 467 is a vertically elongated rectangle, and the outer sides in the left and right directions are detachably fixed to the rear side of the bulge 454 and the lower end side is detachably fixed to the rear side of the harness receiving base 399 by fasteners such as screws.

The side circuit board mounting base 467 is fixed at one side to the bulge 454 of the mounting frame 391 by multiple upper and lower fasteners 473, and at the bottom to the harness receiving base 399 by multiple left and right fasteners 474. The harness receiving base 399 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by fasteners 475 such as screws. Screws or the like are used for the fasteners 473 to 475.

The side board mounting base 467 and harness receiving base 399 constitute protruding members (fixing members) that protrude further back than the display means mounting portion 453, overlapping the left and right sides and the bottom of the display means mounting portion 453 from the back side, and constitute a back guide means that presses and guides the image display means 393 from the back side when inserting and removing the image display means 393. In addition to the back guide means, the side board mounting base 467 and harness receiving base 399 constitute a limiting means (back press means) that limits the movement of the image display means 393 to the rear side. The side board mounting base 467 and harness receiving base 399 are close to the image display means 393 with a small gap between them, but may be in sliding contact with the image display means 393.

As shown in Figs. 71 to 73 and 82, the LED connection board 353 is removably attached to the side board mounting base 467 without using screws or the like. LEDs (not shown) are connected to the LED connection board 353 to illuminate the front side of the front frame 302. The side board mounting base 467 has a peripheral wall portion 469 that surrounds the LED connection board 353, a board contact portion 470 against which the LED connection board 353 contacts from the back side, a board engagement portion 471 that engages with one left and right edge of the LED connection board 353, and a board engagement claw 472 that engages with the other left and right edge of the LED connection board 353, which are used to removably fix the LED connection board 353.

Multiple board contact portions 470 are provided in the circumferential direction on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 469 in correspondence with the outer circumference of the LED connection board 353. Multiple board engagement portions 471 are provided in the vertical direction on the inside of one of the left and right sides of the peripheral wall portion 469 in correspondence with the middle between the board contact portions 470. Multiple board engagement claws 472 are elastically deformable in the direction of engagement and disengagement with respect to the LED connection board 353, and multiple board engagement claws 472 are provided in the vertical direction on the other of the left and right sides of the peripheral wall portion 469.

When mounting the LED connection board 353 on the side board mounting base 467, first one end of the LED connection board 353 is inserted between the board contact portion 470 and the board engagement portion 471. Next, when the LED connection board 353 is pressed toward the side board mounting base 467 using the board contact portion 470 and the board engagement portion 471 as fulcrums, the board engagement claws 472 elastically deform outward and the LED connection board 353 fits within the peripheral wall portion 469, with its outer periphery abutting against the board contact portions 470. Then, when the LED connection board 353 passes through the board engagement claws 472, the board engagement claws 472 return to their original shape due to their elastic force and engage with the other side edge of the LED connection board 353.

Therefore, with this configuration, the LED connection board 353 can be easily attached and detached to the side board mounting base 467, and the side board mounting base 467 can be removed and easily reused as synthetic resin material. In addition, no screws are required to fix the LED connection board 353, and the amount of screws used can be reduced as much as possible.

The mounting structure of the LED connection board 353 to the side board mounting base 467 can also be used when mounting a mounting member to another mounting base.

The image display means 393 is configured by housing a rectangular liquid crystal type image display panel 481 in a housing case 482, and as shown in Figures 65, 67, 68, 73, 85, and 86, it is inserted from the insertion/removal part 462 side into the display means mounting part 453 in a vertically removable manner, and both upper and lower ends of the housing case 482 are fixed by fixing means 463, 464. The housing case 482 is flat from front to back, and the image display panel 481 is housed in a removable manner from the front open side. The image display panel 481 is held by the housing case 482 and a pressing frame 483 arranged corresponding to the front outer periphery of the image display panel 481. The pressing frame 483 is fixed to the peripheral wall part 484 of the housing case 482.

The fixing means 463, 464 are provided in multiple sets in the left-right direction on both the top and bottom sides of the image display means 393. As shown in FIG. 67, the upper fixing means 463 has an attachment part 485 that protrudes upward from the storage case 482, an attachment hole 486 that corresponds to the attachment part 485 and is provided in the receiving part 460 of the display means mounting part 453, and a fastener 487 such as a screw that is inserted from the attachment part 485 to the attachment hole 486.

As shown in FIG. 68, the lower fixing means 464 includes an attachment portion 488 that protrudes downward from the storage case 482, an attachment hole 489 provided in the protruding wall 461 of the display means mounting portion 453 corresponding to the attachment portion 488, and a fastener 490 such as a screw that passes through the attachment hole 489 from the attachment portion 488. The protruding wall 461 is provided with a positioning portion 491 that positions the image display means 393 to the left and right between the attachment portion 488 and the attachment portion 488.

The positioning portion 491 is formed as a notch in the protruding wall 461 so that the mounting portion 488 can be inserted and removed in the vertical direction, and a mounting hole 489 is provided within the positioning portion 491. The mounting portion 488 and the positioning portion 491 form a positioning means for the image display means 393. The harness receiving base 399 is provided with an opening or notch-shaped operating portion 492 facing the fixing means 464, and a tool for the fixing device 490 or the like is inserted through this operating portion 492 to perform operations such as turning the fixing device 490.

As shown in Figures 85 and 86, the storage case 482 has a peripheral wall portion 484, and an upper rear wall portion 493 and a lower rear wall portion 494 that are integrally formed at the rear end side of the peripheral wall portion 484 and abut the back surface of the image display panel 481. The storage case 482 has a large depth in the front-to-rear direction on the upper rear wall portion 493 side, and has ribs and other reinforcing parts 493a on the front side or both front and rear sides, and protrudes slightly rearward from the lower rear wall portion 494. The performance control board 345 and power module board 346 are attached to the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 493. The lower rear wall portion 494 is close to the back surface of the image display panel 481, and a harness receiving stand 399 is provided close to the back side of the lower rear wall portion 494.

The performance control board 345 has the function of controlling the various performance images displayed on the image display means 393, or the function of controlling the performance images and the function of controlling the various other movable performance means 394-397, and is housed in a performance control board case 495. As shown in FIG. 85(a), the performance control board case 495 is configured by connecting a front case 495a and a rear case 495b so that they can be opened and closed in the front-to-rear direction. An opening 498 is provided in the rear case 495b corresponding to the connector 497 on the back surface of the performance control board 345, and a harness (not shown) is connected to the connector 497 on the opening 498 side.

The performance control board case 495 is removably attached to the back side of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393 by a fixed engagement part 499, an abutment part 500, a fastener 501, and an engagement claw 502. The fixed engagement part 499 and the abutment part 500 protrude rearward from the storage case 482 with a gap of the performance control board case 495 between them, and the performance control board case 495 removably engages with the fixed engagement part 499, and the abutment part 500 sandwiches the performance control board case 495 in the left-right direction between the fixed engagement part 499 and the abutment part 500.

The fastener 501 is supported on the abutment portion 500 by a pivot 505 so as to be freely rotatable, and is adapted to be operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the performance control board case 495 to the storage case 482. The fastener 501 can be positioned on the abutment portion 500 at a fastening position and a release position. The engagement claw 502 protrudes from the rear side of the storage case 482 and is positioned above the abutment portion 500, and engages with the performance control board case 495 so as to be freely engaged and disengaged.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), the abutment portion 500, fastener 501, and engagement claw 502 are arranged so as not to interfere with the side board mounting base 467 when the image display means 393 is inserted into or removed from the display means mounting portion 453. On the other hand, the fixed engagement portion 499 is located on the left-right edge side of the storage case 482, and if an attempt is made to insert the image display means 393 into the display means mounting portion 453 with the left and right sides incorrect, the fixed engagement portion 499 interferes with the upper end of the side board mounting base 467 as shown in FIG. 89(b), preventing the image display means 393 from being inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 in that state.

Therefore, the fixed engagement portion (first member) 499 and the side board mounting base (second member) 467 constitute an erroneous installation prevention means 516 that prevents the image display means 393 from being erroneously installed on the display means mounting portion 453.

The fixed engagement portion (first member) 499 constitutes a mounting fixture for detachably mounting the performance control board case 495 to the storage case 482, but the mounting fixture may be used to mount other parts besides the performance control board case 495. The first member may also be a protrusion that is provided in a protruding shape for another purpose, and is not limited to a mounting fixture.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), the power supply module board 346 is housed in a power supply module board case 506 and is detachably attached to the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 493 of the housing case 482 above the performance control board 345 via engagement means 503, 504, etc.

When mounting the image display means 393 on the mounting frame 391 on the back side of the game board 313, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the image display means 393 is inserted into the display means mounting portion 453 from the insertion/removal portion 462 side and mounted. Note that in FIG. 89, for convenience of drawing, the game board 313 and the image display means 393 are shown in an upright position, but when mounting the image display means 393 during assembly of the game board 313, the work is performed with the game board 313 laid horizontally with the front side facing downwards, for example.

When mounting the image display means 393, insert the image display means 393 from the insertion/removal section 462 side along the guide rail 465 of the display means mounting section 453 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 89(a). Then, insert the image display means 393 into the display means mounting section 453 until the insertion end side of the storage case 482 abuts against the protruding wall 461.

When the mounting portion 485 on the insertion end side of the storage case 482 enters the positioning portion 491 of the protruding wall 461, the positioning function of this mounting portion 485 and the positioning portion 491 allows the image display means 393 in the display means mounting portion 453 to be positioned at an appropriate position in the left-right direction. Next, the image display means 393 can be fixed to the receiving portion 460 of the display means mounting portion 453 by the fixing means 463, 464 on both the top and bottom sides.

In this way, when the insertion/removal section 462 side of the display means mounting section 453 is in an open state, the image display means 393 can be attached and detached from the insertion/removal section 462 side approximately parallel to the game board 313. This has the advantage that, even though there are other components such as the side board mounting base 467 and harness receiving base 399 around the display means mounting section 453 so as to overlap the image display means 393, the image display means 393 can be easily attached and detached without having to be removed. Therefore, other components can be positioned so as to overlap the back side of the image display means 393.

When inserting the image display means 393 into the display means mounting portion 453, one of the left and right ends of the image display means 393 enters underneath the side board mounting base 467, and then the lower side of the image display means 393 enters underneath the harness receiving base 399, so that the side board mounting base 467 and the harness receiving base 399 can be used as a kind of guide member. Therefore, even when inserting or removing the image display means 393 with the game board 313 in an upright position, there is no risk of the image display means 393 falling off backwards, and the image display means 393 can be easily and safely inserted or removed.

During assembly, if the image display means 393 is inserted in the wrong direction into the display means mounting section 453 as shown in Figure 89 (b), the fixing engagement section 499 for fixing the performance control board case 495 will interfere with the side board mounting base 467 on the back side of the display means mounting section 453, making it impossible to insert the image display means 393 into the display means mounting section 453. This makes it possible to prevent incorrect insertion or mounting of the image display means 393.

In addition, the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 constitute the mis-installation prevention means 516, and since the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 serve as the mis-installation prevention means 516, the structure can be simplified compared to when a dedicated mis-installation prevention means 516 is provided.

Even if the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 are used to prevent erroneous installation, other members than the fixed engagement portion 499 and the side board mounting base 467 may be used. It is also possible to provide a dedicated means or member for preventing erroneous installation without using other members for both purposes.

When the presentation control board 345 is attached, one end of the presentation control board case 495 is engaged with the fixed engagement portion 499, and then the presentation control board case 495 is abutted against the back surface of the storage case 482 and sandwiched between the fixed engagement portion 499 and the abutment portion 500. When the presentation control board case 495 is abutted against the back surface of the storage case 482, the engagement claw 502 engages with the presentation control board case 495. Therefore, even when the game board 313 is in an upright position, the presentation control board case 495 will not fall off. Finally, the fastener 501 is rotated around the pivot 505 toward the presentation control board case 495, and the fastener 501 tightens and fixes the presentation control board case 495 to the back surface of the storage case 482.

A harness receiving stand 399 is provided on the rear side of the protruding wall 461, located behind the lower side of the display means mounting section 453 so as to be adjacent to the lower rear wall section 494 of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393. As shown in Figures 82 to 84, the harness receiving stand 399 is fixed to the protruding wall 461 on the lower side and on the left and right sides by fasteners 475 such as screws.

As shown in FIG. 72, the back surface of the harness receiving base 399 is provided with multiple hanging parts 507 for the harness 476 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the harness 467 is secured using the hanging parts 507 at appropriate locations. The hanging parts 507 are for securing the harness 476 wired along the back surface of the harness receiving base 399, and are arranged in the vertical or horizontal directions approximately parallel to the harness receiving base 399, with one end in the longitudinal direction being elastically deformable and connected to the harness receiving base 399. The hanging parts 507 are configured in a claw or hook shape.

When wiring the harness 476, the harness 476 is wired left and right along the back surface of the harness receiving base 399 or in another specified direction, while the harness 476 is hooked onto some or all of the hooks 507 as necessary. The hooks 507 are configured in a claw or hook shape with appropriate elasticity, making it difficult for the harness 476 to come off.

In this way, by providing the harness receiving stand 399 on the lower rear side of the display means mounting section 453 and arranging the harness 476 on the back side of this harness receiving stand 399, it is possible to prevent entanglement of the image display means 393 and the harness 476 even when inserting and removing the image display means 393 into and from the display means mounting section 453. In addition, by arranging the harness receiving stand 399 close to the back side of the image display means 393, this harness receiving stand 399 can also be used to guide the image display means 393.

As shown in FIG. 72, the second board mounting base 392 is attached to the back of the game board 313 so as to cover the lower side of the mounting frame 391 including the harness receiving base 399. This second board mounting base 392 has a rear wall portion 508 located on the back side of the harness receiving base 399, side wall portions 509 fixed to the game board 313 on both the left and right sides of the lower part of the mounting frame 391, and a bottom wall portion 511 in which a ball discharge port 510 is formed and which is fixed to the game board 313 below the mounting frame 391.

The second board mounting base 392 has a rear wall 508 that defines an opening 512 corresponding to the rear side of the harness wired on the rear side of the harness receiving base 399, and a main control board case 513 that houses the main control board 354 is removably attached to the rear side of the rear wall 508 so as to cover the opening 512 from the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 83, the main control board case 513 is constructed by connecting a front case 513a and a rear case 513b so that they can be opened and closed in the front-rear direction. This main control board case 513 is arranged horizontally adjacent to the underside of the performance control board case 495, and is removably attached to the second board mounting base 392 by engagement means 514, 515 on both the left and right sides.

The frame-side joint part 369 and the board-side joint part 370 are configured in a roughly L-shape when viewed from the front as shown in Figures 66, 69, 71, and 72, with the frame-side joint part 369 facing forward at the lower part on the side farther from the hinges 303, 307 of the front frame 302, and the board-side joint part 370 facing backward at the lower part on the side farther from the hinges 303, 307 of the game board 313, so that they face each other in the front-to-rear direction.

As shown in Figures 66 and 69, the frame side joint section 369 includes a joint support section 519 that bends inward from the rear end of the side wall section 319, a joint reinforcement section 520 that bends inward from the rear end of the side wall reinforcement member 368 to reinforce the joint support section 519 from the back side, a frame side mounting plate 521 that is disposed in front of the joint support section 519, and first to third frame side connectors 525 to 527 that are attached to the frame side mounting plate 521 facing forward.

The frame side mounting plate 521 has a first frame side mounting part 522 arranged in the vertical direction and second and third frame side mounting parts 523, 524 arranged in the left-right direction, with the first frame side connector 525 attached to the first frame side mounting part 522 facing forward, and the second and third frame side connectors 526, 527 attached to the second and third frame side mounting parts 523, 524 facing forward, respectively. The first to third frame side connectors 525-527 are supported in a floating manner via mounting fixtures 528 on both ends.

As shown in Figures 66, 71, and 72, the panel-side joint 370 is disposed in the lower corner of the rear wall 508 of the second board mounting base 392, facing the frame-side joint 369, and has a first panel-side mounting part 530 in the vertical direction and second and third panel-side mounting parts 531, 532 in the horizontal direction formed on the rear wall 508, with the first panel-side connector 533 disposed in the first panel-side mounting part 530 and the second and third panel-side connectors 534, 535 disposed in the second and third panel-side mounting parts 531, 532 facing backwards.

The first to third frame side mounting parts 522-524 and the first to third frame side connectors 525-527 are positioned so that the side closer to the rotation center O of the game board 313 is located at the front, while the first to third board side mounting parts 530-532 and the first to third board side connectors 533-535 are positioned so that the side closer to the rotation center O of the game board 313 is located at the front. The first to third frame side connectors 525-527 and the first to third board side connectors 533-535 are configured so that when the game board 313 is rotated with the engagement part 315 side as the rotation center O, the pin insertion/removal parts are connected in the tangential direction around the rotation center O in sequence from the side closer to the rotation center O.

The first to third board side mounting parts 530-532 are arranged on a line that passes approximately through the rotation center O, and the first to third board side connectors 533-535 are attached to the first to third board side mounting parts 530-532 via the first to third board side relay boards 536-538. Therefore, the pin insertion and removal parts of the first to third board side connectors 533-535 are approximately parallel to the first to third board side mounting parts 530-532 and are arranged close to the front side of the first to third board side mounting parts 530-532. The first to third board side relay boards 536-538 are provided with first to third relay connectors 539-541 for connecting the harnesses 476 between each board on the game board 313 side.

The first to third frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint section 369 are configured to correspond to the first to third board-side connectors 533-535 of the board-side joint section 370. The second and third frame-side connectors 526, 527 and the second and third board-side connectors 534, 535 are arranged such that the second frame-side connector 526 and the second board-side connector 534 on the far side from the rotation center O are arranged above the third frame-side connector 527 and the third board-side connector 535 on the closer side. The first to third frame-side connectors 525-527 and the first to third board-side connectors 533-535 may be arranged so that the pin insertion/removal parts are inserted and removed approximately simultaneously, or may be arranged so that the pin insertion/removal parts are inserted and removed sequentially from the side farthest from the rotation center O.

By providing the frame-side joint portion 369 and board-side joint portion 370 in this configuration, when the game board 313 is attached to the game board attachment portion 311, the game board 313 is rotated around the rotation center O, so that the frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 and the board-side connectors 533-535 of the board-side joint portion 370 connect tangentially, allowing the board-side connectors 533-535 to be effortlessly connected to the frame-side connectors 525-527.

That is, one end of the game board 313 is inserted between the abutment portion 314 and engagement portion 315 of the game board mounting portion 311, and the other end of the game board 313 is pressed from the front in the direction of the arrow to rotate the game board 313 around the rotation center O. This connects the frame side connectors 525-527 of the frame side joint portion 369 to the board side connectors 533-535 of the board side joint portion 370 in the tangential direction, so that the board side connectors 533-535 can be smoothly connected to the frame side connectors 525-527.

When mounting the game board 313 on the game board mounting section 311, one end of the game board 313 is inserted between the abutment section 314 and the engagement section 315 of the game board mounting section 311 from the front side of the game board mounting section 311, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 65, and then the other end of the game board 313 is pressed into the main body frame 305. Then, the game board 313 rotates around the rotation center O in the direction of the arrow 313A in FIG. 65, so that the game board 313 can be pushed into the game board mounting section 311.

When the game board 313 rotates in the direction of the arrow 313A, the board-side connectors 533-535 of the board-side joint portion 370 and the frame-side connectors 525-527 of the frame-side joint portion 369 approach each other as shown in FIG. 87(b) through the state shown in FIG. 87(a), and the corresponding board-side connectors 533-535 and frame-side connectors 525-527 connect in the tangential direction in sequence from the side closest to the rotation center O. Therefore, the board-side connectors 533-535 and the frame-side connectors 525-527 can be connected effortlessly.

In addition, by arranging the multiple frame-side joint parts 369 and board-side joint parts 370 in an L-shape, it is possible to effectively utilize two sides of the corners of the second board mounting base 392 to arrange the board-side joint part 370, for example, on the board-side joint part 370 side. Therefore, even if there are multiple frame-side connectors 525-527 and board-side connectors 533-535, the frame-side joint parts 369 and board-side joint parts 370 can be efficiently arranged by effectively utilizing the small space on the two sides.

As shown in Figures 70, 73 to 75, within the mounting frame 391, first and second movable performance means 394, 395 are arranged above and below the front side of the image display means 393, and third and fourth movable performance means 396, 397 are arranged on the left and right sides of the front side of the image display means 393.

As shown in Figures 70, 73 to 75, the first movable performance means 394 comprises a first movable performance body 546 and a first driving means 547 for driving the first movable performance body 546 in the vertical direction, and can be moved in the vertical direction between an upper position on the upper front side of the image display means 393 and a lower position on the lower front side while maintaining a substantially horizontal state by driving the first driving means 547. The first driving means 547 also serves as a support mechanism for supporting the first movable performance body 546.

The first movable performance body 546 comprises a support body 548 arranged horizontally at the upper front side of the image display means 393, and a decorative body 549 attached to the front side of this support body 548, and both left and right ends of the support body 548 are supported by a pair of first drive means 547 arranged on the left and right sides of the image display means 393 via a first drive connector 550 so that they can move up and down.

The first driving means 547 is supported by the mounting frame 391 via a vertically long support member 551. The first driving means 547 includes an elongated cylindrical lift guide 552 that is arranged vertically along the outer edge of the image display means 393 from both the upper and lower ends and that guides the first driving connector 550 in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 553 arranged near the lower end of the lift guide 552, a driven pulley 554 arranged near the upper end of the lift guide 552, a drive source 555 such as a stepping motor that rotates the drive pulley 553, and an endless timing belt 556 that is wound around the drive pulley 553 and the driven pulley 554 and has the first driving connector 550 fixed to a predetermined location in the circumferential direction.

The end of the first movable performance body 546 is rotatably connected to the first drive connector 550 by a pivot 557 in the front-to-rear direction. A long hole 558 is formed on one end of the first movable performance body 546, through which the pivot 557 is inserted so as to be able to slide freely in the left-to-right direction. Therefore, the first movable performance body 546 can also tilt diagonally within the range in which the pivot 557 slides within the long hole 558.

The decorative body 549 employs a three-dimensional decoration based on an airplane motif, and has a fuselage section 559 and wings 560 extending from the fuselage section 559 on both the left and right sides. The tip of the fuselage section 559 of the decorative body 549 is positioned so that it protrudes into the display window 418 of the central display frame 388. The tip of the wing section 560 is positioned in front of the decorative members 424 on the left and right sides of the central display frame 388.

The wing portion 560, which is part of the decorative body 549, constitutes a front portion that is positioned in front of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388, and the other portions, excluding the body portion 559, etc., constitute a rear portion that is positioned behind the decorative member 424. Therefore, by arranging the decorative body 549 on both the front and rear sides of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388 in this manner, it is possible to sufficiently secure an area for the placement of the first movable performance means 394.

In addition, the spacing between the left and right decorative members 424 of the central display frame 388 is different at the top and bottom, and the decorative body 549 can pass in the front-to-back direction relative to the left and right decorative members 424 at the wider spacing position. For example, in this embodiment, since the spacing between the left and right decorative members 424 is wider at the bottom, when assembling the first movable performance means 394 to the mounting frame 391, the first movable performance body 546 is moved to the lower side of the decorative member 424, and the wing portion 560 of the decorative body 549 is positioned in front of the decorative member 424.

An LED board 542 is provided on the inside of both the left and right side walls of the mounting frame 391 to illuminate the first movable performance body 546 of the first movable performance means 394, particularly the decorative body 549. The LED board 542 is equipped with multiple LEDs 543 in the vertical direction corresponding to the movement range of the first movable performance body 546, and the LEDs 543 are illuminated to illuminate the decorative body 549 during a specified movable performance.

The decorative body 549 may have a motif other than an airplane, and when it moves left and right, it may be assembled in a state where the decorative body 549 is moved to a position where it is removed from the decorative member 424 inward. The decorative body 549 may move between the front side of the decorative member 424 and a position where it is removed from the front side of the decorative member 424, and may move linearly in the up and down or left and right directions, as well as rotate or swing. It may also be removed from the front side of the decorative member 424 by elastic deformation. Furthermore, at least a part of the first movable performance means 394 may be arranged in front of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388, and the other main parts may be arranged on the back side of the decorative member 424 of the central display frame 388.

As shown in Figures 70, 73 to 75, the second movable performance means 395 comprises a second movable performance body 562 and a second driving means 564 that is supported by a support member 563 fixed to the mounting frame 391 and drives the second movable performance body 562 in the vertical direction, and the second movable performance body 562 can be moved between a lower position on the lower front side of the image display means 393 and an upper position on the front side of the upper and lower middle parts while maintaining a substantially horizontal state by being driven by the second driving means 564. The second driving means 564 also serves as a support mechanism that supports the second movable performance body 562.

The second driving means 564 is disposed on the rear side of the first driving means 547 and in front of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, and includes an elongated cylindrical lift guide 566 that is disposed vertically along the side edge of the image display means 393 at the lower side thereof and guides the second driving connector 565 in the vertical direction, a drive pulley 567 disposed near the upper end side of the lift guide 566, a driven pulley 568 disposed near the lower end side of the lift guide 566, a drive source 569 such as a stepping motor that rotates the drive pulley 567, and an endless timing belt 570 that is wound around the drive pulley 567 and the driven pulley 568 and has the second driving connector 565 fixed to a predetermined location in the circumferential direction.

The driving source 569 is fixed to the back side of the support member 563, and its rear end is disposed within the bulge 454 of the mounting frame 391. Of course, in this case, the driving source 569, which is part of the second driving means 564, is disposed within the bulge 454, but at least a part of the second movable performance means 395, for example the support mechanism of the second movable performance means 395 and/or at least a part of the second driving means 564, may be incorporated within the bulge 454.

By incorporating the game components, which are the internal mechanism arranged inside the mounting frame 391, into the bulge 454 in this way, even when the first movable performance means 394 and the second movable performance means 395 are arranged in front of the image display means 393, there is no need to ensure a large gap between the game board 313 and the image display means 393, and the image display means 393 can be arranged close to the game board 313.

The end of the second movable performance body 562 is rotatably connected to the second drive connector 565 by a pivot 571 in the front-to-rear direction. In addition, a long hole 572 is formed on one end side of the first movable performance body 546, through which the pivot 571 is inserted so as to be able to slide freely in the left-to-right direction. Therefore, the second movable performance body 562 can also tilt diagonally within the range in which the pivot 571 slides within the long hole 572.

The first movable performance body 546 and the second movable performance body 562 are arranged one above the other, but the movement path of the first movable performance body 546 and the movement path of the second movable performance body 562 are arranged to be offset in the front-to-back direction. Therefore, the first movable performance body 546 and the second movable performance body 562 can move freely in the vertical direction without interfering with each other.

The third and fourth movable performance means 396, 397 are arranged symmetrically to correspond to the left and right sides of the image display means 393, as shown in Figures 70, 73 to 75, and comprise a vertically elongated movable performance body 574 and a driving means 575 for driving the movable performance body 574 in the left and right direction, and can be moved between an external position on the outside in the left and right direction relative to the image display means 393 and an internal position on the inside in the left and right direction by the driving means 575. The driving means 575 also serves as a support mechanism for supporting the movable performance body 574.

The movable performance body 574 has optional decorations (not shown) on the front side, and is arranged vertically in front of the image display means 393 along the left and right edges of the image display means 393. The drive means 575 is composed of an electromagnetic sliding means including a support part 576 fixed to the inside of the peripheral wall part 447 of the mounting frame 391, and a sliding part 577 that is slidable in the left-right direction relative to the support part 576 and has the movable performance body 574 fixed to the front side. The movable performance body 574 can be moved by the drive means 575 between an external position on the outside in the left-right direction relative to the image display means 393 and an internal position on the inside in the left-right direction.

The movable performance bodies 574 of the third movable performance means 396 and the fourth movable performance means 397 are spaced apart on both the left and right sides, and do not interfere with each other even when they move to their internal positions. In addition, the movement paths of each movable performance body 574 of the third and fourth movable performance means 396, 397 are between the movement path of the first movable performance body 546 and the movement path of the second movable performance body 562, and the movable performance bodies 574 of the third and fourth movable performance means 396, 397 do not interfere with each other when moving.

The first to fourth movable performance means 394 to 397 can be used for the same movable performance as in the first embodiment, and all or part of the first to fourth movable performance means 394 to 397 can be moved as appropriate to narrow or expand the image display area 579 of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393.

For example, during normal play, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the first to fourth movable presentation means 394-397 restrict the display screen 578, allowing play to be played in a narrow image display area 579. However, in the case of a particular game state such as a reach that is advantageous to the player, or a game state that is a precursor to such a game state, as shown in FIG. 88(b), the first to fourth movable presentation means 394-397 can be moved back to the outside of the display screen 578, expanding it to cover the entire area of the display screen 578, allowing play to be played in a wide image display area 579.

There are two methods for limiting the image display area 579: a first method in which one or both of the top and bottom first and second movable performance means 394, 395 are moved toward the center of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 to limit the vertical width of the image display area 579, and a second method in which one or both of the left and right third and fourth movable performance means 396, 397 are moved toward the center of the display screen 578 of the image display means 393 to limit the horizontal width of the image display area 579. There is also a method in which the first and second methods are combined to limit the vertical and horizontal widths of the image display area 579. The expansion and contraction of the vertical and/or horizontal widths of the display area may be repeated intermittently multiple times using all or part of the first to fourth movable performance means 394 to 397.

Figures 90 to 107 show a fourth embodiment of the present invention, which illustrates a horizontal insertion/removal type in which the image display means 393 can be inserted and removed horizontally into the display means mounting portion 453 on the back side of the game board 313.

The game board 313 has a mounting frame 391 on the back side as shown in Figures 90 to 92. On the back side of this mounting frame 391, there are attached an image display means 393 such as a liquid crystal type that corresponds to the central display frame 388 on the front side of the game board 313, an LED connection board 353 to which an LED (not shown) for light emission on the front side of the front frame 302 is connected, a harness receiving base 399 that receives the harness arranged on the back side, and a relay board 352 that relays each harness.

On the back side of the image display means 393, there are attached a performance control board case 495 that houses the performance control board 345, and a power supply module board case 506 that houses the power supply module board 346, and a harness receiving stand 399 is provided on the underside of the performance control board case 495.

As shown in Figures 93 to 98, the mounting frame 391 has a rear wall 446 formed approximately parallel to the game board 313 and with a rectangular opening 455 formed approximately in the center, and a peripheral wall 447 extending forward from the outer edge of the rear wall 446 to the back of the game board 313, and the front end of the peripheral wall 447 is fixed to the back side of the game board 313 by fasteners 586 such as screws or nails.

As shown in FIG. 93, on the back side of the rear wall 446 of the mounting frame 391, there is a display means mounting section 453 that allows the image display means 393 to be inserted and removed in the left-right direction along the game board 313, and a side board mounting base 467 that is disposed vertically and protrudes rearward from the image display means 393 on one of the left and right ends of the display means mounting section 453, and has an LED connection board 353 removably mounted thereon.

As shown in FIG. 99, the image display means 393 is configured by housing a rectangular image display panel 481, such as a liquid crystal type, in a housing case 482. The image display means 393 can be inserted and removed from the display means mounting section 453 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) through an insertion and removal section 462 that is provided in an open manner on the left-right opposite side of the side board mounting base 467 of the display means mounting section 453, and is fixed in a predetermined mounting position by fixing means 584, 585 at both left and right ends.

The storage case 482 is flat in the front-rear direction, and as shown in Figures 94 to 99, the image display panel 481 is removably housed in it from the open front side, and the image display panel 481 is removably held in place by fasteners 586 such as screws that are inserted through the peripheral wall 484 from both the left and right sides and abut the sides of the image display panel 481. The storage case 482 has an upper rear wall 493 and a lower rear wall 494, and the upper rear wall 493 is provided with reinforcing ribs 587 and reinforcing protrusions 588 with a U-shaped cross section in predetermined directions such as the vertical and horizontal directions to ensure the strength of the storage case 482.

As shown in FIG. 99, a small gap s is provided in the front-rear direction between the front end faces of the reinforcing ribs 587, reinforcing protrusions 588, etc. on the upper and lower rear wall portions 493, 494 of the storage case 482 and the back surface of the image display panel 481. Therefore, even if one or both of the upper and lower rear wall portions 493, 494 of the storage case 482 are pressed toward the image display panel 481 when the image display means 393 is handled alone, the upper and lower rear wall portions 493, 494 of the storage case 482 are only slightly deformed toward the image display panel 481 within the range of the gap s between the reinforcing ribs 587, reinforcing protrusions 588, etc. and the image display panel 481, and the image display panel 481 is not immediately deformed or damaged due to the deformation of the upper and lower rear wall portions 493, 494 of the storage case 482.

As shown in Figures 90 to 92, the fixing means 584, 585 are provided in a plurality of sets in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the image display means 393. As shown in Figure 98, each fixing means 584, 585 has mounting parts 589, 590 that protrude in the horizontal direction from the storage case 482, mounting holes 591, 592 provided in the display means mounting part 453 corresponding to the mounting parts 589, 590, and fasteners 593, 594 such as screws that pass from the mounting parts 589, 590 to the mounting holes 591, 592.

The mounting hole 591 of the fixing means 584 on the tip side of the image display means 393 is provided in a notch 596 of a protruding wall 595 that protrudes rearward from the rear wall 446. The notch 596 is formed to correspond to the mounting portion 589, and the mounting portion 589 can be freely inserted and removed laterally into the notch 596. Therefore, the notch 596 functions as a positioning portion, and constitutes a positioning means for positioning the storage case 482 between itself and the mounting portion 589 on the storage case 482 side.

A sloping guide portion 598 is provided on the tip side of the mounting portion 589, and a guide portion 599 is provided on the protruding wall 595 corresponding to the cutout portion 596. These guide portions 598, 599 guide the mounting portion 589 to the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595. The guide portions 598, 599 are composed of sloping portions, but may also be arc surfaces, etc.

As in the third embodiment, a performance control board case 495 that houses the performance control board 345 and a power supply module board case 506 that houses the power supply module board 346 are detachably arranged on the back side of the upper rear wall portion 493 of the storage case 482. The performance control board case 495 is elongated in the left-right direction, and the power supply module board case 506 is arranged on the upper side.

As shown in FIG. 90, the performance control board case 495 is removably attached to the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 493 by the fixed engagement portion 499, the abutment portion 500, the fastener 501, and the engagement claw 502 with respect to the storage case 482 of the image display means 393. The fixed engagement portion 499 and the abutment portion 500 protrude rearward from the storage case 482 with a gap of the performance control board case 495, and the engagement protrusion 503 of the performance control board case 495 engages with the fixed engagement portion 499 in a releasable manner, and the abutment portion 500 sandwiches the performance control board case 495 in the left-right direction between the fixed engagement portion 499 and the fixed engagement portion 499.

The fastener 501 is supported by a pivot 505 so as to be freely rotatable on the abutment portion 500, and is adapted to be operated around the pivot 505 to fasten the performance control board case 495 to the upper rear wall portion 493. The engagement claw 502 protrudes from the rear side of the storage case 482 and is positioned above the abutment portion 500, and engages with the performance control board case 495 so as to be freely engaged and disengaged.

As shown in Figures 91-92 and 100-103, a harness receiving stand 399 is provided on the underside of the performance control board case 495 on the back side of the lower rear wall 494 of the storage case 482. This harness receiving stand 399 is formed by the lower rear wall 494 of the storage case 482 itself, and various harnesses 600 such as flat harnesses that connect the performance control board 345 and the movable performance means (not shown) are arranged in a predetermined direction and are secured by fasteners 601.

The back side of the lower rear wall 494 of the storage case 482 that constitutes the harness receiving stand 399 has multiple recessed mounting parts 602, and each mounting part 602 has multiple mounting holes 603 arranged vertically and horizontally.

The mounting part 602 has a vertical part 602a that is long in the up-down direction and a horizontal part 602b that is long in the left-right direction, and multiple pairs of mounting holes 603 for the fastener 601 are provided in the vertical and horizontal parts 602a, 602b of the mounting part 602. By attaching the fastener 601 using any of the mounting holes 603, the attachment position of the fastener 601 can be freely changed in the up-down direction and left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 103, the stopper (stopper portion) 601 has a base portion 604, a pressing portion 605 formed integrally with one end of the base portion 604, and a locking means 606 that locks the other end of the pressing portion 605 to the other end of the base portion 604 in a freely detachable manner, and the harness 600 is sandwiched between the base portion 604 and the pressing portion 605, and the other end of the pressing portion 605 is locked to the other end of the base portion 604 by the locking means 606. The locking means 606 has a locking portion 607 on the base portion 604 side and a locked portion 608 on the pressing portion 605 side, and the locking portion 607 and the locked portion 608 are capable of being engaged and disengaged.

The base 604 has a thickness approximately equal to the recess depth of the mounting portion 602, and is provided with two (or more) mounting protrusions 609 that can be inserted into the mounting hole 603, and the mounting protrusions 609 are inserted into the mounting hole 603 to removably attach the stopper 601. The stopper (stopper portion) 601 may be provided integrally with the harness receiving base 399.

One end of the harness 600 is connected to the performance control board 345. The other end of the harness 600 is led from the side of the storage case 482 through the side of the mounting frame 391 to the inside of the mounting frame 391, as shown in Figures 101 and 102, and is connected to the movable performance means 394 to 397 inside the mounting frame 391. The middle of the harness 600 is pressed along the side of the peripheral wall portion 447 of the mounting frame 391 by a pressing member 638. The pressing member 638 is fixed to the mounting frame 391 by a fixing device 637 such as a screw.

By providing multiple sets of mounting holes 603 in the mounting portion 602 of the storage case 482 in this way, it is possible to place the stoppers 601 at required locations depending on the wiring position, wiring direction, etc. of the harness 600, and it is possible to freely respond to changes in the wiring of the harness 600 and other changes. In addition, by placing the stoppers 601 on the mounting portion 572, which is recessed, the amount of rearward protrusion of the base 604 of the stopper 601 can be reduced. As a result, the harness 600 can be placed along the lower rear wall portion 494 of the storage case 482.

As shown in Figures 93 to 98 and 106, the display means mounting section 453 includes a receiving section 460 that is provided on the outer periphery of the opening 455 and receives the image display means 393 from the front side, and guide ridges 610 that are provided on both the top and bottom of the receiving section 460 and guide both the top and bottom of the image display means 393 in the lateral insertion/removal direction, with the other end opposite the side board mounting base 467 located on one of the left and right ends forming the insertion/removal section 462. The upper guide ridges 610 are formed in a rib shape, and the lower guide ridges 610 are formed in a U-shaped cross section, but the upper and lower guide ridges 610 may have approximately the same structure.

The receiving portion 460 and the guide protrusion 610 form a pair of upper and lower guide rails 611 that guide the image display means 393 in the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the opening 455. The guide rail 611 has a front rail portion 613 that is formed by the receiving portion 460 and guides the sliding portion including the tip sliding portion 612 of the storage case 482, and an outer rail portion 614 that protrudes from the outside of the front rail portion 613 to the back side and guides both the upper and lower sides of the storage case 482 from the outside. The tip sliding portion 612 is provided at both the upper and lower ends of the insertion end side of the storage case 482 and protrudes from the peripheral wall portion 484 of the storage case 482 to the tip side.

As shown in Figures 106 and 107, the removable portion 462 is disposed on the rear side of the other end of the display means mounting portion 453. This removable portion 462 only needs to be able to tilt the image display means 393 diagonally from the rear side relative to the guide rail 611 at the other end of the display means mounting portion 453 and to abut the tip sliding portion 612 against the front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611 in this state. Therefore, the removable portion 462 is provided in a predetermined range on the other end of the display means mounting portion 453.

The front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611 has a cut-out insertion portion 615 that corresponds to the front side of the side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353, and is configured so that when the image display means 393 is tilted diagonally from the insertion/removal portion 462 side relative to the guide rail 611, the tip sliding portion 612 side of the image display means 393 enters the insertion portion 615 and intersects with the front rail portion 613.

As shown in Figures 96 and 104, the upper guide rail 611 is provided with a restricting portion 616 against which the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 abuts when the tip sliding portion 612 enters the insertion portion 615, and a fulcrum portion 617 that serves as a fulcrum when the rear end side of the image display means 393 is rotated toward the front rail portion 613 while the tip sliding portion 612 is abutted against the restricting portion 616 and restricted.

The tip sliding portion 612 and the restricting portion 616 have guide portions 618 and 619 that relatively guide the tip sliding portion 612 so that it rises when the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum portion 617 so that the rear end approaches the front rail portion 613.

The edge of the side board mounting base 467 on the side of the insertion/removal section 462 serves as an abutment section 620 against which the insertion end side or the vicinity of the insertion end side of the image display means 393 abuts when the image display means 393 in an inclined position is moved along the guide rail 611 toward the mounting position side.

The lower guide rail 611 has a fulcrum portion 617, but does not have a restricting portion 616. However, the lower guide rail 611 may be configured in the same manner as the upper guide rail 611. Therefore, it is sufficient that the restricting portion 616 is provided on at least one of the upper and lower guide rails 611.

The mounting portion 572 of the storage case 482 protrudes further than the tip sliding portion 612. However, while the tip sliding portion 612 corresponds to the front rail portion 613, the mounting portion 572 corresponds to the opening 455. Therefore, even when the tip sliding portion 612 abuts against the restricting portion 616, the mounting portion 572 does not interfere with other members.

As shown in Figures 90, 92, 96 and 105, the display means mounting section 453 is provided with pushing means (movement assisting means) 623 on both the upper and lower sides corresponding to the rear end side of the image display means 393. This pushing means 623 is for pushing the rear end of the image display means 393 in the direction of the arrow 613A along the front rail portion 613 to a predetermined mounting position (assisting the movement of the image display means 393 in the direction of the arrow 613A) when the rear end side of the image display means 393 is rotated in the direction of the arrow 617A toward the front rail portion 613 around the fulcrum portion 617 in FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 follows the front rail portion 613. It has a pressed portion 624 provided at the rear end of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393, and a pressing guide portion 625 formed in an inclined shape on the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 and pressing and guiding the storage case 482 to the mounting position when the pressed portion 624 abuts.

The pushing means 623 are provided on both the top and bottom of the display means mounting section 453 in correspondence with the front rail section 613, and are adapted to push both the top and bottom ends of the storage case 482. The rear wall section 446 of the mounting frame 391 is provided with a reinforcing section 626 that is bent into a U-shape in cross section in correspondence with the pushing guide section 625. This reinforcing section 626 may be provided along the entire length of the opening 455 in the vertical direction along the edge of the opening.

The pressed portion 624 is provided in an angular shape on the side of the storage case 482, and the pressing guide portion 625 is fixed in an inclined manner on the side of the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391, but the configuration may be reversed, and both the pressed portion 624 and the pressing guide portion 625 may be configured in an inclined or curved shape.

The pushing means 623 may be located at the end opposite the direction of movement of the image display means 393 to the mounting position of the display means mounting section 453, i.e., at the end opposite the side board mounting base 467 with respect to the opening 455, and may be located in one or more positions in the vertical direction, such as at the middle or center in the vertical direction in addition to at both the top and bottom. The pressing guide section 625 may also be configured with a rotating body that rotates around a vertical axis.

As shown in Figures 96 and 97, the front rail portion 613 is provided with a ride-up portion 627 on the pushing means 623 side of the insertion portion 615. The storage case 482 for the image display means 393 is provided with a storage recess 628 into which the ride-up portion 627 fits when the image display means 393 is in a predetermined mounting position.

When the image display means 393 is rotated around the fulcrum 617 in the direction of the arrow 617A in FIG. 104 so that the image display means 393 runs along the front rail portion 613, the front surface of the storage case 482 comes into contact with the riding portion 627, and the tip sliding portion 612 side of the storage case 482 is lifted around the riding portion 627 in the direction of the arrow 627A in FIG. 104, and is removed upward from the restricting portion 616.

The storage recesses 628 are formed as recesses in the front surface at both the upper and lower ends of the storage case 482, and the riding portion 627 is adapted to fit in when the image display means 393 is located at a predetermined mounting position. The riding portion 627 is formed with an inclination on the pressing guide portion 625 side so that the tip sliding portion 612 of the storage case 482 can slide easily. The lower guide rail 611 has a notch 639 in the front rail portion 613, but the notch 639 is not necessary.

When mounting the image display means 393 to the display means mounting section 453, for example, the game board 313 is turned over so that the front side of the game board 313 is on the bottom and the mounting frame 391 is on the top, and in this state, the procedure is carried out as shown in Figures 107 (a) to (c).

First, on the side of the insertion/removal section 462, the image display means 393 is placed in an inclined state inclined diagonally relative to the front rail section 613 of the pair of guide rails 611 as shown in FIG. 107(a), and the tip sliding section 612 on the tip side is brought into contact with the guide rail 611. Next, the tip sliding section 612 is slid in the direction of arrow 613A along the front rail section 613, and moved to the mounting position below the side board mounting base 467 as shown in FIG. 107(b).

At this time, when the image display means 393 abuts against the abutment portion 620 of the side board mounting base 467, the tip side of the image display means 393 is inserted under the side board mounting base 467 while tilting the image display means 393 around the tip sliding portion 612 so as to follow the guide rail 611 as necessary.

When the image display means 393 is moving in an inclined state to the mounting position and its tip sliding portion 612 enters the underside of the side board mounting base 467 and corresponds to the insertion portion 615, as shown in FIG. 107(c), the tip side of the image display means 393 including the tip sliding portion 612 enters the insertion portion 615, and the tip of the tip sliding portion 612 abuts against the restricting portion 616.

Therefore, even though the side circuit board mounting base 467 is located on the back side of the display means mounting portion 453 so as to be close to the back side of the image display means 393 in the installed state, the tip side of the image display means 393 can be inserted far below the side circuit board mounting base 467.

When the image display means 393 is at a large inclination angle, the image display means 393 abuts against the abutment portion 620 when it approaches the side board mounting base 467. Therefore, when the image display means 393 abuts against the abutment portion 620, the image display means 393 is tilted so that the anti-insertion end of the image display means 393 approaches the guide rail 611. This allows the image display means 393 to be inserted into the insertion portion 615 at a predetermined angle.

Next, when the end opposite to the insertion of the image display means 393 is pressed toward the guide rail 611, the image display means 393 rotates around the fulcrum 617 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, and is aligned with the front rail portion 613 of the guide rail 611. At this time, the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 is guided by the restricting portion 616 as it rotates around the fulcrum 617 in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, and disengages from the restricting portion 616.

When the opposite end of the image display means 393 approaches the front rail portion 613, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 105, the pressed portion 624 on the opposite end of the image display means 393 comes into contact with the pressing guide portion 625 on the mounting frame 391 side, and guides the pressed portion 624 in the pushing direction in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A along the inclination of the pressing guide portion 625. This allows the image display means 393 to be pressed in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A in FIG. 107 along the guide rail 611 to a specified mounting position.

Therefore, by placing the image display means 393 at an angle between the upper and lower guide rails 611 and sliding the tip sliding portion 612 along the guide rails 611 while tilting the image display means 393 between the guide rails 611 so that the rear end side of the image display means 393 is placed on the guide rails 611, the image display means 393 can be easily and reliably guided along the guide rails 611 to the specified mounting position.

When the image display means 393 rotates in the direction indicated by the arrow 617A, the front surface of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393 abuts against the lift-up portion 627 before the pushing means 623 pushes the image display means 393 on the guide rail 611 in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A to the mounting position. This causes the tip side of the image display means 393 to be slightly raised, and in this state the image display means 393 slides in the direction indicated by the arrow 613A to the mounting position.

In addition, there are guide portions 598, 599 between the mounting portion 589 and the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595, and the mounting portion 589 is guided to the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595 via these guide portions 598, 599. Therefore, even though the mounting portion 589 protrudes from the tip side of the image display means 393, the mounting portion 589 can be easily inserted into the cutout portion 596 of the protruding wall 595.

When the image display means 393 moves to the specified mounting position, the riding portion 627 corresponds to the storage recess 628, so that the front surface of the storage case 482 of the image display means 393 abuts against the receiving portion 460 including the front rail portion 613. After that, by fixing the image display means 393 to the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391 by the multiple fixing means 584, 585 on both the left and right sides of the image display means 393, the image display means 393 can be attached as shown in FIG. 98.

When removing the image display means 393 from the display means mounting section 453, the procedure is reversed. First, the image display means 393 is released from its fixing means 584, 585, and then the image display means 393 is moved in the removal direction by placing fingers on the performance control board case 495 attached to the back side of the image display means 393 or other suitable locations. Then, the pressed portion 624 of the image display means 393 slides along the inclined surface of the pressing guide portion 625, and the rear end side of the image display means 393 lifts up from the front rail portion 613, so that the rear end side of the image display means 393 can be grasped with fingers. This allows the image display means 393 to be easily removed from the display means mounting section 453.

When mounting the image display means 393, it is also possible to slide the tip sliding portion 612 of the image display means 393 in contact with the front rail portion 613 while inserting the tip side below the side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353. In this case, therefore, the insertion portion 615, the restriction portion 616, the fulcrum portion 617, etc. of the guide rail 611 can be omitted.

The side board mounting base 467 for the LED connection board 353 is arranged vertically with a gap between it and the front rail portion 613 of the display means mounting portion 453 that is large enough to accommodate the image display means 393, and is detachably fixed from the back side to the upper support base 629 and the lower support base 630 that are arranged on either side of the opening 455 of the display means mounting portion 453, as shown in Figures 90, 91, and 93.

The upper support base 629 has a number of bases 631, 632 that protrude rearward from the rear wall 446 of the mounting frame 391 above the opening 455, and a mounting portion 633 that bends from the rear ends of the bases 631, 632 toward the opening 455. Of the multiple bases 631, 632, one base 631 is arranged in the left-right direction above the opening 455, and the other base 632 is arranged in the up-down direction at the end of the opening 455, with an opening 634 formed therebetween. A restricting portion 616 is formed corresponding to this opening 634, and the upper tip sliding portion 612 of the storage case 482 protrudes.

The lower support base 630 has a number of bases 635 that protrude rearward from the rear wall 446 of the mounting frame 391 at the lower side of the opening 455, and a mounting portion 636 that bends upward from the rear end of the bases 635 toward the opening 455, and is configured in an L-shape. The side board mounting base 467 is detachably attached to the mounting portions 633, 636 of the upper and lower support bases 629, 630 from the backside with fasteners 640, 641 such as screws. The LED connection board 353 is detachably attached to the backside of the side board mounting base 467, as in the third embodiment.

When providing the side board mounting base 467 in this way in correspondence with the opening 455 for the display means mounting portion 453 of the mounting frame 391, it is also possible to provide it integrally with the mounting frame 391. However, by providing support bases 629, 630, each having bases 631, 632 and mounting portions 633, 636 that bend from their rear ends toward the opening 455 side, on the top and bottom, and attaching the side board mounting base 467 to these support bases 629, 630, the support bases 629, 630 and the side board mounting base 467 can be constructed to be strong, thereby improving the durability of the mounting frame 391 including the display means mounting portion 453.

The LED connection board 353 is attached to the side board mounting base 467 as in the third embodiment, but an intermediate board other than the LED connection board 353 or other boards may be used. The side board mounting base 467 may also be provided integrally with the rear wall portion 446 of the mounting frame 391.

In the fourth embodiment, the image display means 393 is first tilted obliquely from the insertion/removal section 462 side relative to the guide rail 611, and then in this state, the tip sliding section 612 is slid left and right along the guide rail 611 while the rear end side of the image display means 393 is tilted toward the guide rail 611 side with the tip sliding section 612 as a fulcrum, so that the image display means 393 is slid left and right to be attached, but it may also be slid up and down to be attached. The other configurations are the same as those of the third embodiment.

Although the third and fourth embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, the present invention is not limited to the third and fourth embodiments, and various modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a game board 313 detachably mounted on the support frames 301 and 302 and an image display means 393 mounted on a display means mounting section 453 on the back side of the game board 313, the image display means 393 may be removable from one of the insertion and removal sections 462 in the vertical direction (for example, the upper insertion and removal section 462 side shown in the third embodiment), or from one side in the horizontal direction (for example, the left or right side in the horizontal direction shown in the fourth embodiment). In the former case, the frame side members on the support frame 302 side arranged on the insertion and removal section 462 side of the image display means 393 are the ball tank 347, ball guide rail 348, external information retrieval means 349, etc., while in the latter case, the ball payout means 350, etc. are considered. Of course, other frame side members may be used.

In the case of a gaming machine having a display means mounting section 453 on the mounting frame 391 on the rear side of the gaming board 313, and an image display means 393 that can be detached from the display means mounting section 453, in the third embodiment, bulging sections 454 that bulge rearward from the mounting frame 391 and guide the image display means 393 in the detachment direction are provided on both sides of the display means mounting section 453 in a direction that intersects with the detachment direction (up-down or left-right direction) of the image display means 393, and the gaming parts in the mounting frame 391 are arranged within the bulging sections 454, but the bulging sections 454 may be provided on one side of the direction that intersects with the detachment direction (up-down or left-right direction) of the image display means 393.

In addition, the internal mechanism within the mounting frame 391 includes movable performance means 394-397 in the mounting frame 391 in front of the image display means 393, and it is possible to arrange part of the mechanism of the movable performance means 394-397 within the bulge 454, but other mechanisms are also possible. The bulge 454 may be the full length of the guide rail 611 or more, or it may be only a part of it. The movable performance means 394-397 may be any other than those exemplified in the third embodiment as long as they include movable performance bodies 546, 562, 574 arranged in front of the image display means 393, a support mechanism that movably supports the movable performance bodies 546, 562, 574, and drive means 547, 564, 575 that drive the movable performance bodies 546, 562, 574. In that case, at least a part of the support mechanism and/or drive means 547, 564, 575 may be arranged within the bulge 454.

The mis-attachment prevention means 516 for preventing the image display means 393 from being erroneously attached to the display means attachment section 453 is sufficient if it is provided with a first member 499 provided on the image display means 393 side and a second member 467 provided on the display means attachment section 453 side and interferes with the first member 499 in the event of mis-attachment, and as exemplified in the third embodiment, it is possible to use various other means in addition to a combination of an engagement section (fixing device) for fixing the performance control board case 495 and a side board mounting base 467. The mis-attachment prevention means 516 may be a dedicated means, or may share some components.

When the image display means 393 is attached to the display means mounting portion 453 of the mounting frame 391 so as to be freely insertable and detachable from the insertion/detachment portion 462 side, it is desirable to provide a pressing member that presses the image display means 393 from the back side at the insertion end side of the image display means 393, but this pressing member may be a dedicated member or may also be another fixed member fixed to the mounting frame 391. In that case, the mounting frame 391 may be provided with a protruding member that protrudes to the back side of the image display means 393, and this protruding member may also be used as a back side pressing member. In the embodiment, the side board mounting base 467 is exemplified as the protruding member, and a board is placed on the back side of this side board mounting base 467, but something other than the side board mounting base 467 may be used.

When the image display means 393 and the movable presentation means 394 are used together, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the movable presentation means 394 is located forward of the image display means 393. In addition, the center case 388, which is attached from the front side to approximately the center of the game board 313, may be provided with a front member 426 that is located in front of the game board 313 and forms the game area 323 where game balls flow down to the outer periphery, and a rear member 427 that is located behind the front member 426 and on the outer periphery of the image display means 393, either integrally or separately.

By arranging at least a part of the movable performance means 394 in front of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, the arrangement area of the movable performance means 394 can be expanded. In this case, it is desirable for the movable performance means 394 to be configured with a rear side portion arranged on the rear side of the rear member 427 of the center case 388, and a front side portion that extends from this rear side portion through the inside of the rear member 427 of the center case 388 and overlaps with the front side.

Generally, the center case 388 can be attached to and detached from the front side of the game board 313, while the movable presentation means 394 can be attached to and detached from the back side of the game board 313. Therefore, the front part of the movable presentation means 394 needs to be movable relative to the rear member 427 so as to be removed inward from the rear member 427. In this case, as long as the front part can move relative to the rear member 427, any type of movement such as swinging movement or linear movement may be adopted, and either one of the front member 426 and the rear member 427 may move relative to the other, or both may move. In addition, the front part of the movable presentation means 394 may be on one or both sides in the left-right direction of the image display means 393, or on one or both sides in the up-down direction. The shape and structure of the front parts of the movable presentation means 394 to 397 are not important.

When inserting and removing the image display means 393 from the insertion/removal section 462 side to a predetermined mounting position of the display means mounting section 453, one end side of the guide rail 611 may be used as the insertion/removal section 462, and the image display means 393 may be moved in the insertion/removal direction from the insertion/removal section 462 along the guide rail 611. However, in this case, the insertion/removal section 462 side of the display means mounting section 453 must be configured to be open, and the moving distance of the image display means 393 during insertion and removal becomes longer.

In contrast, if the image display means 393 is inclined obliquely with respect to the guide rail 611, its tip end abuts against the guide rail 611, and then the image display means 393 is moved along the guide rail 611 to a predetermined mounting position while tilting the image display means 393 toward the guide rail 611 from that inclined position, there is no need to open the insertion/removal section 462 side of the guide rail 611, and the movement distance of the image display means 393 can be shortened. The image display means 393 is inserted and removed along the guide rail 611, but the insertion and removal direction may be vertical or vertical or diagonal when viewed from behind, in addition to horizontal.

When inserting and removing the image display means 393 in an inclined position relative to the guide rail 611, it is desirable to hold the insertion side of the image display means 393 in an inclined position with a holding part and then tilt the image display means 393 toward the guide rail 611, but the holding part may abut the back side of the image display means 393 in an inclined position, or may be a part that the tip side abuts when the image display means 393 reaches a predetermined mounting position. Also, the restricting part 616 that the tip side of the image display means 393 abuts against when the tip side of the image display means 393 is inserted into the insertion part 615 of the guide rail 611 is also one of the holding parts. In the case where the tip side of the image display means 393 abuts against the holding part when it reaches a predetermined mounting position, the insertion part 615 of the guide rail 611 is not necessary.

If the display means mounting section 453 is provided with a guide rail 611 that guides the image display means 393 to the mounting position, and a pushing means 623 that pushes the image display means 393 along the guide rail 611 to the mounting position when the image display means 393 is moved from an inclined position toward the guide rail 611, the image display means 393 can be easily and reliably moved to the mounting position along the guide rail 611. It is preferable to provide this pushing means 623 at the rear end side of the image display means 393 on the opposite side to the direction in which the image display means 393 moves to the mounting position, but it can also be provided midway in the direction in which the image display means 393 moves.

In addition, it is desirable that the pushing means 623 is configured so that when the image display means 393 is moved from the inclined position toward the guide rail 611, the inclined pushing guide portion 625 pushes the pressed portion 624 on the image display means 393 side to guide the image display means 393 to the mounting position, but it is also possible to configure the pressed portion 624 on the image display means 393 side to be inclined, and the pushing guide portion 625 to be rod-shaped, spherical, or other shape that abuts against the pressed portion 624. Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 300, and can be implemented in other gaming machines such as arrange ball machines and mahjong ball gaming machines in the same way.

Figures 108 to 158 illustrate a fifth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in Figures 108 to 113, this pachinko machine 300 comprises an outer frame 301 and a front frame 302 arranged in front of the outer frame 301, and a front door 306 is arranged in front of the front frame 302 so that it can be opened and closed freely. The outer frame 301 and the front frame 302 form the gaming machine body.

The front frame 302 is pivotally attached to the outer frame 301 via a first hinge 303 so that it can be opened, closed, and detached, and the front door 306 is pivotally attached to the front frame 302 via a second hinge 307 so that it can be opened, closed, and detached, and these front frame 302 and front door 306 can be locked in the closed state relative to the outer frame 301 and front frame 302 by a locking means 304 on the opposite side to the hinges 303 and 307.

The outer frame 301 is formed in a rectangular shape by a pair of vertical frame members 341, 342 on the left and right, an upper horizontal frame member 343 connecting the upper ends of the vertical frame members 341, 342 to the left and right, a lower horizontal frame member 344 connecting the lower ends of the vertical frame members 341, 342 to the left and right, and a decorative member 310 that is positioned facing forward in front of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and connects the left and right vertical frame members 341, 342.

The lower horizontal frame member 344 is provided approximately horizontally from front to back and from left to right as shown in FIG. 114, and approximately the entire lower surface of the lower horizontal frame member 344 is in contact with the floor surface F or the like, forming a first support portion 645 for self-supporting the outer frame 301 in an upright state. The decorative member 310 is hollow and made of synthetic resin, and includes a rear member 310a arranged between the left and right vertical frame members 341, 342 on the lower horizontal frame member 344, and a front member 310b arranged in front of the rear member 310a. The rear member 310a and the front member 310b are joined front to back by fasteners 310c such as screws at multiple points in the left to right direction.

The lower part of the rear member 310a protrudes forward of the lower horizontal frame member 344. The front member 310b corresponds to the rear member 310a, and its front side is decorated with uneven surfaces and other decorations. As shown in FIG. 114, the lower surface 310d of the decorative member 310 is located slightly above the lower surface of the lower horizontal frame member 344, and a second support portion 646 that protrudes downward is provided near the front end of the lower surface 310d side, extending over approximately the entire length in the left-right direction.

The underside of this second support portion 646 is at approximately the same height as the first support portion 645 on the underside of the lower horizontal frame member 344 or slightly higher than the first support portion 645, and when the outer frame 301 is placed on a flat floor surface F or the like, it comes into contact with the ground together with the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344, supporting the outer frame 301 or the entire pachinko machine 300 in an approximately vertical upright position.

Therefore, if the center of gravity of the outer frame 301 or the entire pachinko machine 300 is between the rear end of the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and the front end of the second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310, the entire outer frame 301 or the pachinko machine 300 can be stably erected in a substantially vertical state, and the entire outer frame 301 or the pachinko machine 300 can be made to stand upright in a stable manner compared to when only the lower first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 is in contact with the ground.

When the pachinko machine 300 is installed on the island equipment 796a, as shown in FIG. 109, its outer frame 301 is placed and fixed on the receiving frame 796b, so it is common to make the lower side of the lower horizontal frame member 344 flat and use almost the entire lower surface side of the lower horizontal frame member 344 as the first support portion 645. However, the first support portion 645 does not need to be provided on almost the entire lower side of the lower horizontal frame member 344, and may be provided continuously in the left-right direction on the rear end side, or multiple support portions may be provided intermittently in the left-right direction or front-back direction, such as at the middle portion and both left and right ends.

The second support portion 646 is provided on the underside of the front member 310b in the left-right direction, but it may be provided on the underside of both the rear member 310a and the front member 310b. Furthermore, the second support portion 646 may be provided intermittently in the left-right direction, for example, in the middle and at both left and right ends.

The second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310 can also be provided as shown in FIG. 115(a) or (b). The decorative member 310 in FIG. 115(a) has a front protruding portion 647 that protrudes forward from the lower side and is provided over almost the entire length in the left-right direction or at both left and right ends, and almost the entire lower surface of the decorative member 310 including the front protruding portion 647 serves as the second support portion 646.

In this case, too, by making the lower surface 310d of the decorative member 310, including the front protrusion 647, approximately the same height as the lower surface of the lower horizontal frame member 344, or slightly higher or lower, the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and the second support portion 646 of the lower surface 310d of the decorative member 310, including the front protrusion 647, are in contact with each other, so that the outer frame 301 or the entire pachinko machine 300 can stand independently with good stability.

The decorative member 310 in FIG. 115(b) is provided with a second support portion 646 that protrudes downward from the front protrusion portion 647 of the decorative member 310. If the lower surface 310d of the decorative member 310 is higher than the first support portion 645 on the lower side of the lower horizontal frame member 344, as shown in FIG. 115(b), the second support portion 646 is provided to protrude downward from the front protrusion portion 647 of the decorative member 310, so that both the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and the second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310 are grounded, allowing the outer frame 301 or the entire pachinko machine 300 to stand independently in a stable manner.

The front frame 302 has a game board mounting section 311 on the upper side and a lower mounting section 312 on the lower side. The game board 313 is detachably mounted on the game board mounting section 311, and the launching means 327, lower speaker 325a, etc. are mounted on the lower mounting section 312.

As shown in FIG. 108, the game board 313 is fitted with a ring-shaped guide rail 387 that guides the game ball launched by the launching means 327 (see FIG. 110) to the upper side of the game area 323, and in the center of the game area 323, an image display means 393 such as a liquid crystal type and a center case 388 corresponding to the front side of this image display means 393 are arranged on both the front and back sides of the game board 313. In the game area 323, various game components such as a normal symbol starting means 654, a special symbol starting means 655, a variable winning means 404, and a normal winning means 405 are arranged around the center case 388.

The center case 388 is provided with a display window 656 that corresponds to the display screen of the image display means 393, such as a liquid crystal type, and also has a normal symbol display means 657, a special symbol display means 658, a normal reserved number display means 659, etc., on the front surface on the outer periphery side of the display window 656. The image display means 393 comprises a performance symbol display means 660, a special reserved number display means 661, an operation guidance display means 662, etc.

The normal symbol display means 657 is for displaying normal symbols in a variable manner, and is composed of two light-emitting elements (e.g., LEDs) corresponding to two types of normal symbols, for example, "O" and "X". On condition that the normal symbol start means 654 detects a gaming ball, these two light-emitting elements flash alternately for a predetermined period of time, and when the hit determination random number value obtained when the normal symbol start means 654 detects a gaming ball matches a predetermined hit determination value, the light-emitting element on the "O" side corresponding to the hit state is illuminated, and otherwise the light-emitting element on the "X" side corresponding to the miss state is illuminated, and the flashing ends.

When the normal pattern start means 654 detects a game ball while the normal pattern display means 657 is displaying a change or during the normal profit state described below, the winning judgment random number obtained at the time of detection is stored up to a predetermined upper limit of the number of reserved balls (for example, 4 balls), and the normal reserved number display means 659 displays the number of stored winning judgment random number values (hereinafter referred to as the normal reserved number) by the number of light-emitting elements that are illuminated, which is the same as the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, to notify the player of the number of normal reserved balls at that time.

The special symbol start means 655 is for starting the symbol change by the special symbol display means 658, and is equipped with an upper start winning means 655a and a lower start winning means 655b on the top and bottom. The upper start winning means 655a is a non-opening/closing type. The lower start winning means 655b is an opening/closing type that can be switched between a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter (or is difficult to enter) and an open state in which the game ball can enter (or is easy to enter), and is opened from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time when the stopped symbol after the change of the normal symbol display means 657 becomes a winning state and a normal profit state occurs.

The special symbol display means 658 is composed of a seven-segment display means or the like capable of variably displaying one or more, for example one, special symbol, and variably displays the special symbol for a predetermined period of time on the condition that the game ball enters the upper start winning means 655a or the lower start winning means 655b of the special symbol start means 655, and if the jackpot determination random number value obtained when the ball enters the start winning means 655a, 655b matches a predetermined jackpot determination value, the special symbol stops in a predetermined jackpot state (specific state), and in other cases stops in a miss state.

When a game ball enters the special pattern starter 655 during the changing display of special patterns or during a special profit state, the jackpot determination random number etc. obtained at the time of the winning are stored up to a predetermined upper limit of the number of reserved balls (for example, 4 each), and the special reserved number display means 661 displays the number of stored jackpot determination random numbers (hereinafter referred to as the special reserved number) to inform the player of the number of special reserved balls at that time.

The effect pattern display means 660 displays the effect patterns in a variable manner in parallel with the variable display of the special pattern by the special pattern display means 658, and is configured to be able to display one or more (e.g., three in the left and right direction) effect patterns 663a to 663c along with various effect images on the display screen of the image display means 393. When a game ball enters either of the start winning means 655a, 655b of the special pattern start means 655, the effect pattern display means 660 starts the variation of the effect patterns 663a to 663c according to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns at the same time as the variation of the special pattern starts, and stops the effect patterns 663a to 663c in a predetermined order such as left, right, center, etc. so that they finally stop at the same time as the variation of the special pattern stops. In addition, when the special symbol stops in a big win mode, the performance symbols 663a to 663c also stop in a big win mode, and when the special symbol stops in a losing mode, the performance symbols 663a to 663c also stop in a losing mode.

The variable winning means 404 is an opening and closing type equipped with an opening and closing plate 404a that can be switched between an open state in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize. When the special pattern after the special pattern display means 658 changes becomes a jackpot and a special profit state occurs, the opening and closing plate 404a opens forward according to a predetermined opening pattern, allowing the game ball that falls on it to win a prize inside.

As shown in Figures 108 to 113, the front door 306 is provided with a synthetic resin door base 322 formed in a rectangular shape corresponding to the front side of the front frame 302, and the door base 322 is provided with a viewing window 665 through which the play area 323 can be viewed, upper speakers 666a, 666b and lower speakers 667a, 667b arranged above, below, left and right of the viewing window 665, a pair of left and right first side units 668a and second side units 668b arranged on both the left and right sides from above the viewing window 665, and a front extension unit (front lower unit) 669 that extends forward below the viewing window 665. The rear sides of the lower speakers 667a, 667b are covered with protective covers 670a, 670b to prevent the insertion of unauthorized materials such as piano wires from the front sides of the lower speakers 667a, 667b.

The viewing window 665 is provided in the door base 322 corresponding to the play area 323, and is covered by a glass unit 340 removably attached to the back side of the door base 322 as shown in Figures 109, 112, and 113. The glass unit 340 includes two glass plates 671a, one in front and one in back, through which the play area 323 can be seen, and a holding frame 671b that holds the outside of the two glass plates 671a, and is placed on the receiving frame 673 via an engagement means 672, and the upper side is removably fixed to the back side of the door base 322 by a pair of fixing means 674 on the left and right. The glass plate 671a constitutes the viewing plate, and is generally colorless and transparent, but as long as the play area 323 can be seen through, it does not have to be colorless and transparent, and a colored and transparent synthetic resin plate or the like may be used.

As shown in Figures 108, 109, 111, 112, 116, and 117, the front extension unit 669 has a generally triangular shape in plan view with the central portion protruding forward, and this front extension unit 669 is provided with an operation presentation means 678 for operation presentation, an upper tray (launched ball storage section) 328 for storing game balls to be launched, and a lower tray (surplus ball storage section) 329 for storing surplus balls, and a launch handle 330 for launch operation is provided on the opposite side of the operation presentation means 678 from the upper tray 328 and lower tray 329.

The front door 306 can also be divided into an upper glass door equipped with a viewing window 665 and a glass unit 340, and a lower opening and closing door equipped with an upper tray 328, a lower tray 329, an operation display means 678, a launch handle 330, etc., so that the glass door and the opening and closing door can be opened and closed separately.

As shown in FIG. 113, the door base 322 has an upper base portion 681 arranged in the left-right direction above the window hole 324, vertical base portions 682a and 682b arranged in the up-down direction on both the left and right sides of the viewing window 665, and a lower base portion 683 arranged in the left-right direction below the viewing window 665, and the lower base portion 683 is formed to be wide vertically corresponding to the front side of the lower mounting portion 312 of the front frame 302.

On the back side of the door base 322, horizontal reinforcing members 684 in the left-right direction are attached to the upper end side of the upper base portion 681, vertical reinforcing members 685a, 685b in the up-down direction are attached to the outside of the left and right vertical base portions 682a, 682b, and a lower reinforcing member 686 is attached to the lower base portion 683. The lower reinforcing member 686 is wide and corresponds to almost the entire lower base portion 683, and the lower ends of the vertical reinforcing members 685a, 685b overlap each other in the front-rear direction and are connected by screws or the like at both left and right ends, and a receiving frame 673 that bends backward is provided on the upper end side. Each reinforcing member 684, 685a, 685b, 686 is made of sheet metal.

The joints between the upper base part 681 of the door base 322 and the left and right vertical base parts 682a, 682b, and the joints between the lower base part 683 and the left and right vertical base parts 682a, 682b are wide and have an inner periphery formed in an arc shape that corresponds to the window hole 324, and upper speakers 666a, 666b and lower speakers 667a, 667b are respectively attached to each joint facing forward via speaker mounting parts.

As shown in Figures 108, 113, 114, and 118 to 120, the locking means 304 includes a front frame locking mechanism (not shown) that locks the front frame 302 in a closed state relative to the outer frame 301, a front door locking mechanism (not shown) that locks the front door 306 in a closed state relative to the front frame 302, a cylinder-type release operation means 688 provided on the front door 306 side so that it can be released by key operation, and an interlocking mechanism 689 that interlocks the release operation means 688 with the front frame locking mechanism and the front door locking mechanism.

The front frame locking mechanism is configured so that when the front frame 302 is closed toward the outer frame 301 around the first hinge 303, a pair of upper and lower front frame engagement claws (not shown) on the front frame 302 side engage with a pair of upper and lower engagement portions (not shown) on the outer frame 301 side to lock the front door. The front door locking mechanism is configured so that when the front door 306 is closed toward the front frame 302 around the second hinge 307, a pair of upper and lower front door engagement claws (not shown) on the front frame 302 side engage with a pair of upper and lower engagement portions (not shown) on the front door 306 side to lock the front door. The front frame locking mechanism and the front door locking mechanism can be linked to the release operation means 688 via the linkage mechanism 689.

The interlocking mechanism 689 has an interlocking member 691 supported so as to be vertically slidable by a support plate 690 that bends backward from the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686, and one of the vertical movements of this interlocking member 691 unlocks the front frame locking mechanism, and the other unlocks the front door locking mechanism. The interlocking member 691 is supported so as to be vertically slidable by the support plate 690 via a pair of upper and lower guide pins 692, etc.

The release operation means 688 has a cylinder portion 693 for inserting a key that penetrates the front door 306 in the front-rear direction, and a rotating claw 695 that is detachably fixed to the tip of the operating shaft 694 of the cylinder portion 693 with a screw or the like. When the operating shaft 694 is rotated in the forward or reverse direction by a key inserted into the cylinder portion 693, the rotating claw 695 slides the interlocking member 691 in the up-down direction.

The cylinder portion 693 has an attachment portion 696 at its rear end that is directly or indirectly fixed to the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686, and a rotating claw 695 is provided at the rear end of the cylinder portion 693 and is fixed to a front-rear operating shaft 694.

In the locking means 304, when the front frame 302 is closed around the first hinge 303, the front frame locking mechanism locks the front frame 302 in a closed state, and when the front door 306 is closed around the second hinge 307, the front door locking mechanism locks the front door 306 in a closed state. When unlocking the front frame 302 and/or the front door 306, a key is inserted into the cylinder portion 693 and rotated forward or backward around the operating shaft 694 to operate the interlocking member 691 upward or downward via the rotating claw 695. Then, the interlocking member 691 operates upward or downward, and the corresponding front frame locking mechanism or front door locking mechanism releases the locked state, so that the front frame 302 and/or the front door 306 can be opened around the hinges 303, 307.

A metal tamper-proof member 697 is provided on the rear side of the door base 322 of the front door 306, on the outer side of the release operation means 688 in the left-right direction. That is, on the rear side of the door base 322 of the front door 306, abutment walls 698 that abut the front end of the front frame 302 on the outer end side and a tamper-proof edge portion 699 that protrudes rearward from the inside of the abutment wall 698 and is located on the inner circumference of the front frame 302 are integrally formed. However, the vertical reinforcement member 685b or the lower reinforcement member 686 has a protrusion 685c that protrudes outward to ensure arrangement space for the mounting portion 696 of the cylinder portion 693 of the release operation means 688, the rotating claw 695, etc. Therefore, the door base 322 has a cutout portion 699a that cuts out the tamper-proof edge portion 699 in the portion corresponding to the protrusion 685c.

The tamper-proof member 697 is provided to cover the cutout 699a. The tamper-proof member 697 is disposed along the tamper-proof edge 699 and its extension, with the mounting portion 697a, which bends inward from the front end, being fixed to the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686 with a screw or the like. Therefore, it is not possible to insert a tamper-proof member between the front frame 302 and the front door 306 to tamper with the release operating means 688 and tamper with opening the front frame 302 or the front door 306.

The tamper-proof member 697 has a cutout 697b formed on the side closer to the vertical reinforcing member 685b or the lower reinforcing member 686 so as not to interfere with the mounting portion 696 of the cylinder portion 693 and the pivot claw 695. This cutout 697b is at approximately the same height as the front end side of the abutment wall 698, and the tamper-proof member 697 protrudes forward from the front end of the abutment wall 698 so that a tamper-proof member cannot be inserted between the front frame 302 and the front door 306.

As shown in Figures 116, 121 to 125, a pair of left and right speaker mounting protrusions 702a, 702b are integrally formed on the upper part of the door base 322 and protrude forward from the door base 322. The speaker mounting protrusions 702a, 702b are roughly rectangular in front view with openings 703, 704 formed on both the front and rear sides, and the upper speakers 666a, 666b are removably inserted and housed from the rear opening 704 side.

The speaker mounting protrusion 702a is provided with receiving portions 705b, 705c for the side units 668a, 668b. That is, the speaker mounting protrusion 702a on the hinge 303, 307 side is provided with receiving portions 705b, 705c for the side units 668a, 668b on both the left and right sides of the flat portion 705a, and the upper surfaces of the side units 668a, 668b on the receiving portions 705b, 705c are approximately flush with the flat portion 705a. In addition, a receiving portion 705d for the second side unit 668b is provided on the upper side of the speaker mounting protrusion 702b on the opposite side to the hinges 303, 307.

As shown in FIG. 125, the upper speakers 666a and 666b are provided with a magnet 707, a coil bobbin 708, a voice coil 709, a diaphragm 710, a center cap 711, etc., within a speaker frame 706, and a front cover 712 is attached to the front side of the speaker frame 706. The front cover 712 is fitted into the opening 704 on the front side of the speaker mounting protrusions 702a and 702b.

Each upper speaker 666a, 666b has a light guide 715 arranged in the internal space 713 on the inner periphery of the magnet 707, etc., and an LED board 717 with an LED 716 mounted close to the rear end of the light guide 715. When the LED 716 on the LED board 717 emits light, the light is emitted from the light guide 715 through the center cap 711 and front cover 712 to the front.

The light guide 715 and center cap 711 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and the front cover 712 has many small holes 712a formed so that sound and light can be emitted to the front side. The light guide 715 is inserted into a through hole 706b in the rear wall 706a of the speaker frame 706 and supported so as to be freely attached and detached. In addition, an LED board 717 is detachably fixed to the back side of the rear wall 706a with screws or the like so that the LEDs 716 face the light guide 715 from the front to the rear. The front cover 712 may be colorless and transparent, colored and transparent, or opaque. Note that if the front cover 712 is made of colorless and transparent or colored and transparent synthetic resin, an uneven diffuse reflection part may be formed on the back side so that the front cover 712 itself emits light by the light from the LEDs 716.

In this way, by assembling light emitting means such as the light guide 715 and LED board 717 to the upper speakers 666a and 666b, light from the LEDs 716 on the LED board 717 can be irradiated to the front side from the light guide 715 through the center cap 711 and front cover 712. Therefore, the upper speakers 666a and 666b can be used for light emission in addition to generating sound effects, and unprecedented effects can be expected.

The first side unit 668a, as shown in FIG. 116, is a common part that is used in common for multiple types of pachinko machines 300, while the second side unit 668b, as shown in FIG. 116 and 126 to 128, is a part that has a design that is unique to a specific model of pachinko machine 300, such as being equipped with an upper protrusion 730, which will be described later.

For example, when manufacturing multiple types of pachinko machines 300, the first side unit 668a is commonly used and combined with a second side unit 668b having a unique configuration to form the peripheral portion of the viewing window 665 of the front door 306. With this configuration, while commonly using the first side unit 668a, different models of pachinko machines 300 can be easily manufactured by changing the design and other configurations of the second side unit 668b.

Depending on the model of the pachinko machine 300, the design and other configurations of the first side unit 668a can be changed. In that case, the door base 322 side will be common to multiple models. Therefore, in both the first side unit 668a and the second side unit 668b, electronic components required in common to each model, such as upper speakers 666a, 666b and lower speakers 667a, 667b for generating sound effects, are attached to the door base 322 side, and electronic components specific to a particular model are incorporated in the first side unit 668a and the second side unit 668b, or in the second side unit 668b.

The first side unit 668a and the second side unit 668b have a substantially similar configuration in the front portion below the upper speakers 666a, 666b, and are equipped with an LED board 721 that is disposed on the front surface of the door base 322 and has a number of LEDs 720 attached to the front surface, an illuminating decorative cover 722 that has a diffuse reflection portion 722a formed on the inside and covers the LED board 721 from the front, and an internal lens 723 that is disposed on the front side of the LED board 721, so that the illuminating decorative cover 722 is illuminated by the light from the LEDs 720 on the LED board 721.

As shown in Figures 111, 126 to 128, the LED board 721 is divided into several parts, one above the other, and the two are connected by connectors 724 or the like. The luminous decorative cover 722 is made of a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, and has an uneven diffuse reflection section 722a on the inner surface on the back side.

The upper side 724a of the luminous decorative cover 722 protrudes further forward than the lower side 724b, and the upper side 724a overlaps the receiving parts 705b and 705c of the speaker mounting protrusion 702a. The gap between the LED board 721 and the luminous decorative cover 722 is larger on the upper side and smaller on the lower side.

As shown in Figures 129 to 132, the internal lens 723 has through holes 725 formed corresponding to each LED 720 on the upper side 724a where the distance between the LED board 721 and the luminous decorative cover 722 is large, and also has conical, spherical, or other concave lens portions 726 formed on the front or back side corresponding to each LED 720 on the lower side 724b where the distance between the LED board 721 and the luminous decorative cover 722 is small.

Therefore, when each LED 720 on the LED board 721 emits light, the light from the LED 720 on the upper side 724a of the luminous decorative cover 722 passes through the through hole 725 and is directly irradiated onto the diffuse reflection portion 722a of the luminous decorative cover 722. However, because the distance between the LED board 721 and the luminous decorative cover 722 is large, the light from the LED 720 is moderately diffused as it irradiates the diffuse reflection portion 722a.

On the other hand, on the lower side 724b where the distance between the LED board 721 and the luminous decorative cover 722 is small, the light from the LED 720 is diffused by the concave lens portion 726 and irradiated onto the diffuse reflection portion 722a of the luminous decorative cover 722. Therefore, uneven light emission between the upper side 724a and the lower side 724b on the luminous decorative cover 722 side can be prevented as much as possible or the uneven light emission can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 131(b), the concave lens portion 726 is composed of a conical recess 726a formed on the front surface of the internal lens 723 and a spherical protrusion 726b formed on the back surface of the internal lens 723 in correspondence with the conical recess 726a. The concave lens portion 726 may have any shape as long as it has a light diffusing function, and the specific cross-sectional shape is not important.

As shown in Figures 108 and 116, an upper protrusion 730 is provided on the upper part of the second side unit 668b, protruding forward between the left and right upper speakers 666a, 666b. That is, as shown in Figures 112, 116, and 126 to 128, the second side unit 668b is generally L-shaped in front view, spanning from the upper speaker 666a through the upper speaker 666b to the lower speaker 667b, and includes a synthetic resin unit frame 731, a metal unit reinforcing plate 732 that reinforces the unit frame 731 from the back, and an upper protrusion 730 that protrudes forward from the upper side of the unit frame 731. The second side unit 668b is detachably attached to the back of the door base 322 by the first and second positioning means 733, 734 on both ends of the second side unit 668b, the first to third locking means 735 to 737 that are distributed, and the first to third screw-type fixing means 738 to 740 that are distributed.

In addition, the second side unit 668b is provided with an LED 720, a light-emitting decorative cover 722, an internal lens 723, etc., in front of the vertical base portion 682a of the door base 322. However, since the second side unit 668b has a unit frame 731 and a unit reinforcing plate 732, the LED 720, a light-emitting decorative cover 722, an internal lens 723, etc. are provided in front of the unit frame 731.

The upper part of the second side unit 668b has an upper protrusion 730 that protrudes forward between the left and right upper speakers 666a, 666b. The area between the upper speaker 666b and the lower speaker 667b of the second side unit 668b has a configuration similar to that of the front side of the first side unit 668a, and an LED board 717 with an LED 716 attached to the front side is disposed inside the area, and the light from the LED 716 causes the illuminating decorative cover 722 to emit light.

As shown in Figures 116, 123, and 124, the second side unit 668b has an opening 741 that corresponds to the speaker mounting protrusion 702b for the upper speaker 666b, and the end opposite this opening 741 overlaps from above with the speaker mounting protrusion 702b for the upper speaker 666b. The speaker mounting protrusion 702b can be freely inserted and removed from the opening 741, and the upper wall 741a of this opening 741 can be placed on the upper surface of the receiving portion 705d of the speaker mounting protrusion 702b.

The speaker mounting protrusion 702a has a receiving portion 705c for the second side unit 668b, and the end of the second side unit 668b on the speaker mounting protrusion 702a side has an overlapping portion 742 that overlaps the receiving portion 705c from above, as shown in FIG. 122.

By adopting this configuration, when attaching the second side unit 668b to the front side of the door base 322, it is possible to use the speaker mounting protrusion 702b as a guide for the opening 741 and the speaker mounting protrusion 702a as a guide for the overlapping portion 742 while performing the work, and the second side unit 668b can be easily positioned at the specified mounting position on the door base 322 side.

In addition, after the opening 741 and overlapping portion 742 of the second side unit 668b correspond to the left and right speaker mounting protrusions 702a, 702b, the second side unit 668b can be placed on the door base 322 side via the speaker mounting protrusions 702a, 702b, and alignment can be performed with the speaker mounting protrusions 702a, 702b supporting substantially the entire load on the second side unit 668b side. Therefore, there is no need to constantly support the load of the second side unit 668b, which reduces the burden on the worker during installation.

The upper protrusion 730 is thin and flat from top to bottom, its top surface is roughly flush with the top surface of the front door 306, and its left and right central sides protrude forward in an arc or triangle shape. At the end of the upper protrusion 730 on the hinge 303, 307 side, a bent portion 732a (see FIG. 121) is provided that is bent in an L shape on the front side of the unit reinforcing plate 732 so as not to interfere with the speaker mounting protrusion 702a.

As shown in Figures 108, 109, and 132 to 134, on the front side of the upper protrusion 730, there is a light-emitting display board 744 with an air outlet 743 formed in approximately the center in the left-right direction, and air guide means 745 that guides the air from the air outlet 743 to the player while playing, and light-emitting display parts 744a are arranged on both the left and right sides of the light-emitting display board 744 and the air guide means 745. The air guide means 745 has a louver structure with multiple horizontal bars 745a in the up-down direction and multiple vertical bars 745b in the left-right direction.

The wind guide means 745 is designed to guide the wind to an angle and range where all players can feel the wind blowing from the upper center, regardless of the player's height. The wind guide means 745 may be configured so that the direction of the wind can be adjusted up and down and left and right.

In the upper protrusion 730, there are provided a blowing means 746 that blows air to the air outlet 743, and an LED board 748 with LEDs 747 attached to the front and located near the rear of each light-emitting display plate 744. The blowing means 746 is a sirocco fan or the like with an impeller 746b built into a blower case 746a, and is built into a mounting case 749. It draws in outside air from a lower intake port 746c and sends it from an exhaust port 746d through an air passage 750 to the air outlet 743.

The air blowing means 746 has an impeller 746b that can rotate around a vertical axis and is configured to be flat on the top and bottom. When a predetermined game state is reached, such as when the player operates the effect button 813 described below, the air blowing means 746 operates continuously or intermittently for a predetermined period of time to blow air toward the player.

The mounting case 749 on the front side of the LED board 748, the light-emitting display plate 744, and the wind guide means 745 are optically transparent, and the light from the LED 747 causes the light-emitting display plate 744 to emit light.

An LED board 754 with an LED 753 on the front surface is disposed behind the light-emitting display unit 744a within the upper protrusion 730. Each member on the front side of the LED board 754 is optically transparent, and the light from the LED 753 causes the light-emitting display unit 744a to emit light.

As shown in Figures 116 and 122, the first positioning means 733 is disposed on the upper tip side of the second side unit 668b, and the second positioning means 734 is disposed on the side lower end side of the second side unit 668b. The first positioning means 733 includes a positioning recess 733a formed in the receiving portion 705c of the speaker mounting protrusion 702a and a positioning protrusion 733b formed in the overlapping portion 742 at the end of the second side unit 668b, and the positioning protrusion 733b and the positioning recess 733a position the upper tip side of the second side unit 668b in the front-rear and left-right directions.

The positioning recess 733a and the positioning protrusion 733b are formed in an L-shape in a plan view on the inner portion of the speaker mounting protrusion 702a. The first positioning means 733 may have the positioning recess 733a provided in the overlapping portion 742 and the positioning protrusion 733b provided in the receiving portion 705c. The first positioning means 733 may also have another structure.

As shown in Figures 135(a) and (b), the second positioning means 734 has a positioning hole 734a formed in the door base 322 or its vertical reinforcing member 685b, and a positioning protrusion 734b formed by bending the lower end side of the unit reinforcing plate 732. The positioning hole 734a and the positioning protrusion 734b position the lower end side of the second side unit 668b in the left-right direction relative to the door base 322.

As shown by the two-dot chain line, between the positioning hole 734a and the positioning protrusion 734b there is a vertical clearance required to engage and disengage the locking means 735-737. Note that the second positioning means 734 may be formed by providing the positioning hole 734a in the unit reinforcing plate 732 and the positioning protrusion 734b in the door base 322. The second positioning means 734 may also have a different structure.

When the second side unit 668b is attached, it is fixed to the door base 322 by the first to third locking means 735-737 and the first to third fixing means 738-740 arranged in the middle part, but by providing the first and second positioning means 733, 734 on both ends of the second side unit 668b, the left and right positions of both ends of the second side unit 668b can be reliably regulated. This has the advantage of preventing the lower end of the second side unit 668b from shifting in position due to mischief by the player, etc.

As shown in Figures 136 to 138, the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are arranged in three locations on the upper tip side, the upper end side, and the middle part of the side of the second side unit 668b, and include locking claws 735a to 737a integrally formed facing downward on the unit reinforcing plate 732 and hole-shaped locking portions 735b to 737b formed on the vertical reinforcing member 685b. The second locking means 736 is provided with a clamping means 752.

The protruding length of each of the locking claws 735a to 737a of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 is the greatest for the third locking means 737, and decreases in the order of the first locking means 735 and the second locking means 736. In other words, the engagement lengths 735c to 737c between the locking claws 735a to 737a of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 and the locking portions 735b to 737b are in the following relationship: engagement length 737c > engagement length 735c > engagement length 736c.

The engagement lengths 735c to 737c of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are set such that: engagement length 737c > engagement length 735c > engagement length 736c. When the locking claws 735a to 737a of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are engaged with the locking portions 735b to 737b to lock the second side unit 668b to the door base 322, the first to third locking means 735 to 737 can be engaged in sequence in the order of the third locking means 737, the first locking means 735, and the second locking means 736. Therefore, compared to when the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are engaged simultaneously, the locking claws 735a to 737a can be engaged with the locking portions 735b to 737b more easily.

The engagement length 735c-737c of any one of the first to third locking means 735-737 may be maximum, and the engagement lengths of the other two may be approximately the same. For example, it is possible to set the engagement length 737c of the third locking means 737 to the maximum, and set the engagement lengths 735c, 736c of the first and second locking means 735, 736 to approximately the same length that is shorter than the engagement length 737c. In this case, when the second side unit 668b is attached, the locking means 735-737 will sequentially engage from the third locking means 737 on the lower side to the first and second locking means 735, 736 on the upper side.

As shown in Figures 138(a) and (b), the second locking means 736 is stronger than the other locking means 735 and 737 by arranging multiple locking claws 736a and locking portions 736b on the left and right, and a clamping means 752 is provided to clamp the locking claws 736a toward the locking portions 736b after they engage with the locking claws 736a.

The clamping means 752 includes a bracket 752a that is U-shaped in plan view and is fixed to the vertical reinforcing member 685b below the engaging portion 736b, a clamp lever 752c that is inverted U-shaped in plan view and pivoted around the support shaft 752b on the bracket 752a, and a U-shaped clamping tool 752e that is connected to the middle of the clamp lever 752c by a connecting shaft 752d and engages from above with the upper engaging portion 736d of the engaging claw 736a. An operating part 752f is provided on the free end side of the clamp lever 752c.

When attaching the second side unit 668b, the locking claws 735a to 737a of the first to third locking means 735 to 737 are engaged with the locking portions 735b to 737b, and then the clamping device 752e of the clamping device 752 is engaged with the engaging portion 736d of the locking claw 736a. Then, the clamp lever 752c is rotated downward around the support shaft 752b, and when the connecting shaft 752d crosses the line segment connecting the engagement position of the clamping device 752e with the locking claw 736a and the support shaft 752b toward the vertical reinforcing member 685b and abuts against the vertical reinforcing member 685b, the locking claw 736a of the second locking means 736 is tightened in the engagement direction toward the engaging portion 736b. Therefore, the locking claw 736a of the second locking means 736 is stronger than the other first and third locking means 735, 737.

Therefore, compared to the case where the engaging portion 736d of the engaging claw 736a of the second engaging means 736 is simply engaged from above, it is possible to prevent mechanical vibration of the second side unit 668b, and it is possible to reliably prevent loosening due to vibration of the screw-type first to third fixing means 738 to 740.

The first to third fixing means 738-740 are arranged in three places, at the top tip side and the top and bottom end sides of the second side unit 668b, as shown in Figures 139 and 140. The first to third fixing means 738-740 include screw holes 738a-740a formed in the unit reinforcing plate 732 and fixing screws 738c-740c with operating parts 738b-740b inserted into the door base 322 from the lateral reinforcing member 684 side, and the fixing screws 738c-740c are screwed into the screw holes 738a-740a to fasten the unit reinforcing plate 732 to the door base 322 side from the back side.

The speaker mounting protrusion 702a on the hinge 303, 307 side has a screw insertion portion 702c formed on the upper protrusion 730 side in the front-rear direction, and a fixing screw 738c is inserted into the screw insertion portion 702c from the unit reinforcing plate 732 side. The fixing screw 738c is screwed into a screw hole 738a formed at the tip of the bent portion 732a of the unit reinforcing plate 732 on the rear side of the screw insertion portion 702c.

The first to third fixing screws 738c to 740c are inserted across the horizontal reinforcing member 684 or the vertical reinforcing member 685b and the support members 738d to 740d fixed to the horizontal reinforcing member 684 or the vertical reinforcing member 685b, and anti-detachment members 738e to 740e such as snap rings are provided between the horizontal reinforcing member 684 or the vertical reinforcing member 685b and the support members 738d to 740d. The outer periphery of the tip side of the fixing screws 738c to 740c is chamfered to make it easier to insert them into the screw holes 738a to 740a and to prevent fingers from getting caught and causing injury.

On the front frame 302 side, as shown in FIG. 140, there is a step 302a on the inside of the outer peripheral wall 302b that corresponds to the operating parts 739b, 740b of the fixing screws 739c, 740c. If the fixing screws 739c, 740c are tightened, as shown in FIG. 140(a), this step 302a allows the front door 306 to be closed on the front frame 302 side without interfering with the operating parts 739b, 740b of the fixing screws 739c, 740c.

However, as shown in FIG. 140(b), if you try to close the front door 306 toward the front frame 302 without tightening the fixing screws 739c and 740c, the step 302a will interfere with the operating parts 739b and 740b of the fixing screws 739c and 740c, creating a gap between the front frame 302 and the front door 306, making it impossible to close the door.

This makes it possible to prevent mistakes such as closing the front door 306 to the front frame 302 side while forgetting to tighten the fixing screws 739c, 740c of the second and third fixing means 739, 740 when attaching the second side unit 668b. Note that the unit reinforcing plate 732 is formed as a single unit by punching out a sheet metal material into a roughly L-shape when viewed from the front, but it may be divided into multiple pieces.

The harnesses (not shown) connected to the air blowing means 746, LEDs 747, 753, etc. of the second side unit 668b are connected to an internal relay board 755 in the upper protrusion 730 as shown in FIG. 128. A board side connector 757 is attached to the internal relay board 755 in correspondence with an opening 756 in the unit frame 731 or the unit reinforcing plate 732. The unit side harnesses 758 detachably connected to the board side connector 757 are pulled out from the opening 756 to the rear side of the front door 306 through an opening 759 in the door base 322 in a bundled state as shown in FIG. 141.

A long upper relay board 760 is provided on the rear side of the upper base part 681 of the door base 322, adjacent to the opening 759 in the approximate center in the left-right direction. This upper relay board 760 is placed in a storage recess 761 formed in a narrow part of the upper base part 681. Two board side connectors 762, 763 are attached to the left and right of the upper relay board 760 facing rearward, and the connector 758a of the unit side harness 758 is detachably connected to one of the board side connectors 762.

The connector 764a of the unit relay harness 764 is detachably connected to the other board connector 763. The unit relay harness 764 is also made up of multiple pieces, and is pulled out in the left-right direction along the rear upper end of the upper base part 681 of the door base 322, passing near the upper side of the upper speaker 666b, etc., to the end opposite the hinges 303, 307, and then pulled out from the opening 766 on that end side to the front side of the door base 322.

As shown in FIG. 111, the unit relay harness 764 on the front side of the door base 322 is arranged vertically along the edge of the vertical base part 682b on the opposite side of the hinges 303, 307 of the door base 322 to the upper side of the lower speaker 667b, and is connected to the lower relay board (not shown) on the lower base part 683 side through the speaker cover 765b of the lower speaker 667b. Speaker covers 765a, 765b are arranged around the front sides of the lower speakers 667a, 667b.

By arranging the unit relay harness 764 vertically in front of the door base 322 in this manner, a vertical reinforcing member 685b that also serves as part of the locking means 304 can be arranged on the back side of the vertical base portion 682b on the opposite side of the hinges 303, 307 of the door base 322. Since the second side unit 668b is detachably arranged in front of the unit relay harness 764, maintenance and inspection of the unit relay harness 764 can be easily performed.

The unit relay harness 764, which is disposed vertically in front of the vertical base portion 682b of the door base 322, is covered almost entirely in the vertical direction by a protective cover 767, as shown in Figures 111 and 117. The protective cover 767 has an L-shaped cross section, is disposed along the outer peripheral wall 767a of the vertical base portion 682b, and is detachably fixed to the door base 322 by fasteners such as screws.

As shown in FIG. 141, two board-side connectors 769a, 769b are provided at the upper end of the LED board 721 in the first side unit 668a facing rearward in correspondence with the opening 768 of the door base 322, and harnesses 770a, 770b detachably connected to each board-side connector 769a, 769b are connected to the LED boards 717a, 717b on the upper speaker 666a, 666b side via the rear side of the upper base part 681 of the door base 322. The two board-side connectors 769a, 769b are connected to the lower relay board or the like from the lower end side via the wiring pattern of the LED board 721.

A speaker relay board 772 is provided near the upper speaker 666a on the rear side of the vertical base part 682a on the hinge 303, 307 side of the door base 322, and the speaker side harnesses 773a, 773b from each upper speaker 666a, 666b are connected to the speaker relay harness 774 on the speaker drive source side via the speaker relay board 772.

The speaker relay board 772 is provided with three board-side connectors 775a, 775b, and 776, and speaker-side harnesses 773a and 773b from the upper speakers 666a and 666b are detachably connected to the two board-side connectors 775a and 775b, and a speaker relay harness 774 is detachably connected to the one board-side connector 776. As shown in FIG. 141, the speaker relay harness 774 is arranged vertically along the vertical reinforcing member 685a attached to the vertical base part 682a on the hinge 303, 307 side of the door base 322, and is protected from the rear by a protective cover 777.

The speaker relay harness 774 and protective cover 777 are arranged vertically between the vicinity of the upper speaker 666a and the vicinity of the lower end of the lower base portion 683. The protective cover 777 has an L-shaped or U-shaped cross section that covers the speaker relay harness 774, is arranged vertically along the vertical reinforcing member 685a, and is detachably fixed to the back side of the door base 322 with fasteners such as screws.

By providing the speaker relay harness 774 on the back side of the vertical base part 682a on the hinge 303, 307 side of the door base 322 in this way, maintenance and inspection of the speaker relay harness 774 can be easily performed regardless of the first side unit 668a located in front of the vertical base part 682a.

As shown in FIG. 142, the rear side of the protective cover 777 is provided with an insertion prevention portion 777a in the form of a rib protruding rearward to prevent unauthorized insertion of materials into the interior between the front door 306 and the front frame 302. That is, as shown in FIG. 142, on the hinge 303, 307 side of the front frame 302, an outer protrusion portion 778c and an inner protrusion portion 778d are provided in the vertical direction on the front wall portion 778b of the main body frame portion 778a, and a sheet metal reinforcing member 778e is provided from the back side of the front wall portion 778b along the outside of the outer protrusion portion 778c. This reinforcing member 778e has an inner bent portion 778f that bends inward from the front end.

The vertical reinforcement member 685a on the hinge 303, 307 side of the door base 322 has a rear bent portion 685a1 that bends rearward along the inner peripheral wall portion 779a of the door base 322, and an outer bent portion 685a2 that bends outward from the rear end of the rear bent portion 685a1, extending over substantially the entire length in the vertical direction.

When the front door 306 is closed toward the front frame 302 around the hinges 303, 307, the inner bent portion 778f of the reinforcing member 778e fits between the outer bent portion 685a2 of the front door 306 and the inner wall portion 779a, forming a bent maze 780 that prevents the insertion of unauthorized members. An outer peripheral wall portion 779c is provided on the outside of the inner wall portion 779a via an inclined wall portion 779b at the rear end, and the rear end of the luminous decorative cover 722 abuts against the front end of the outer peripheral wall portion 779c.

The rear wall 777b of the protective cover 777 protrudes rearward at the same level as the outer bent portion 685a2 of the vertical reinforcing member 685a or further rearward than the outer bent portion 685a2, and an insertion prevention portion 777a protruding rearward from the rear wall 777b is arranged in the vertical direction over the entire range from the vicinity of the upper speakers 666a, 666b to the vicinity of the lower end of the lower base portion 683. This insertion prevention portion 777a is ribbed, and when the front door 306 is closed toward the front frame 302, it is arranged to be close to the inside of the inner protrusion portion 778d of the front frame 302. The attachment portion 777c of the protective cover 777 is attached to the door base 322 with a fastener such as a screw.

By providing a rib-shaped insertion prevention portion 777a that protrudes rearward from the rear wall portion 777b of the protective cover 777 along the inside of the vertical reinforcing member 685a in this way, even if an unauthorized member is inserted through the winding maze 780, this insertion prevention portion 777a and the inner protrusion portion 778d can prevent the unauthorized member from entering any further. In addition, because the insertion prevention portion 777a is provided on the protective cover 777, it can be easily implemented without requiring major changes to the structure on the front door 306 side.

As shown in Figs. 113, 121, 124, etc., a pair of upper rear covers 781a, 781b are detachably provided on the upper base part 681 of the door base 322 to cover the upper speakers 666a, 666b, the harnesses 764, 770a, 770b, 773a, 773b, and part or all of the relay board 772 from the back side. The upper rear cover 781a on the hinge 303, 307 side is provided with a cutout portion 781a1 corresponding to the first fixing means 738 so that the operating portion 738b of the fixing screw 738c of the first fixing means 738 can be operated from the back side. The upper rear cover 781b on the opposite side to the hinge 303, 307 is provided between the board side connector 763 of the upper relay board 760 and the clamping means 752 so that the clamping means 752 can be operated.

By providing the upper rear covers 781a, 781b in this manner, the appearance of the upper rear side of the door base 322 of the front door 306 can be improved compared to when the upper speakers 666a, 666b, harnesses 764, 770a, 770b, 773a, 773b, and relay board 772 are exposed.

On the other hand, the upper back covers 781a and 781b are not provided in the approximate center of the upper base portion 681 in the left-right direction, that is, in the portion corresponding to the opening 759 formed in the upper base portion 681 and the board side connector 762 on the upper relay board 760 side to which the connector 758a of the unit side harness 758 drawn out from this opening 759 is connected. Therefore, the connector 758a of the unit side harness 758 can be easily attached and detached to the board side connector 762 of the upper relay board 760. At the same time, the fixing screw 738c of the first fixing means 738 and the clamping means 752 can also be operated regardless of the upper back covers 781a and 781b. Therefore, the hassle of attaching and detaching the upper back covers 781a and 781b every time the second side unit 668b is attached or detached can be eliminated.

Although the left and right upper rear covers 781a, 781b can be attached and detached separately, it is also possible to connect the left and right upper rear covers 781a, 781b together to form an integrated unit. In this case, however, when attaching or detaching the second side unit 668b, it is necessary to attach and detach the unit side harness 758 to the board side connector 762 of the upper relay board 760 in order to attach and detach the integrated left and right upper rear covers 781a, 781b.

As shown in Figures 108, 109, 111, 112, 116, and 117, a front extension unit 669 is provided at the front lower part of the front door 306, which extends forward from the door base 322 in a roughly triangular shape in plan view. An operation performance means 678 is arranged vertically at the center front end side of the front extension unit 669, and an upper tray 328 and a lower tray 329 are arranged vertically from the rear side of the operation performance means 678 across the hinges 303 and 307, and a group of small holes 679 for outputting the sound of the launch handle 330 and the lower speaker 325a to the front is provided on the opposite side of the operation performance means 678 from the upper tray 328 and the lower tray 329.

In addition, at the rear of the lower part of the front door 306, as shown in FIG. 112, a ball sending means 680 is provided to send the game balls in the upper tray 328 one by one to the launching means 327 in synchronization with the launching operation of the launching means 327.

The external shape of the front extension unit 669 is formed by the lower decorative cover 331, etc., and an operating means arrangement section 785 for arranging the operating means 678 is located at the front. On both the left and right sides of this operating means arrangement section 785, left and right front upper edge sections 786a, 786b are arranged in a rearward-wide manner from the operating means arrangement section 785, and below each of the front upper edge sections 786a, 786b, a lower plate recess 787a and a handle recess 787b that recess toward the rear are provided.

The lower tray recess 787a is provided with a lower tray opening 329a that opens to the front, and the rear side of this lower tray opening 329a forms the lower tray 329. As shown in FIG. 143, the lower tray 329 extends from near the hinges 303, 307 inside the front extension unit 669 to the rear side of the operation presentation means 678. An inflow port 329b is formed facing forward on the rear wall side of this lower tray 329, through which game balls flow in from the upper tray 328. The inflow port 329b is positioned offset toward the rear of the operation presentation means 678 from the lower tray opening 329a.

In the lower tray 329 configured in this way, compared to conventional designs that only extend to the vicinity of the left side of the operation presentation means 678, it is possible to store surplus balls in the rear part of the operation presentation means 678, and sufficient storage of surplus balls can be ensured. In addition, since the inlet 329b of the upper tray 328 is offset to the rear side of the operation presentation means 678, game balls that flow into the lower tray 329 from this inlet 329b can be efficiently stored from the very back of the lower tray 329.

As shown in FIG. 117, the upper tray 328 is open on the upper surface side of the front extension unit 669 and extends from near the hinges 303, 307 to the rear side of the operation presentation means 678, and supplies game balls to the ball sending means 680 via the supply passage 328a on the rear side of the operation presentation means 678.

The handle recess 787b is provided with a holding tube 330a that holds the firing handle 330 so that it can be rotated, and the firing handle 330 that protrudes forward from the handle recess 787b is attached to the holding tube 330a so that it can be rotated. The firing handle 330 is positioned higher than the bottom surface of the front extension unit 669.

As shown in FIG. 117, on the upper surface side of the front extension unit 669, a flat first operation panel section 782 is provided between the operation means arrangement section 785, the upper tray 328, and the front upper edge section 786a, and a flat second operation panel section 783 is provided between the operation means arrangement section 785 and the lower speaker 667b. A cross operation means 789, a volume control means 790, and a light amount control means 791 are provided on the first operation panel section 782.

The cross operation means 789 includes an up operation key 789a, a down operation key 789b, a left operation key 789c, and a right operation key 789d arranged on a switch board 792 below the first operation panel section 782 in the front, rear, left and right directions.

When the player presses the operation presentation means 678 during the menu operation possible period in the customer waiting state, the cross operation means 789 is used to display a menu image on the image display means 393, and the player can then use the up operation key 789a, down operation key 789b, left operation key 789c, or right operation key 789d to select and execute one of the options on the menu image.

The volume adjustment means 790 is for adjusting the volume of each speaker 325a, 666a, 666b, 667a, 667b, and is equipped with an up operation key 790a and a down operation key 790b arranged at the front and rear. When the up operation key 790a is pressed during the volume adjustment period, the volume of each speaker 325a, 666a, 666b, 667a, 667b increases, and when the down operation key 790b is pressed, the volume of each speaker 325a, 666a, 666b, 667a, 667b decreases.

The light intensity adjustment means 791 is for adjusting the light intensity of each of the LEDs 716, 720, 747, and 753, and is equipped with an up operation key 791a and a down operation key 791b arranged at the front and rear. When the up operation key 791a is pressed during the period when the light intensity can be adjusted, the light intensity of each of the LEDs 716, 720, 747, and 753 increases, and when the down operation key 791b is pressed, the light intensity of each of the LEDs 716, 720, 747, and 753 decreases.

The four operation keys 789a to 789d of the cross operation means 789, the two operation keys 790a, 790b of the volume control means 790, and the two operation keys 791a, 791b of the light intensity control means 791 are connected in parallel by a wiring pattern on the switch board 792, and are configured to transmit each signal in parallel at one byte to the receiving side via a harness from the connector on the underside of the switch board 792.

The four operation keys 789a to 789d of the cross operation means 789, the two operation keys 790a and 790b of the volume adjustment means 790, and the two operation keys 791a and 791b of the light intensity adjustment means 791 may transmit signals individually. The switch board 792 is fixed to a board case (not shown), and the board case is removably fixed to the underside of the first operation panel section 782 with screws or the like.

The second operation panel section 783 is provided with a ball lending operation means 788a for issuing a ball lending command to the ball lending machine, a return operation means 788b for issuing a return command to the ball lending machine to return the inserted valuable card, and a ball removal operation means 788c for removing game balls from the lower tray 329 downward. When pressed, the ball removal operation means 788c opens the ball removal hole in the upper tray 328, and removes the game balls from the upper tray 328 into the lower tray 329.

When the front door 306 is closed toward the front frame 302, as shown in FIG. 120, the abutment wall 698 on the outer periphery of the rear end of the front door 306 abuts against the outer periphery of the front end of the front frame 302. The bottom wall 793 of the front extension unit 669 is formed by the lower part of the lower decorative cover 331, and has a horizontal portion 793a that is continuous with the lower end surface of the front door 306, and an inclined portion 793b that slopes upward from the front end of the horizontal portion 793a.

The lower front end of the inclined portion 793b of the front extension unit 669 is a front support portion 794 that comes into contact with the ground when the pachinko machine 300 is temporarily placed on the floor surface F in an upright position, and works together with the main body support portion 795 on the front side of the outer frame 301 to enable the pachinko machine 300 on the floor surface F to be stood up in a forward-inclined position.

The main body support part 795 corresponds to approximately the left-right width of the lower front end part of the outer frame 301, and the front support part 794 is located in front of the main body support part 795 and approximately in the center of the front extension unit 669 in the left-right direction in a plan view, and is provided corresponding to approximately the lower side of the operation performance means 678.

When the pachinko machine 300 is temporarily placed in an upright position on a floor surface F or the like, the first support portion 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 of the outer frame 301 and the second support portion 646 of the decorative member 310 are generally placed on the floor surface F or the like to allow the machine to stand approximately upright. However, when the pachinko machine 300 is tilted forward with the front end side of the main body support portion 795 as a fulcrum, as shown in FIG. 144, the front support portion 794 at the lower front end side of the inclined portion 793b comes into contact with the ground, and the main body support portion 795 and the front support portion 794 work together to support the pachinko machine 300 in a forward tilted position.

As a result, it is sufficient that the center of gravity of the pachinko machine 300 is located forward of the main body support part 795 and within the range of the triangle in plan view formed by the lines connecting the left and right ends of the main body support part 795 and the front support part 794, so that the maximum range can be secured to be sufficiently large. Therefore, compared to a case where the first support part 645 of the lower horizontal frame member 344 and the second support part 646 of the decorative member 310 are grounded and held in an upright position, the stability of the pachinko machine 300 is improved and it does not tip unstably left and right or front and rear.

In recent years, pachinko machines 300 tend to have larger and heavier rear mechanisms such as the image display means 393 and circuit board case attached to the rear side of the game board 313. However, even in such cases, the front support section 794 on the front end side of the inclined section 793b is positioned sufficiently higher than the horizontal section 793a, so that the pachinko machine 300 takes a forward-leaning position that is sufficiently inclined forward, thereby improving the stability of the pachinko machine 300.

As shown in FIG. 144, the front support portion 794 is provided at a height such that when the pachinko machine 300 is tilted forward, the lower plate 329 below the front extension unit 669, or other components such as the launch handle 330 located on the lower side nearby, do not come into contact with the ground or floor surface F, etc.

The horizontal portion 793a is provided with an extraction port 675 for removing game balls from the lower tray 329 downward. The extraction port 675 is connected to the extraction portion of the lower tray 329, and opens when the ball removal operation means 676 on the front side of the lower tray 329 is operated in the removal direction, making it possible to remove the game balls in the lower tray 329 into a receiving box 796d on the receiving platform 796c of the island equipment 796a.

The horizontal portion 793a is approximately half the total projection from the front door 306 to the front end of the operating means arrangement portion 785, and is approximately flush with the bottom surface of the front door 306. The inclined portion 793b is provided in an upwardly sloping manner from the front side of the horizontal portion 793a, so that the receiving box 796d can be easily inserted and removed from the bottom side of the front extension unit 669, as shown in FIG. 109.

In other words, if there was no inclined portion 793b on the underside of the front extension unit 669, when inserting or removing the receiving box 796d onto or from the receiving stand 796c, the gap between the front extension unit 669 and the receiving stand 796c would be narrow, making it very cumbersome to insert or remove the receiving box 796d onto or from the underside of the front extension unit 669. However, by providing an inclined portion 793b that slopes upward toward the front on the front side of the bottom wall 793 of the front extension unit 669, the front lower side of the front extension unit 669 becomes open, which has the advantage of making it easier to insert or remove the receiving box 796d onto or from the receiving stand 796c, and to handle it in other ways.

The front support portion 794 of the front extension unit 669 only needs to be higher than the horizontal portion 793a on the rear end side that is continuous with the bottom end surface of the front door 306, and does not need to be the front end of the inclined portion 793b. For example, if the front lower portion of the front extension unit 669 is structured to be the front support portion 794, the rear side of the front support portion 794 may be structured to be lower while having a stepped or other shape.

The upper plate 328 and lower decorative cover 331 that make up the upper surface of the front extension unit 669 are entirely made of a synthetic resin material with light-blocking properties. The lower decorative cover 331 has an opening 797 formed around the operating means arrangement section 785, spanning from its upper surface side to the front center, and a peripheral cover 798 is provided to cover the opening 797 from above and the front.

As shown in Figures 108, 109, 111, 116, 117, 145, etc., the peripheral cover 798 includes a front cover portion (front see-through portion) 799 that is arranged in front of the operation and presentation means 678 so that the operation and presentation means 678 can be seen through, and an upper cover portion 800 that is provided on the rear side from both the left and right sides of the operation and presentation means 678.

As shown in Figures 109, 116, 117, 145 to 147, etc., the peripheral cover 798 has a circular opening 801 between the front cover part 799 and the upper cover part 800 through which the operation part 738b of the operation performance means 678 protrudes upward, and a reflection prevention means 804 is provided on the upper cover part 800 to prevent light from the operation performance means 678 from being reflected on the glass plate 671a side of the glass unit 340.

The front cover part 799 is made of a transparent synthetic resin with optical transparency, and is formed in a roughly U-shape when viewed from the front, protruding in a roughly arc shape from the front vicinity of the operation performance means 678 to the front lower side, with a diffuse reflection part 799b formed on the back side of the outer periphery 799a of the roughly U-shape when viewed from the front. Meanwhile, the front wall part of the lower decorative cover 331 is provided with a roughly U-shaped recess 802 when viewed from the front into which the front cover part 799 fits, and the diffuse reflection part 802b overlaps with the step part 802a on the rear inner periphery side of the recess 802. The front cover part 799 is made of a colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin, and has a see-through part 799c through which the operation performance means 678 can be seen from the front.

The upper cover part 800 is made of an opaque synthetic resin with no optical transparency, and includes a peripheral wall part 800a formed in a range from the rear side of the operation performance means 678 through both sides to the left and right upper sides of the front cover part 799, and a pair of left and right protrusions 800b protruding to both sides from the front side of the peripheral wall part 800a. The peripheral wall part 800a rises from near the front edge of the upper tray 328 along the operation part 738b side of the operation performance means 678. The left and right protrusions 800b are integral with the peripheral wall part 800a or are separate, and one of the protrusions 800b is provided with the first operation panel part 782, and the other protrusion 800b is a cover part that covers the rotation drive means 810 described later of the operation performance means 678. The lower rear end of the upper cover part 800 is inserted into the front edge side recess of the upper tray 328.

The operation display means 678 is composed of a push-type operation means capable of lighting and moving effects, and is arranged approximately vertically (almost vertically) in the up-down direction in the operation means arrangement section 785 at the central front end of the lower decorative cover 331, and is removably fixed onto a sheet metal receiving base 803 that protrudes forward from the door base 322.

As shown in Figures 145 to 155, this operation performance means 678 includes a fixed support frame 805 fixed on a receiving base 803, a fixed support member 824 having both ends fixed to the fixed support frame 805, a first rotating body (inner rotating body) 807 supported rotatably around a horizontal axis via first rotating support means 806 on both the left and right sides of this fixed support member 824, a second rotating body (outer rotating body) 809 supported rotatably around a horizontal axis via second rotating support means 808 on both the left and right sides that are approximately concentric with the first rotating support means 806, and a rotation drive means 810 that rotates and drives the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 in opposite directions via one of the first rotating support means 806 and the second rotating support means 808. , a light emitting means 811 that passes through the first rotating support means 806 and is fixed to the fixed support frame 805 and emits light upward within the first rotating body 807, a reflection means 812 that is fixed upward on the fixed support frame 805 below the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809, a performance button (push operation body) 813 that visibly covers the rotation state of the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 inside and the light emitting state of the light emitting means 811 and is supported by the fixed support frame 805 so that it can be pressed, a vibration generating means 815 that is attached to the fixed support frame 805 via a buffer means 814 and vibrates the performance button 813, and a reflection means 812 that reflects light from the light emitting means 811 upward.

The operation portion 813a of the effect button 813 protrudes upward from the opening 801 of the peripheral cover 798, and is arranged overlapping the lower side of the play area 323 of the game board 313 from front to back when viewed from the front. The first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 constitute a rotation effect means or a movable effect means. Also, only one of the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 may be used.

The fixed support frame 805 is composed of an upper support frame 816 and a lower support frame 817 made of sheet metal joined together vertically, and the lower support frame 817 is fixed to the receiving base 803 with screws or the like. The upper support frame 816 has a pair of vertical support parts 816a arranged opposite each other on the left and right sides of the performance button 813, and a connecting part 816b that connects the lower ends of the vertical support parts 816a to the left and right.

The lower support frame 817 includes a connecting portion 817a that is connected to the lower side of the connecting portion 816b of the upper support frame 816, a pair of fixed legs 817b that bend downward from both the left and right sides of the connecting portion 817a and have their lower ends fixed onto the receiving base 803, a pair of front and rear lower support portions 817c that bend downward from both the front and rear sides of the connecting portion 817a to an intermediate height, and abutment legs 817d that bend downward from each lower support portion 817c and abut on the receiving base 803.

The performance button 813 is a push button type made of colorless transparent or colored transparent synthetic resin with optical transparency, and is integrally equipped with a body 813b configured in a roughly cylindrical shape in the vertical direction, a circumferential groove 813c formed facing upward on the upper end side of this body 813b, and an operating part 813a that protrudes upward from the circumferential groove 813c and is curved into a spherical shape, and the lower end of the body 813b is detachably fixed to a lifting body 813d and a reinforcing plate 813e below it.

The performance button 813 can move up and down between a standby position (raised position) U where the lifting body 813d abuts against the underside of the reflector 812a of the reflector 812, and a pressed-in position D where the reinforcing plate 813e abuts against or is close to the buffer means 814 on the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817, and is supported on the standby position U side by a plurality of biasing means 822 interposed between the reinforcing plate 813e and the lower support portion 817c of the lower support frame 817.

The operation unit 813a is formed in a roughly spherical or dome shape so that the entire performance button 813 can have sufficient strength. The central portion of the top side of the operation unit 813a is the pressing area 813f, and the inner surface of the pressing area 813f is formed with a display unit 813g that displays "PUSH" or the like by embossing or the like.

This is to minimize distortion that occurs in the peripheral portion of the display unit 813g due to the load applied to the operation unit 813a itself when the pressing portion 813f of the operation unit 813a is pressed, and in combination with the fact that the operation unit 813a is substantially spherical, the durability of the operation unit 813a is improved. Note that the pressing portion 813f of the operation unit 813a may be substantially flat.

As shown in Figures 145 to 147, 149, and 150, an insertion prevention means 818 that prevents the insertion of unauthorized members is provided on the outer periphery of the operation part 813a of the performance button 813. This insertion prevention means 818 includes a circumferential groove 813c formed on the outer periphery of the operation part 813a of the performance button 813, and an insertion prevention cover 818a that is disposed inside the peripheral cover 798 and fits onto the outer periphery of the operation part 813a of the performance button 813 above the circumferential groove 813c.

The insertion prevention cover 818a is made of a synthetic resin having optical transparency, and has a body 818b arranged on the outer periphery of the body 813b, and a prevention edge 818c that is bent inward from the upper end side of the body 818b into a ring shape and closes the circumferential groove 813c from above on the outer periphery side of the operating part 813a. The body 818b is attached to the fixed support frame 805 via attachment parts 818d on both the left and right sides.

The inner circumference of the blocking edge 818c is disposed adjacent to the outer circumference of the lower part of the spherical operating portion 813a of the performance button 813. When the performance button 813 is in the standby position U, the outer circumference of the circumferential groove portion 813c is adjacent to or abuts against the lower surface of the blocking edge 818c, and the front portion of the body portion 818b can be adjacent to or abut against the circumferential groove portion 813c from below, so that the insertion blocking means 818 is configured in a maze shape overall.

Therefore, when the performance button 813 is in the standby position U, even if an illegal member such as a piano wire is inserted through the small gap between the operation portion 813a of the performance button 813 and the blocking edge 818c of the insertion blocking cover 818a, the entry of the illegal member is blocked by the maze between the circumferential groove portion 813c and the insertion blocking cover 818a, and the illegal member cannot be inserted into the inside of the operation performance means 678 through the insertion blocking means 818.

As shown in Figures 145 to 147 and 149, front insertion prevention means 820 and rear insertion prevention means 821 for preventing the insertion of unauthorized materials are provided on both the front and rear sides of the performance button 813 between the performance button 813 and the peripheral cover 798. The front insertion prevention means 820 is composed of a receiving groove 820a formed approximately horizontally in the circumferential direction on the front upper part of the body 813b of the performance button 813, and a body part 818b of the insertion prevention cover 818a that fits freely into this receiving groove 820a from above, and is arranged in the left-right direction corresponding to the upper part of the front cover part 799.

The receiving groove 820a has a front upright portion 820b formed in a band shape in the left-right direction on its front side, and this front upright portion 820b covers the lower end side of the body portion 818b of the insertion prevention cover 818a from the front side. Therefore, the front insertion prevention means 820 forms a kind of decorative frame on the upper inner periphery side of the front cover portion 799.

The rear insertion prevention means 821 is composed of a blocking groove 821a formed in a forward downward arc shape from the rear upper side of the operating part 813a to both the left and right sides of the peripheral groove 813c, and a blocking wall 821b formed on the inside of the peripheral cover 798 and fitting freely into the blocking groove 821a from above. The blocking wall 821b protrudes downward from the inner circumference of the opening 801 of the peripheral cover 798.

By providing front insertion prevention means 820 and rear insertion prevention means 821 on both the front and rear sides of the performance button 813 in this way, when the performance button 813 is located in the standby position U, it is not possible to insert an unauthorized member from the opening 801 side of the peripheral cover 798.

As shown in Figs. 145 to 150, the body 813b of the performance button 813 has cutouts 813h formed corresponding to the pair of first and second rotation support means 806 and 808, and vertical rib-like guided parts 813i protruding outward in the left-right direction from both the front and rear of each cutout 813h. The cutouts 813h are intended to prevent interference with the first and second rotation support means 806 and 808 when the performance button 813 is operated. The guided parts 813i are located on both the front and rear of the cutout 813h, and are arranged to be freely slidable up and down between the guide parts 823a on the support body 823 on the fixed support frame 805 side, and are designed to guide the performance button 813 in the operation direction between the guide parts 823a.

The support 823 is fixed to the vertical support parts 816a on both the left and right sides of the fixed support frame 805. As shown in Figures 143 and 149, in addition to the guide part 823a, this support 823 is provided with a guided part 823b that protrudes forward in the vertical direction.

The body 813b of the effect button 813 has a generally U-shaped inner see-through portion 813j formed in correspondence with the see-through portion 799c of the front cover portion 799, and a diffuse reflection portion 813k is provided on the inner or outer circumference other than the inner see-through portion 813j. The diffuse reflection portion 813k is formed in vertical stripes, and constitutes an obstruction portion that obstructs the see-through portion by its diffuse reflection.

The performance button 813 is detachably fixed to a disk-shaped lifting body 813d at the bottom end of the body 813b, and to a metal reinforcing plate 813e that reinforces the lifting body 813d from below, using fixing means such as screws. The reinforcing plate 813e is U-shaped with a notch 813l formed that corresponds to the joint 817a of the lower support frame 817, and fixing pins 822a protruding downward are fixedly arranged on the front, back, left and right of the reinforcing plate 813e, and each of the fixing pins 822a is loosely inserted into a through hole 817e of the lower support part 817c of the lower support frame 817.

As shown in FIG. 153, the biasing means 822 includes a coil spring 822b, which fits around the fixed pin 822a and is interposed between the reinforcing plate 813e and the lower support portion 817c. On the lower support portion 817c, restricting portions 817f such as rubber are provided on the left and right sides between the front and rear fixed pins 822a, and receive the performance button 813 via the reinforcing plate 813e when the performance button 813 is pressed down to the pressed-in position D.

As shown in Figures 145 to 148, the light emitting means 811 is disposed inside the spherical first rotating body 807, and includes a disk-shaped substrate support 811a whose both ends are fixed to the fixed support frame 805 via fixed support members 824, an LED substrate 811b mounted on the upper side of the substrate support 811a, a number of LEDs (light emitters) 811c mounted facing upward on the upper surface of the LED substrate 811b, a diffusion plate 811d that diffuses the light from the LEDs 811c by diffuse reflection, and a number of LEDs (light emitters) 811e mounted facing downward on the lower front surface of the LED substrate 811b. In response to a light emission command from outside, the upward facing LEDs 811c emit light upward and the downward facing LEDs 811e emit light downward under predetermined light emission conditions, irradiating the inner circumferential surface of the first rotating body 807.

The substrate support 811a is made of a non-light-transmitting synthetic resin, and is integrally provided with cylindrical fixed support members 824 on both the left and right sides, the tip side of which is detachably fixed to the support 823 of the fixed support frame 805 by a fastener such as a screw.

As shown in Figures 145 to 148 and 154, each fixed support member 824 has a cylindrical portion 824a in the left-right direction and a mounting portion 824b with a U-shaped cross section provided on the outer end side of this cylindrical portion 824a, and each mounting portion 824b is detachably fixed to the support body 823 by a fastener 827d such as a screw. Since the mounting portion 824b of the fastener 827d has a U-shaped cross section and is open at the top, it can be attached and detached from the open side.

The LED board 811b and the diffusion plate 811d are stacked on the board support 811a and fixed in a removable manner. The upward-facing LEDs 811c are distributed over almost the entire LED board 811b, and the diffusion plate 811d is disposed opposite the upper side of the LED board 811b. The outer peripheral surface of the diffusion plate 811d is configured in a gently spheric shape, and is provided with a diffuse reflection section 811f that diffuses the light from the upward-facing LEDs 811c by diffuse reflection. The diffuse reflection section 811f has a fine reflective surface formed in a mosaic pattern, and diffuses the light from the LEDs 811c so that almost the entire surface emits light.

The downward-facing LEDs 811e are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the front peripheral portion of the LED substrate 811b, and emit light downward through holes 811g formed in the substrate support 811a. A downward-protruding semicircular partition plate 811k is provided in the substrate support 811a at the midpoint in the front-to-rear direction to prevent the light from the downward-facing LEDs 811e from diffusing rearward inside the first rotating body 807.

A connector 811h is provided on the underside of the LED board 811b, and is connected to each of the LEDs 811c and 811e via a circuit pattern. A harness 811i for the LEDs 811c and 811e from the outside is connected to the connector 811h from inside one of the cylindrical fixed support members 824 through an insertion hole 811j in the board support 811a.

In addition, the harness 811i for the LEDs 811c and 811e is inserted through the fixed support member 824, and a harness (not shown) for the second position detection means 829 (described later) is inserted across the left and right fixed support members 824.

The reflecting means 812 includes a reflecting plate 812a detachably fixed on the connecting portion 816b of the upper support frame 816 on the upper side of the lifting body 813d, and a reflecting portion (mirror portion) 812b provided in a mirror-like shape on the upper side of the reflecting plate 812a. On the outer periphery of the reflecting means 812, a surrounding wall 812c is provided outside the reflecting portion 812b to close the gap between each rotating body 807, 809 and the reflecting means 812 so that the outer periphery of the reflecting means 812 cannot be seen from the see-through portion 799c of the front cover portion 799. The surrounding wall 812c is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is provided in an upwardly expanding shape spanning from both the left and right sides of the reflecting portion 812b to the rear side. The surrounding wall 812c is formed in a wavy shape in the circumferential direction. The reflecting portion 812b may be coated in a thin film shape, or a sheet-like material may be attached.

The lifting body 813d has a cutout 813m so as not to interfere with the connecting part 816b of the upper support frame 816, and the connecting part 816b is positioned within the cutout 813m, so that it can abut against the underside of the reflecting plate 812a of the reflecting means 812.

The first rotating body 807 is approximately spherical, and as shown in Figures 145 to 148 and 151, is composed of a first hemisphere 807a and a second hemisphere 807b that are divided in two in the direction of rotation and joined together. The first and second hemispheres 807a and 807b are provided with mosaic-shaped diffuse reflection sections 807c and 807d on almost the entire inner circumferential surface, and are configured to provide different presentations, with the first hemisphere 807a being colorless and transparent and the second hemisphere 807b being colored and transparent in red.

Therefore, when the first rotating body 807 rotates around the left-right axis of the first rotating support means 806 and the internal light emitting means 811 emits light, the light from the light emitting means 811 is diffused through the diffusion plate 811d and then diffused by the diffuse reflection sections 807c, 807d on the inner circumferences of the first hemisphere 807a and the second hemisphere 807b, so that the first rotating body 807 can intermittently repeat colorless transparent emission and red emission as it rotates. Note that the first rotating body 807 may be divided into multiple parts other than two.

The first and second hemispheres 807a, 807b of the first rotating body 807 have mounting parts 807e, 807f on both the left and right sides, and the mounting parts 807e, 807f are attached to the left and right first rotating support means 806. The first rotating support means 806 has a pair of left and right first cylindrical shafts 806a rotatably fitted around the outer periphery of the cylindrical parts 824a of the left and right fixed support members 824, and a first flange part 806b integrally formed on the first cylindrical shafts 806a.

The first flange 806b abuts against the outer surfaces of the mounting parts 807e, 807f of the first and second hemispheres 807a, 807b, and the mounting parts 807e, 807fd are removably fixed to the first flange 806b with fasteners such as screws. Of the pair of left and right first cylindrical shafts 806a, the first cylindrical shaft 806a on the side of the rotary drive means 810 is longer in the axial direction than the first cylindrical shaft 806a on the opposite side, and the first driven gear 819a is removably fixed to its outer end in the axial direction, and the first flange 806b is integrally provided on the other end. The first cylindrical shaft 806a on the opposite side is shorter in the axial direction, and the first flange 806b is integrally provided on its outer end.

The second rotating body 809 is annular, and as shown in Figs. 145 to 148 and 151, is formed by joining a first half-ring 809a and a second half-ring 809b, which are divided in two in the rotational direction, and is supported by a second rotation support means 808 on the outer periphery of the first rotating body 807 so as to be rotatable around the axis. The first and second half-rings 809a and 809b have half-split boss-shaped mounting parts 809c and 809d provided on both the left and right ends, and divided parts 809e and 809f provided in the middle between the mounting parts 809c and 809d and divided into multiple parts in the circumferential direction around the axis. The second rotating body 809 has light-shielding properties and is decorated with metal plating or the like. The second rotating body 809 may also be divided into multiple parts other than two parts.

The first and second semi-ring bodies 809a, 809b of the second rotating body 809 are supported by second rotating support means 808 on both the left and right sides at the mounting parts 809c, 809d on both the left and right sides. The second rotating support means 808 has a pair of second cylindrical shafts 808a on the left and right sides and a second flange part 808b integrally provided on the second cylindrical shafts 808a. The second flange part 808b abuts against the mounting parts 809c, 809d of the first and second semi-ring bodies 809a, 809b from the outside, and the mounting parts 809c, 809d are detachably fixed to the second flange part 808b by a fastener such as a screw.

Of the pair of left and right second cylindrical shafts 808a, the second cylindrical shaft 808a on the side of the rotary drive means 810 is longer in the axial direction than the second cylindrical shaft 808a on the opposite side. The second cylindrical shaft 808a on the side of the rotary drive means 810 is integrally provided with a second flange 808b on its inner end and a second driven gear 819b on its outer end, and is rotatably fitted around the axis of the first rotary support means 806 between the first driven gear 819a and the first flange 806b. The second flange 808b is integrally provided on the opposite side of the second cylindrical shaft 808a, and is rotatably fitted around the axis on the cylindrical part 824a of the fixed support member 824 outside the first cylindrical shaft 806a.

As shown in Figures 152, 154, and 155, the rotary drive means 810 includes a drive motor 810a as a drive source, and a gear train 819 that rotates the first rotary body 807 and the second rotary body 809 in opposite directions via the first rotary support means 806 and the second rotary support means 808 by the drive of the drive motor 810a. The drive motor 810a is composed of a stepping motor or other motor, and is attached to the outside of the lower mounting plate 826 of the support body 823 fixed to the vertical support part 816a of the upper support frame 816.

The drive shaft 810b of the drive motor 810a penetrates the inside of the mounting plate 826 and is linked to a gear train 819 arranged on the inside of the support 823. The gear train 819 includes a drive gear 819c fixed to the drive shaft 810b, a first driven gear 819a on the first rotation support means 806 side meshing with the drive gear 819c, an intermediate gear 819d meshing with the drive gear 819c, and a second driven gear 819b on the second rotation support means 808 side meshing with the intermediate gear 819d. The intermediate gear 819d is rotatably fitted on an intermediate shaft 819e integral with the support 823. The support 823 is provided with a protective cover 819f that surrounds the outer periphery of the gear train 819.

As shown in Figures 154 and 155, the support 823 on the side of the rotary drive means 810 has a support recess 823c on the upper side into which the mounting portion 824b of the fixed support member 824 is fitted, and the mounting portion 824b is removably fixed in the support recess 823c via a reinforcing means 827 arranged in the mounting portion 824b.

The reinforcing means 827 reinforces the mounting portion 824b of the fixed support member 824 on the rotary drive means 810 side so that even if an external force is applied to the mounting portion 824b side of the fixed support member 824 while the rotary drive means 810 is driving each of the rotating bodies 807, 809 via the gear train 819, the mounting portion 824b can sufficiently resist the external force.

Therefore, by reinforcing the mounting portion 824b with the reinforcing means 827, it is possible to prevent distortion, deformation, etc. of the mounting portion 824b when the rotating bodies 807, 809 are rotated by the rotary drive means 810, and it is possible to prevent the gear train 819 from coming off, the loss of synchronization in the meshing state, etc.

The reinforcing means 827 includes a reinforcing member 827a made of sheet metal bent along the inner shape of the mounting portion 824b, a pressing portion 827b that protrudes from the upper end of the reinforcing member 827a on both the front and rear sides and presses both the front and rear sides of the mounting portion 824b, which has a U-shaped cross section, from above, and a pressing member 827c that is disposed within the reinforcing member 827a. The mounting portion 824b of the fixed support member 824 is pressed against the support recess 823c of the support 823 by a fastener 827d such as a screw that penetrates the pressing member 827c and screws into the fixing portion 823d of the support 823, thereby reinforcing the mounting portion 824b.

The reinforcing member 827a and the pressing member 827c are larger than the left-right length of the mounting portion 824b of the fixed support member 824, which has a U-shaped cross section, and their tips are inserted into the cylindrical portion 824a of the fixed support member 824. The pressing member 827c has a chamfered insertion portion 827e for forming a harness insertion portion between the end side of the cylindrical portion 824a and the holding member 827c so as not to damage the harness 811i in the cylindrical portion 824a of the fixed support member 824. The length of the reinforcing member 827a and the pressing member 827c may be approximately the same as or slightly longer than the left-right length of the mounting portion 824b. Of course, the length of the reinforcing member 827a and the pressing member 827c may be slightly shorter than the length of the mounting portion 824b.

Between the support 823 on the rotary drive means 810 side and the first rotary support means 806, two first position detection means 828a, 828b are provided on both the front and rear sides of the fixed support member 824 to detect the position of the first rotating body 807.

The first position detection means 828a, 828b are equipped with first detection switches 828c, 828d of a contactless type, such as a photosensor, fixed to the support 823, and first detectable parts 828e, 828f fixed to the first and second driven gears 819a, 819b corresponding to the first detection switches 828c, 828d. During the moving performance caused by the rotation of the first rotating body 807, the rotational position of the first rotating body 807 is detected by the first position detection means 828a, 828b every time the first rotating body 807 makes a half rotation. Note that the first rotating body 807 is normally stopped with the colorless and transparent first hemisphere 807a facing upwards.

Between the support 823 on the opposite side of the rotation drive means 810 and the second rotation support means 808, a second position detection means 829 for detecting the position of the second rotating body 809 is provided. This second position detection means 829 is equipped with a contactless second detection switch 829a such as a photosensor fixed to the support 823, and a second detectable part 829b fixed to the second rotation support means 808 corresponding to this second detection switch 829a, and is configured to detect the second rotating body 809 for each rotation during a moving performance caused by the rotation of the second rotating body 809. The second rotating body 809 is stopped in a state where the first and second semi-ring bodies 809a, 809b are approximately horizontal and located on both the front and rear sides of the first hemisphere 807a.

By configuring the left and right mounting parts 824b of the fixed support member 824 in this way with a U-shaped cross section, a fixing device 827d can be inserted into the mounting parts 824b from above and fixed while operating the fixing device 827d from above with a tool or the like, so that both left and right ends of the fixed support member 824 can be easily fixed to each support 823. In addition, on the rotation drive means 810 side, by providing a reinforcing means 827 that reinforces the U-shaped cross-sectional mounting parts 824b from the inside and fixes them to the support 823, it is possible to prevent buckling of the U-shaped cross-sectional mounting parts 824b and other distortions and deformations, even if an abnormal external force is applied to the mounting parts 824b during rotation of each rotating body 807, 809.

Therefore, if buckling or the like occurs on the mounting portion 824b of the fixed support member 824 on the rotary drive means 810 side, the synchronization of the rotating bodies 807, 809 may be disturbed due to loss of synchronization, which causes the meshing state of the gear train 819 to be disturbed. However, even though the mounting portion 824b has a U-shaped cross section, the occurrence of such a problem can be reliably prevented.

A relay board mounting base 830a is provided across the mounting plate 826 of the support 823 on the rotary drive means 810 side and the abutment leg 817d of the lower support frame 817, and a relay board 830b is attached to this relay board mounting base 830a. In addition to a connector for an external circuit, the relay board 830b is provided with a connector for the drive motor 810a, a connector for the first position detection means 828a, 828b, a connector for an LED, a connector for the second position detection means 829, a connector for the vibration generation means 815, and the like, and the drive motor 810a, each position detection means 828a, 828b, 829, LED, vibration generation means 815, and the like on the operation performance means 678 side are connected to the external performance control means via this relay board 830b.

The vibration generating means 815 is for vibrating the performance button 813 in the front-back and left-right directions, and is equipped with a synthetic resin vibrating body 815a attached to the lower side of the lower support part 817c of the lower support frame 817 via a buffer means 814, a vibration motor 815b housed in the vibrating body 815a, and an eccentric weight 815d fixed to the rotating shaft 815c of the vibration motor 815b, and transmits the vibration of the vibrating body 815a to the performance button 813 via the vibration transmission means 831. The vibration motor 815b is attached to the vibrating body 815a from below via a mounting base 815e.

The vibrating body 815a is attached to the underside of the lower support part 817c of the lower support frame 817 via a buffer 814c, and a buffer means 814 is provided to absorb the vibration of the vibrating body 815a as much as possible and prevent it from being transmitted to the lower support frame 817.

As shown in FIG. 157, this buffer means 814 is arranged at both ends of the vibrating body 815a, and includes a gripping edge 814b formed in the cutout portion 814a of the vibrating body 815a, buffer bodies 814c such as rubber on both the top and bottom of this gripping edge 814b, a support pin 814d that protrudes downward from the lower support portion 817c and passes through the top and bottom buffer bodies 814c without contacting the gripping edge 814b, and a receiving plate 814e that is fixed to the bottom end of the support pin 814d with a screw 814g or the like and receives the buffer body 814c from below, and the buffer body 814c is interposed between the pressing portion 814f of the support pin 814d and the receiving plate 814e.

The buffer 814c has a circumferential groove 814h in the vertical middle, and the gripping edge 814b engages with the circumferential groove 814h. The buffer 814c may be divided into two, an upper part and an lower part, so that the upper and lower buffers 814c grip the gripping edge 814b.

Regardless of the structure of the buffer 814c, by appropriately selecting the material of the buffer 814c, it is possible for the buffer 814c to absorb the vibrations transmitted to the lower support frame 817 of the vibrating body 815a. Therefore, in order to absorb as much vibration as possible, it is desirable to use a soft material for the buffer 814c within a range that does not impair the stability of the support of the vibrating body 815a.

As shown in FIG. 153, the vibration transmission means 831 includes front, rear, left and right fixed pins 822a that protrude downward from the reinforcing plate 813e and are fixed, and transmission holes 831a that are formed on the vibrating body 815a side corresponding to each fixed pin 822a and through which each fixed pin 822a is inserted with a predetermined gap. The four transmission holes 831a of the vibrating body 815a are elongated holes with large gaps in a specific direction relative to the fixed pins 822a, or the gaps between the fixed pins 822a and the transmission holes 831a are different, and the conditions of each fixed pin 822a and the corresponding transmission holes 831a are different, so that the vibration in the horizontal direction of the vibrating body 815a is transmitted to the performance button 813 under different conditions for each fixed pin 822a.

Between the lifting body 813d and the lower support frame 817, an operation detection means 833 is provided that detects the pressing operation of the performance button 813. This operation detection means 833 is equipped with a non-contact type detection switch 833b such as a photosensor fixed to the lower support frame 817 via a mounting frame 833a, and a detectable part 833c that protrudes downward from the lifting body 813d in correspondence with this detection switch 833b, and is configured to detect the operation of the performance button 813 when the detectable part 833c approaches the detection switch 833b.

Between the operation performance means 678 and the operation means arrangement section 785, positioning means 834 for positioning the operation performance means 678 at the mounting position are provided at the front and rear. The positioning means 834 has positioning holes 834a formed on the underside of the receiving base 803 or the bottom wall 793 of the front extension unit 669, and positioning protrusions 834b that are arranged near the front and rear fixed legs 817b of the lower support frame 817 and are inserted into the positioning holes 834a. The fixed legs 817b are detachably fixed to the receiving base 803 from below with fasteners such as screws.

The operation means placement section 785 is provided with a shielding plate 840 that covers and shields the operation means 678 from the rear so that the internal mechanism behind the operation means 678 cannot be seen when viewed through the see-through section 799c of the front cover section 799. In addition, when the operation means 678 is inserted into the operation means placement section 785 from above, a front guide means 838 that guides the front side of the operation means 678 and a rear guide means 839 that guides the rear side of the operation means 678 are provided on both the front and rear sides.

As shown in Figures 143, 146, and 156, the shielding plate 840 is arc-shaped in plan view with a predetermined distance between it and the body 813b, and is arranged vertically behind the performance button 813 between the receiving base 803 and the front vicinity of the upper tray 328, and is fixed to the front surface of the door base 322. Note that the shielding plate 840 may be provided corresponding to the upper portion from the lifting body 813d of the performance button 813, and may correspond to at least the range that can be seen through the see-through portion 799c when the inside is seen through the see-through portion 799c of the front cover portion 799.

Therefore, even when the body 813b of the performance button 813 is seen through the see-through portion 799c of the front cover portion 799, the internal mechanism behind it cannot be seen, resulting in a good appearance. Also, at the front side of the body 813b of the performance button 813, there is a roughly U-shaped inner see-through portion 813j that corresponds to the see-through portion 799c of the front cover portion 799, but a diffuse reflection portion 813k is provided in the part of the body 813b other than the inner see-through portion 813j, and the diffuse reflection portion 813k makes it difficult to see through the shielding plate 840.

As shown in FIG. 143, the front guide means 838 is provided in the up-down direction on both the left and right sides of the front cover part 799 in front of the operating means arrangement part 785, and includes a guided part 823b that protrudes forward from the support body 823, and a groove-shaped guide part 838a that is provided on the inside of the lower decorative cover 331 and guides the guided part 823b in the up-down direction. Note that the front guide means 838 has sufficient clearance so as not to interfere with positioning by the positioning means 834.

The rear guide means 839 includes a shielding plate 840 on the rear side of the operation means arrangement section 785, a bent edge 839a that bends downward from the rear side of the lifting body 813d, and a pair of left and right guide portions 839b that are vertical protrusions that protrude rearward from both the left and right sides of the bent edge 839a. When the operation performance means 678 is inserted into the operation means arrangement section 785, the bent edge 839a or guide portions 839b are guided downward along the shielding plate 840.

When assembling the operation directing means 678 to the operation means placement section 785, the peripheral cover 798 is removed to open the top of the operation means placement section 785, and the operation directing means 678 is inserted from above into the operation means placement section 785. At this time, the operation directing means 678 is in a substantially vertical state or in a forward-inclined state with the top side tilted slightly forward, and after the guiding portion 838a of the front guiding means 838 is aligned with the guided portion 823b, the bent edge 839a or the guiding portion 839b of the rear guiding means 839 is inserted while sliding along the shielding plate 840.

While positioning the operation and performance means 678 at a predetermined mounting position of the positioning means 834, the fixed leg 817b of the operation and performance means 678 is brought into contact with the receiving base 803. Then, when the fixed leg 817b is in contact with the receiving base 803, a fastener such as a screw is inserted from the underside of the receiving base 803 to fix the fixed leg 817b to the receiving base 803.

After the operation performance means 678 is fixed on the receiving base 803, the peripheral cover 798 can be attached. In addition, an opening for operating the fixture can be provided in the bottom wall 793, and the opening can be closed after the fixture is operated.

By providing a pair of left and right front guide means 838 on the front side of the operation presentation means 678 and a rear guide means 839 on the rear side, the operation presentation means 678 can be easily and effortlessly inserted into the operation means placement section 785 even if the operation presentation means 678 is enlarged. In addition, the operation presentation means 678 can be easily removed from the operation means placement section 785.

The operation presentation means 678 configured in this way is used for operation presentations that are executed with a predetermined probability for each period during which the special symbols change. For example, when the operation presentation determination means determines an operation presentation, the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 rotate in the opposite direction according to the operation presentation pattern and stop at a predetermined operation presentation position, so that if the player operates the presentation button 813 in a specified operation mode within the effective operation period during which an operation instruction image is displayed on the image display means 393, a predetermined operation presentation is executed according to the stopping result of the special symbols after the change.

This operation presentation has three types of operation presentation patterns, the first operation presentation, the second operation presentation, and the third operation presentation, which use the rotation stop pattern of the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809. The first operation presentation is an operation presentation executed when the first rotating body 807 and the second rotating body 809 in the presentation button 813 stop at the first operation presentation position, and when the player operates the presentation button 813 in a specified operation mode (e.g., pressing once) during the operation effective period of this first operation presentation, the background color of the image display means 393 is changed to either a "blue background presentation" in which the background color is changed to blue, or a "red background presentation" in which the background color is changed to red, and in addition to changing the background color of the image display means 393, the LEDs 100a and 100b are made to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern.

The second operation effect is an operation effect that is executed when the first hemisphere 807a of the first rotating body 807 inside the effect button 813 faces upward but stops at the second operation effect position, and if the player operates the effect button 813 in a specified operation mode (e.g., pressing it once) during the effective operation period during this second operation effect, the LEDs inside the first rotating body 807 are made to blink at sequentially staggered timing in the circumferential direction.

The third operation effect is an operation effect that is executed when the second hemisphere 807b of the first rotating body 807 inside the effect button 813 stops at the third operation effect position facing upwards, and if the player operates the effect button 813 in a specified operation mode (e.g., pressing it once) within the effective operation period of this third operation effect, a button vibration effect in which the vibration generating means 815 vibrates the effect button 813 is executed with a predetermined probability according to the result of the special pattern change and the type of profit state, etc.

The first, second, and third operation effects are set in that order so that the likelihood of the special symbol changing to a specific pattern (jackpot) increases. The presentation mode during the operation performance using this operation performance means 678 is arbitrary and is not limited to the first, second, and third operation effects. The operation of the performance button 813 can be performed in a single operation mode, such as "single press," which is a single operation, "continuous press," which is a continuous operation of the performance button 813 multiple times, or "long press," which maintains the operation state of the performance button 813 for a predetermined period of time or longer.

The anti-glare means 804 is intended to prevent light from the luminescent operation and presentation means 678 from being reflected on the glass plate 671a, and is disposed between the glass plate 671a and the presentation button 813 of the operation and presentation means 678 as shown in Figs. 109, 117, 145, and 147. It has an anti-glare wall 804a formed using all or part of the peripheral wall portion 800a, and is provided across from both the left and right sides of the operation and presentation means 678 to the rear.

In the case of the operation and effect means 678 exemplified in this embodiment, the diffuse reflection parts 807c, 807d of the first rotating body 807 diffusely reflect light from the light emitting means 811 and emit light, so they constitute the uppermost light emitting part of the first rotating body 807. Therefore, assuming that the height of the eyes I of a player sitting in a chair in front of the pachinko machine 300 is the position shown in FIG. 158, even when the player looks at the operation and effect means 678 side through the glass plate 671a with his/her line of sight directed in the direction of the Z arrow from the height of the eyes I, the anti-glare means 804 blocks the player's view of the first rotating body 807 between the glass plate 671a and the first rotating body 807, so that the first rotating body 807, which is the light emitting part, does not come into the player's field of view.

The peripheral wall 800a of the upper cover 800 includes a rear cover 800c that is inclined forward to correspond to the rear side of the operation part 813a of the performance button 813, and left and right cover parts 800d that extend from both ends of the rear cover 800c toward the front cover 799, and the upper end side is formed in an inclined shape that becomes lower from the rear side of the operation performance means 678 to both the left and right sides so that the height of the rear cover 800c is higher than the left and right cover parts 800d.

The peripheral wall portion 800a, which includes the rear cover portion 800c and the left and right cover portions 800d, has a required range corresponding to the rear side of the operation portion 813a of the performance button 813, which serves as a reflection prevention wall 804a that prevents the first rotating body 807 from being reflected on the glass plate 671a, and this reflection prevention wall 804a constitutes the reflection prevention means 804.

For example, the height relationship between the apex of the first rotating body 807 and the apex of the rear cover portion 800c of the peripheral wall portion 800a is set so that, as shown in FIG. 158, at the intersection 671aa where a line segment X1 passing through the apex of the first rotating body 807 and the apex of the rear cover portion 800c intersects with the front surface of the glass plate 671a, if a line segment X2 that is point-symmetrical up and down with line segment X1 with respect to a vertical line Y perpendicular to the front surface of the glass plate 671a is considered, the player's line of sight is located within area X below the extension of line segment X2.

Therefore, even if the player lowers his or her line of sight while the first rotating body 807 is illuminated and looks at the operation and presentation means 678 through the glass plate 671a, the light from the first rotating body 807 inside the operation and presentation means 678 is blocked by the anti-reflection means 804 near the rear side, preventing the light from the first rotating body 807 from being reflected on the glass plate 671a.

Therefore, a player can easily and reliably grasp the display image displayed on the lower part of the display screen of the image display means 393 of the game board 313 during play. In addition, even if the variable winning means 404 or other important winning means is located in the reflected area or in its vicinity at the bottom of the play area 323, there is an advantage in that the status of the important winning means can be easily and reliably grasped.

Furthermore, the anti-reflection wall 804a is formed by the peripheral wall portion 800a on the outer periphery of the operation unit 813a of the operation performance means 678, and its upper edge is formed in an inclined shape that decreases from the rear cover portion 800c on the rear side of the operation unit 813a of the operation performance means 678 to the left and right cover portions 800d on both the left and right sides, so that the operability of the operation unit 813a is not impaired.

The anti-glare means 804 may be only the rear cover 800c, provided that it can prevent the operation performance means 678 from being reflected on the glass unit 340 side. The anti-glare means 804 may also be made of a synthetic resin having optical transparency, and a coating or other light-shielding portion may be provided on the surface.

In this embodiment, the operation unit 813a of the operation presentation means 678 protrudes upward from the top surface side of the lower decorative cover 331, and is positioned so that the operation unit 813a overlaps with the play area 323 in a front view. Furthermore, a reflection prevention wall 804a is positioned closer to the glass plate 671a than the operation unit 813a, at a position that overlaps with the play area 323 in a front view, and is inclined forward along the spherical operation unit 813a.

The anti-glare wall 804a has an upper end located higher than the light-emitting means 811 and the light-emitting parts such as the first rotating body 807 that emit light by diffusely reflecting the light of the light-emitting means 811 on the game board 313 side of the operation unit 813a of the operation and presentation means 678. The anti-glare wall 804a only needs to have an upper end located higher than the light-emitting parts such as the light-emitting means 811 on the game board 313 side of the operation unit 813a of the operation and presentation means 678, and lower than the operation unit 813a. However, if the operation unit 813a emits light by diffuse reflection or the like, the anti-glare wall 804a needs to be located higher than the operation unit 813a.

Even if there is a wall to prevent reflections, it is preferable not to place important game components such as the variable winning means 404 and the special symbol starting means 655 in a position corresponding to the operation unit 813a when viewed from the front of the game board 313.

In addition, in the embodiment, an operation presentation means 678 having an LED-type light-emitting means 811 is exemplified as an object where reflections become a problem, but something other than the operation presentation means 678 may also be used.

Figure 159 illustrates a sixth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in Figure 159, this pachinko machine 300 is equipped with a performance operation means 835 for performance operation, which is arranged in a forward-leaning state in the upper center part of the front extension unit 669. The performance operation means 835 includes a light-emitting operation member 836 that can be operated by pressing in the tilted direction, and an outer periphery cover 837 that holds down the outer periphery of the light-emitting operation member 836 on the front extension unit 669, and is arranged so that it overlaps the lower side of the play area 323 on the play board 313 side in the front-to-back direction via the glass unit 340.

The light-emitting operation member 836 has a flat operation section 836a with optical transparency formed at the upper end, and a diffuse reflection section 836b formed on the inner surface of the operation section 836a. An LED board 836d having an LED 836c on its upper surface is provided below the operation section 836a, and when the LED 836c emits light, the light from the LED 836c is diffusely reflected by the diffuse reflection section 836b, causing the operation section 836a to emit light.

The outer cover 837 has a peripheral wall 837a that surrounds the operating unit 836a, and the peripheral wall 837a has a front wall 837b that is in front of the operating unit 836a and a rear wall 837c that is located behind the operating unit 836a and between the operating unit 836a and the glass unit 340, and is low.

The front wall 837b of the peripheral wall 837a is low in order to facilitate operation from the front side of the operating unit 836a. Of the front wall 837b and the rear wall 837c, at least the rear wall 837c side, which is located behind the operating unit 836a, is inclined spherically forward in accordance with the shape of the operating unit 836a of the light-emitting operating member 836.

The operation unit 836a of the light-emitting operation member 836 overlaps the lower side of the play area 323 on the play board 313 side from front to back. Furthermore, in the part of the lower side of the play area 323 of the play board 313 that corresponds to the rear side of the operation unit 836a, relatively unimportant game components are arranged, such as the out ball port 842 that guides the out ball to the back side of the play board 313, but important game components such as winning means are not arranged. Note that even for the winning means, those that give a small number of winning balls when winning, such as the normal winning means 405, may be arranged.

The rear wall 837c side of the light from the LED 836c or the light from the operation unit 836a when the light from the LED 836c is emitted by diffuse reflection constitutes a reflection prevention means 804 that prevents the light from the LED 836c from being reflected on the glass plate 671a when the LED 836c emits light.

The upper end of the anti-reflection means 804 is located on the game board 313 side of the operation unit 836a, higher than the LED board 836d, and lower than the operation unit 836a. Note that the upper end of the anti-reflection means 804 may be located on the game board 313 side of the operation unit 836a, higher than the LED board 836d, and higher than the operation unit 836a.

As exemplified in this embodiment, the performance operation means 835 can also be positioned in a forward-inclined state on the upper side of the front extension unit 669. Even in this case, if the operation section 836a on the upper end side of the light-emitting operation member 836 is configured to emit light, depending on the direction and area of diffusion of the light from the operation section 836a, reflections on the glass plate 671a can be a problem, and as a countermeasure, it is necessary to provide a reflection prevention means 804.

The anti-glare means 804 can be of various structures, but by using an outer cover 837 that holds the light-emitting operation member 836, the structure can be simplified and costs can be reduced. In addition, it is desirable to position the anti-glare means 804 with its upper end close to the problematic light-emitting part, for example by providing the rear wall portion 837c in a forward-inclined state toward the operation portion 836a, thereby preventing the anti-glare means 804 from becoming too large.

The light emitting means 811 may be something other than the LED 836c, such as a seven-segment light emitting display means. The operation unit 836a may be positioned lower than the lower side of the play area 323 of the game board 313 so that it does not overlap the play area 323 of the game board 313 from the front to the rear. Furthermore, the anti-reflection means 804 may be provided separately from the outer cover 837.

Figure 160 illustrates a seventh embodiment of the present invention. As shown in Figure 160, this pachinko machine 300 is equipped with a performance operation means 835 for performance operation, which is arranged in a forward-leaning state in the upper center part of the front protruding unit 669. The performance operation means 835 includes a light-emitting operation member 836 that can be pressed in the tilted direction, and an outer periphery cover 837 that holds down the outer periphery of the light-emitting operation member 836 on the front protruding unit 669, and is arranged below the playing area 323 of the playing board 313 and the glass unit 340 in front of it.

The light-emitting operation member 836 includes a light-emitting body 836e inside the operation portion 836a, and a reflection prevention means 804 that prevents the light from the light-emitting body 836e from being reflected on the glass plate 671a of the glass unit 340 is provided on the upper surface side of the front extension unit 669. The front extension unit 669 is provided with a protrusion 669a between the light-emitting operation member 836 and the glass unit 340 that protrudes upward and blocks light from the light-emitting body 836e to the lower side of the glass unit 340, and the reflection prevention means 804 is constituted by this protrusion 669a.

In this way, it is possible to provide the anti-reflection means 804 separately from the performance operation means 835 by using a part of the front extension unit 669. Therefore, whether to provide the anti-reflection means 804 as part of the performance operation means 835 or to provide the anti-reflection means 804 separately from the performance operation means 835 can be determined appropriately depending on the structure of the front extension unit 669 and the performance operation means 835, etc.

Although the fifth to seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above in detail, the present invention is not limited to the fifth to seventh embodiments, and various modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. When the gaming machine is a pachinko machine 300, the gaming machine body may be composed of an outer frame 301, or may be composed of an outer frame 301 and a front frame 302. Of course, it may be composed of something other than these.

The fifth to seventh embodiments provide examples of anti-reflection measures for the pachinko machine 300, but anti-reflection measures can be implemented in a similar manner not only in pinball gaming machines such as the pachinko machine 300, but also in various gaming machines including slot machines, etc.

For example, when the gaming machine is a pachinko machine 300, as exemplified in the fifth to seventh embodiments, the gaming area 323 is the front side of the gaming board 313 attached to the gaming machine main body side such as the front frame, and reflections on the viewing plate 671a such as a glass plate placed in front of the gaming board 313 become an issue. In the case of a reel-type slot machine, a liquid crystal display type slot machine, etc., the gaming area 323 corresponds to the front side of the reels, the liquid crystal display screen, etc., and reflections on the viewing plate 671a such as a glass plate placed in front of it become an issue.

The object of preventing reflection on the viewing plate 671a is generally light from the light emitting means 811 (light emitting section) located at the front lower part of the viewing plate 671a, but the light may be light from inside the operation performance means 678 or light from the surface side. For example, if there is a glass or other mirror-like reflecting section at the front lower part of the viewing plate 671a, it is conceivable that light from an external light source will be reflected by that reflecting section toward the viewing plate 671a, and reflection of that reflected light may also be prevented.

Furthermore, as a reflection prevention means 804 for preventing light from the light emitting means 811 from being reflected on the viewing board 671a, a blocking wall that blocks light from reaching the player's field of vision is generally provided between the light emitting means 811 and the viewing board 671a, but the reflection prevention means 804 may use a part of a member associated with the light emitting means 811, or may use a separate member on the upper surface side of the front extension unit 669.

The anti-glare means 804 may completely block the light from the light emitting means 811 like a blocking wall, or it may employ a dimming means that dims the light to a weak level that does not interfere with the player's play. In this case, the light that passes through the dimming means is reflected on the viewing board 671a, but this light does not interfere with the player's play and is not a problem. Possible dimming means include one that diffuses the light from the light source, one that polarizes the light from the light source, etc. Therefore, it is sufficient for this anti-glare means 804 to dim strong light that would interfere with the player's play, but allow the reflection of weak light that does not interfere with the player's play.

The fifth embodiment also illustrates a case in which the reflection prevention means 804 prevents reflection of light from the light-emitting means 811 below the operation unit 813a. However, if the top operation unit 813a emits light due to diffuse reflection or the like, the light from the top operation unit 813a is also subject to the reflection prevention measures. However, even if the top operation unit 813a emits light due to light from within, it is not necessarily necessary to prevent reflection if the light is weak.

The anti-glare wall 804a is preferably inclined at the top toward the light-emitting means 811 in order to block the light from the light-emitting means 811, but it does not necessarily have to be inclined toward the light-emitting means 811, and may be inclined in the opposite direction. When the operating unit 813a is spherical as in the fifth embodiment, it is desirable for the shape to embrace the operating unit 813a in terms of its structure. Also, it is sufficient for the anti-glare wall 804a to be located in a narrow range directly behind the operating unit 813a, but considering that the player's posture moves left and right, it is desirable to place it in a specified range on both the left and right sides of the directly behind the operating unit 813a.

In a gaming machine equipped with a protruding unit such as the front extension unit 669, if the protruding unit is provided with a front support portion 794 at the front lower portion, the front support portion 794 may cooperate with the main body support portion 795 on the gaming machine main body to raise the gaming machine main body. In a protruding unit that is approximately triangular in plan view with the front end as the apex, such as the front extension unit 669, the front support portion 794 has a narrow left-right width, but if the front end of the protruding unit has a long left-right width, the front support portion 794 may be provided approximately in the center of the front end of the protruding unit, or on both the left and right sides. The front support portion 794 may also be provided in a strip shape that is long in the left-right direction. The front support portion 794 may be provided in the middle of the protruding unit in the front-to-rear direction.

The front support portion 794 may be provided at approximately the same height as the main body support portion 795. If the bottom wall 793 of the protruding unit is inclined upward from the front, an inclined portion 793b may be provided in front of the horizontal portion 793a, or the wall may be configured to be inclined from the rear end side.

Figures 161 to 177 illustrate an eighth embodiment of the present invention. As shown in Figures 161 to 163, the second side unit 850 of this embodiment has a vertically long right side protrusion (one of the left and right side protrusions) 851 that is located on the right side of the play area 323 and protrudes forward, and a horizontally long upper protrusion 852 that is located above the play area 323 and protrudes forward, and is generally L-shaped when viewed from the front.

As shown in Figures 164 to 174, the right protruding portion 851 is provided with first to third light-emitting display units 866, 868, and 870 and a vibration-type performance means 881, while the upper protruding portion 852 is provided with first and second light-emitting display units 867 and 869 and a ventilation performance means 855.

When viewed from the front, the second side unit 850 is shaped like roughly half of a stone-wall-style well mouth, with a narrow front and a wide interior, due to the shape of the right-side protrusion 851 and the upper protrusion 852, creating a design that gives the player the impression that they are playing the game while peering into the dark mouth of a well.

The right protrusion 851 and the upper protrusion 852 are made of a synthetic resin with light-blocking properties on almost the entire outer periphery, and the light-emitting display sections 866 to 870 that are distributed on the outer periphery are designed to emit light as needed.

As shown in Figs. 164-166 and 172-174, each protrusion 851, 852 is hollow and includes a front wall 853, 854, an inner wall 856, 857, and an outer wall 858, 859. The outer walls 858, 859, which are located on the opposite side of the play area 323 of each protrusion 851, 852, have a main portion that is substantially flat in the front-to-rear direction from the right end and top end of the front door 306, except for the connection portion 8589 of both protrusions 851, 852.

The outer walls 858, 859 of the connection 8589 of the protrusions 851, 852 are formed with an arc-shaped front side. Furthermore, inside the connection 8589 of the protrusions 851, 852, there is a storage recess 860a for receiving the upper speaker 666b attached to the door base 322, and an opening 860b for the upper speaker 666b, at the front and rear.

On the other hand, the inner walls 856, 857 arranged on the playing area 323 side of each protrusion 851, 852 are located in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the playing area 323 at their rear sides, and their front sides protrude into the inside of the playing area 323. The right protrusion 851 has a front left-right width 851a that is greater than the rear left-right width 851b, and the upper protrusion 852 has a front up-down width 852a that is greater than the rear up-down width 852b.

That is, the inner walls 856, 857 of each protrusion 851, 852 are arranged such that the rear side is positioned near the outer periphery of the play area 323 along the outer edge thereof so as not to restrict the play area 323, while the front side has inclined portions 856a, 857a that slope inward from the rear side to the front walls 853, 854 and/or bulging portions 856b, 857b that bulge inward, and the front side is positioned more inward than the rear side and protrudes into the play area 323.

In this way, the second side unit 850 has each protrusion 851, 852 with a small rear width and a large front width, so that it is possible to make the front width of each protrusion 851, 852 sufficiently thick while still ensuring a sufficient play area 323, and by appropriately selecting the uneven shapes of the inner walls 856, 857 and the front walls 853, 854, it is possible to adopt a more varied shape than with conventional flat shapes.

In particular, each protrusion 851, 852 has an inclined portion 856a, 857a that slopes toward the front wall 853, 854 and/or a bulging portion 856b, 857b on the inner wall 856, 857 on the playing area 323 side, so that player P can easily see the shaped objects on the inner wall 856 side of the right protrusion 851 and the inner wall 857 side of the upper protrusion 852 while playing, as shown in Figures 175 (a) and (b).

In addition, since the player P is surrounded by the right protrusion 851 and the upper protrusion 852 while playing, it is possible to provide a highly realistic presentation by providing the inner walls 856, 857 with a shape that harmonizes with the presentation images displayed in the play area 323 of the playboard 313, and this makes it easy to improve the design and aesthetics compared to conventional methods.

As shown in Figures 161 and 163, the second side unit 850 is provided with a reinforcing member 861 that is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the front at its rear end, and a right protrusion 851 and an upper protrusion 852 are attached to the front surface of the reinforcing member 861, and is removably fixed to the front side of the door base 322 of the front door 306 via positioning means 733, 734, locking means 735-737, and fixing means 738-740, as in the fifth embodiment. The upper protrusion 852 is structurally continuous with the upper side of the first side unit 668a.

Each protrusion 851, 852 is provided with a vertically or horizontally elongated front support 862, 863 and a rear support 864, 865 arranged at a predetermined interval in the front-to-rear direction, outer walls 858, 859 arranged on the opposite side of the play area 323 from the front supports 862, 863 and the rear supports 864, 865, inner walls 856, 857 arranged on the play area 323 side from the front supports 862, 863 and the rear supports 864, 865, and front walls 853, 854 arranged in front of the front supports 862, 863 and having a generally U-shaped cross section whose rear side fits into the outside of the outer walls 858, 859 and the inner walls 856, 857.

The outer walls 858, 859, the inner walls 856, 857, and the front walls 853, 854 are detachably fixed to the front supports 862, 863 and the rear supports 864, 865 by screws or the like. The front supports 862, 863 and the rear supports 864, 865 are provided with bosses 862c, 863c, 864c, 865c that abut on the front and rear.

Each of the protrusions 851, 852 has a first light-emitting display unit 866, 867 on its front wall 853, 854, a second light-emitting display unit 868, 869 on its inner wall 856, 857, and a third light-emitting display unit 870 on the outer wall 858 of the right protrusion 851. Inside each of the protrusions 851, 852, there are LED boards 876, 877 on the front and rear sides of which the first to third LEDs 871-875 are mounted, and arranged at the front end of each internal space, second light guide plates (second light guide means) 878, 879 arranged along the inner wall 856, 857 in correspondence with the second light-emitting display units 868, 869 on the rear side of the LED board 876, 877, and a third light guide plate (third light guide means) 880 arranged along the outer wall 858 in correspondence with the third light-emitting display unit 870 on the rear side of the LED board 876.

The third LED 875 and the third light guide plate 880 are only on the right protrusion 851. A vibration-type performance means 881 is provided on the lower part of the right protrusion 851, spanning both the inside and outside of the inner wall 856.

In this way, LED boards 876, 877 are arranged on the front side, with first LEDs 871, 872 on the front side for the first light-emitting display units 866, 867 on the front walls 853, 854 side, and second LEDs 873, 874 for the second light-emitting display units 868, 869 on the inner walls 856, 857 side and a third LED 875 for the third light-emitting display unit 870 on the outer wall 858 side are provided on the rear side of the LED boards 876, 877. The light from the second and third LEDs 873-875 is guided to the second and third light-emitting display units 868, 869, 870 through the second and third light guide plates 878, 879, 880, so that all of the first to third LEDs 871-875 can be attached to the LED boards 876, 877, resulting in a simple structure that can be easily and inexpensively implemented.

The front surface of the front walls 853, 854 is substantially flat, and first light-emitting display units 866, 867 are provided on the front surface. The first light-emitting display units 866, 867 have through holes 866a, 867a formed in the front walls 853, 854 in the front-rear direction, and light-transmitting units 866b, 867b fitted into the through holes 866a, 867a, and the light-transmitting units 866b, 867b are illuminated by light from the first LEDs 871, 872.

The first light-emitting display section 866 of the right-side protrusion 851 has a main display section 866A that displays the model name of the pachinko machine, and a decorative secondary display section 866B in the form of stripes or cracks that is arranged around it. The main display sections 866A are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the vertical direction for each character of the model name. The secondary display sections 866B are appropriately arranged around the periphery of the main display section 866A. The main display section 866A may be arranged to display the model name as a unit.

The inner walls 856, 857 and outer walls 858, 859 of each protrusion 851, 852 have a shaped protrusion 856c with a decorative pattern such as a stone wall, and a shaped recess 856d formed between the shaped protrusions 856c, as shown in the inner wall 856 of the right protrusion 851 in Figures 165 and 166. Note that the shaped protrusion 856c and the shaped recess 856d imitate the stone walls inside and outside a well, and the unevenness of the shaped protrusion 856c and the shaped recess 856d is larger on the inner wall 856, 857 side than on the outer wall 858, 859.

The inner walls 856, 857 and the outer walls 858, 859 are provided with a plurality of stripe- or crack-shaped second and third light-emitting display units 868-870 in the shaped recess 856d. Since the vibration type performance means 881 is disposed at the lower part of the inner wall 856, the second light-emitting display units 868 are disposed in a dispersed manner above and behind the vibration type performance means 881, avoiding it.

The second and third light-emitting display units 868-870 have through holes 868a-870a formed through the inner walls 856, 857 and the outer wall 858, and light-transmitting units 868b-870 fitted into the through holes 868a-870a. Light guided from the second and third LEDs 873-875 through the second and third light guide plates 878-880 causes at least a portion of each light-transmitting unit 868b-870 to emit light in the form of stripes, cracks, or other light-emitting patterns.

The front supports 862, 863 are made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin and integrally comprise front wall portions 862a, 863a arranged adjacent to the rear side of the front walls 853, 854, and peripheral wall portions 862b, 863b protruding rearward from the outer periphery of the front wall portions 862a, 863a, and light-transmitting portions 866b, 867b protruding forward are integrally provided on the front surface of the front wall portions 862a, 863a.

The light-transmitting portion 866b of the main display portion 866A is hollow with a recess formed on the rear side, and a diffuse reflection portion is provided on the front side of the recess. A diffuse reflection portion and a protruding wall surrounding this diffuse reflection portion are provided corresponding to the light-transmitting portion 866b of the sub-display portion 866B. Note that the light-transmitting portions of the main display portion 866A and the sub-display portion 866B may be solid, or may be hollow with a recess on the back side.

The LED boards 876, 877 are removably fixed to the front supports 862, 863 by abutting against the rear ends of the peripheral walls 862b, 863b. A plurality of first LEDs 871, 872 are attached to the front surface of the LED boards 876, 877 in correspondence with the first light-emitting display units 866, 867 so as to irradiate the first light-emitting display units 866, 867 with light from behind.

In addition, a plurality of second LEDs 873, 874 are attached to the back surface of the LED boards 876, 877 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction along the edge so as to face the light receiving units 878a, 879a at the front ends of the second light guide plates 878, 879. A plurality of third LEDs 875 are attached to the back surface of the LED board 876 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction along the edge so as to face the light receiving unit 880a at the front end of the third light guide plate 880.

By mounting the first to third LEDs 871 to 875 on the LED boards 876, 877 in this way, the number of LED boards 876, 877 can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the second and third LEDs 873 to 875 at the ends of the LED boards 876, 877, it is possible to arrange the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880 close to the inner walls 856, 857 and the outer walls 858, 859, and it is possible to simplify the structure of the second and third light guide plates 878 to 880.

A partition 882 is interposed between the LED board 876 and the front wall 862a of the front support 862. This partition 882 has a partition wall 882a that separates each main display portion 866A of the first light-emitting display portion 866 from the surrounding sub-display portions 866B, etc., and is designed to prevent light from the first LED 871 corresponding to the main display portion 866A from diffusing to any portion other than the main display portion 866A. Therefore, in the first light-emitting display portion 866, it is possible to make the main display portion 866A emit light more brightly than the sub-display portion 866B.

The partition 882 is removably fixed to either the LED board 876 or the front support 862 with screws or the like, and both front and rear ends of the partition wall 882a abut against or are close to the LED board 876 and the front wall portion 862a.

Since the front support 862 and the partition 882 are vertically long, the LED board 876, which is arranged vertically in response to them, is divided into two vertically, and the opposing ends are connected via a connector or the like. The partition 882 is attached to the rear side of the front support 862, and the LED board 876 is attached to the rear side of the front support 862 across the partition 882. The LED board 876 may be integrated vertically, or may be divided vertically into three or more parts.

The second and third light guide plates 878-880 are made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin, are molded in a curved shape along the overall curved shape of the inner and outer walls 856-859 so as to abut or be close to the inner surface of the shaped recess 856d of the inner and outer walls 856-859, and are detachably fixed to the inside of the inner and outer walls 856-859 with screws or the like. The second and third light guide plates 878-880 are provided with light receiving sections 878a-880a at the front end side facing the second and third LEDs 873-875, and the inner and outer walls 856-859 are provided with second and third light transmitting sections 868b-870b for the second and third light emitting display sections 868-870 on one side and second and third light guiding sections 883-885 on the other side on the opposite side, corresponding to each other on the front and back, respectively. The second and third light guides 883-885 have shapes that include bent portions according to the shapes of the second and third light emitting display units 868-870, and the depth and width of the V grooves vary depending on the position.

The second and third light transmitting sections 868b-870b for the second and third light emitting display sections 868-870 are formed by ridges that protrude integrally from the second and third light guide plates 878-880 to the inner and outer walls 856-859. The second and third light guiding sections 883-885 are for guiding the light that enters the second and third light guide plates 878-880 from the second and third LEDs 873-875 through the light receiving sections 878a-880a to the second and third light transmitting sections 868b-870b of the second and third light emitting display sections 868-870, and are formed by reflective grooves (reflective sections) such as V grooves formed in the second and third light guide plates 878-880.

For example, as shown in FIG. 166, the second light guide plate 878 has a corresponding region 878aa in the vertical direction corresponding to the light receiving portion 878a on the front end side, and a protruding region 878ab that protrudes from the corresponding region 878aa on both the top and bottom or one of the top and bottom, and the second light emitting display portion 868 is provided on the rear side of the second light guide plate 878 so as to protrude from both the top and bottom or one of the top and bottom, straddling both regions 878aa, 878ab.

Therefore, the second light guide plate 878 is configured to guide light from the second LED 873 to the second light emitting display unit 868 in the corresponding area 878aa that corresponds to the light receiving unit 878a, as well as to guide light to the second light emitting display unit 868 disposed in the protruding area 878ab away from the corresponding area 878aa on either side or both sides in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 176, when viewed from the plate thickness direction of the second light guide plate 878, the second light guide section 883 is bent and includes a right angle section 883b that is approximately perpendicular to the optical axis direction of the second LED 873, and an inclined or bent section 883a that is inclined or bent in the three-dimensional directions of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis.

For example, as shown in FIG. 176, when parallel light rays are incident on the second light-guiding section 883 from the second LED 873, the light incident on the right-angled section 883b of the second light-guiding section 883 in the direction indicated by the arrow 883b1 is reflected at the right-angled section 883b in the direction indicated by the arrow 883b2 in the plate thickness direction at a substantially right angle, as shown in FIG. 177(a). Therefore, the portion of the second light-emitting display section 868 corresponding to the right-angled section 883b can be made to emit light brightly.

At the same time, the light in the 883a1 direction incident on the inclined or bent portion 883a of the second light guide portion 883 is reflected in the 883a2 direction in the three-dimensional direction of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis according to the inclined or bent surface of the inclined or bent portion 883a, as shown in Figures 176 and 177 (b). Therefore, the light is reflected by diffuse reflection or the like to the second light-emitting display portion 868 corresponding to the second light guide portion 883 and the plate thickness direction to emit light, while the light is reflected once or multiple times within the plate thickness of the second light guide plate 878 in the plate surface direction and guided in the plate surface direction, causing a specific portion of the second light-emitting display portion 868 at the position where the light reaches to partially emit light in a line or other light-emitting manner.

As shown in particular in Figures 176 and 177(b), when light entering the second light guide plate 878 in the direction indicated by the arrow 883a1 is reflected by the V-groove-shaped inclined or bent portion 883a, the inclined or bent portion 883a is inclined or bent in a three-dimensional direction relative to the optical axis, so the light is reflected by the inclined or bent portion 883a in the direction of 883a2 within the second light guide plate 878.

This light is then reflected once or multiple times within the second light guide plate 878 and sequentially guided to the second light guide section 883 corresponding to the specific portion of the second light-emitting display section 868, where it is reflected to the specific portion of the second light-emitting display section 868, causing that specific portion to emit light. Therefore, the portion of the second light-emitting display section 868 that is irradiated with light reflected in a three-dimensional direction by the inclined or bent section 883a can be made to emit a faint light with a low brightness.

In this way, the second and third light-emitting display units 868-870 can change their light-emitting state depending on the light-emitting position. Therefore, compared to when the second and third light-emitting display units 868-870 emit light with approximately equal brightness, it is possible to create a light-emitting effect that is suitable for the structures on the inner and outer walls 856-859 by varying the intensity of the light-emitting state. Also, even if there is an obstacle such as a vibration-type performance means 881, the light from the second LED 873 can be guided around the obstacle, which has the advantage of simplifying the structure.

The multiple second light guides 883 around the vibration type performance means 881 are arranged in the circumferential direction along the plate surface direction of the second light guide plate 878 so as to guide light to the second light emitting display unit 868 behind the vibration type performance means 881. In addition to configuring the second light guides 883 in a curved shape, the second light guide plate 878 may be configured in a curved shape between the light receiving unit 878a and the second light emitting display unit 868 to be guided, and the light may be guided while being reflected multiple times in the plate thickness direction within the second light guide plate 878. This can also be implemented in the second and third light emitting display units 869 and 870.

As shown in Figures 167 to 171, the vibration type presentation means 881 comprises a mounting base 888 attached from the inside of the opening 860b at the bottom of the inner wall 856, a presentation body 890 arranged on the playing area 323 side of the mounting base 888 and pivoted so as to be vibrated in the front-to-rear direction around a vertical support shaft 889, a vibration means 891 for the presentation body 890 arranged on the inside of the mounting base 888, a light-emitting display unit 892 provided on the mounting base 888, an LED board 894 having LEDs 893 for the light-emitting display unit 892 and arranged on the inside of the mounting base 888, and a touch sensor 895 attached to the inside of the mounting base 888.

The performance body 890 is shaped like fingers and is positioned with the fingers at the front, and its bracket 890b is pivotally attached to the bearing portion 888a of the mounting base 888 by a support shaft 889 on the back side of the mounting base 888, and can vibrate left and right around the support shaft 889. The performance body 890 has a conductor layer 890a on its surface, such as by metal plating. Note that instead of the conductor layer 890a, such as metal plating, a conductor such as metal may be provided on part of the surface.

The vibration means 891 includes a vibration table 896, a vibration motor 897 fixed to the vibration table 896 via an attachment 897a, and an eccentric weight 899 fixed to a rotation shaft 898 in the forward and backward direction of the vibration motor 897. When the eccentric weight 899 rotates around the rotation shaft 898, the vibration table 896 vibrates forward and backward.

The vibration table 896 is U-shaped so as to straddle the LED boards 894 arranged vertically, and its front and rear legs 896a are integrally connected to the performance body 890 via a pair of vertical connecting shafts 900 in the front-rear direction. The vibration of the vibration table 896 in the vertical direction is regulated by a support shaft 889. The connecting shaft 900 is inserted into a through hole 901 in the mounting base 888.

Between the mounting base 888 and the vibration table 896, a biasing means 902 is provided that biases the performance body 890 toward the mounting base 888. This biasing means 902 includes a fixed shaft 893b that protrudes from the mounting base 888 toward the vibration table 896 and is inserted into a through hole 893a in the leg 896b, and a spring 893c that is fitted onto the fixed shaft 893b and is interposed between the mounting base 888 and the vibration table 896.

The light-emitting display units 892 are arranged to sandwich the finger portion of the performance body 890 from both the top and bottom, and are long in the front-to-back direction. Each light-emitting display unit 892 has a through hole 892a formed in the mounting base 888 and a light-transmitting portion 892b fitted into this through hole 892a, and is designed to emit light using light from LEDs 893 from an LED board 894. The LED board 894 is arranged vertically elongated in correspondence with each light-emitting display unit 892, and both the top and bottom ends are attached to a hollow support 903 via buffer means 904.

The support body 903 is made of a synthetic resin having optical transparency, and integrally comprises a light-guiding wall 903a fixed to the inside of the mounting base 888, and a peripheral wall portion 903b that protrudes from the light-guiding wall 903a toward the LED board 894. The light-guiding wall 903a is provided with a light-transmitting portion 892b that protrudes integrally therewith. A recess is provided behind the light-transmitting portion 892b.

The buffer means 904 is for buffering vibrations caused by the vibration means 891 to prevent the vibrations from being transmitted to the LED board 894, and includes a pair of buffers 904a such as rubber arranged on both sides of the LED board 894, a mounting boss 904c that protrudes from bracket 904b on the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 903b and is inserted into the buffers 904a with the LED board 894 sandwiched between them, and a mounting fixture 904d that mounts the buffers 904a to the mounting boss 904c. By mounting the LED board 894 to the mounting base 888 through the buffer means 904 in this way, damage to the LED board 894 caused by the vibrations of the vibration means 891 can be prevented.

The touch sensor 895 is a capacitive or other type that detects when a player touches the conductor layer 890a of the performance body 890 and activates the air blowing performance means 855 for a specified period of time. This touch sensor 895 is fitted into a housing portion 895a that is integrally formed on the inside of the mounting base 888, and is electrically connected to the conductor layer 890a of the performance body 890 via a harness 895b.

As shown in FIG. 174, inside the upper protrusion 852, an air blowing effect means 855 is provided on the opposite side to the upper speaker 666b, and an air blowing port 905 is provided on the inner wall 857 to blow air from the air blowing effect means 855 toward the effect body 890. The air blowing effect means 855 has an air blowing means 906 such as a sirocco fan, and is detachably fixed to an attachment part 907 formed integrally with the second light guide plate 879. The second light guide plate 879 is provided with an air blowing passage 908 that connects the air discharge side of the air blowing means 906 with the air blowing port 905. The air blowing port 905 is provided with a net 909 to prevent the insertion of unauthorized materials.

The control unit of the air blowing effect means 855 is configured to operate the air blowing effect means 855 for a predetermined time in response to a signal from the touch sensor 895 when the touch sensor 895 detects that the player has touched the vibrating effect body 890. Note that the air blowing effect means 855 may stop blowing air when the touch sensor 895 detects this.

Figure 178 illustrates a ninth embodiment of the present invention. The right side protrusion 851 of the second side unit 850 can also be configured as shown in Figure 178. This second side unit 850 has a first light-emitting display unit 866 on the front wall 853 and a second light-emitting display unit 868 on the inner wall 856. The LED board 876 is positioned inside the right side protrusion 851, facing the front wall 853 and rearward of the second light-emitting display unit 868.

A first LED 871 for the first light-emitting display unit 866 and a second LED 873 for the second light-emitting display unit 868 are mounted on the front surface of the LED board 894. A light guide tube 910 is provided between the LED board 894 and the first light-emitting display unit 866 to prevent light from the first LED 871 from leaking outside the first light-emitting display unit 866.

The second LED 873 is disposed at the end of the LED board 876, and a light guide plate 922 is provided on the inside of the inner wall 856 in correspondence with this second LED 873. The inner wall 856 and the light guide plate 922 are inclined so that the front side faces the play area 323, and the light guide plate 922 is integrally provided with a light transmission portion 868b for the second light-emitting display unit 868, and a second light guide portion 883 such as a V-groove is provided on the opposite side to the light transmission portion 868b.

In this way, the LED board 894 can also be placed on the rear side inside the right protrusion 851. In that case, the first and second light-emitting display units 866, 868 are both on the front side of the LED board 894, so the first and second LEDs 871, 873 can be attached to the front surface of the LED board 894.

Figure 179 illustrates a tenth embodiment of the present invention. The right side protrusion 851 of the second side unit 850 can also be configured as shown in Figure 179. This second side unit 850 has a first light-emitting display unit 866 on the front wall 853 and a second light-emitting display unit 868 on the inner wall 856. The LED board 876 is disposed inside the right side protrusion 851, facing the second light-emitting display unit 868 on the inside of the inner wall 856 and approximately parallel to the inner wall 856, and a second LED 873 is attached to the second light-emitting display unit 868 side.

The first light-emitting display unit 866 of the front wall 853 is disposed forward of the LED board 876. A first LED 871 is attached to the front end of the LED board 876 on the side opposite the play area 323, and a light guide plate 923 that guides light from this first LED 871 to the first light-emitting display unit 866 side is disposed close to and parallel to the rear side of the front wall 853. The light guide plate 923 has a light guide portion 924 such as a V-groove.

In this way, the LED board 894 can be arranged inside the inner wall 856 inside the right protrusion 851. The inner wall 856 and the LED board 876 can be provided in an inclined manner, as in the ninth embodiment.

Figures 180 to 183 illustrate an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. As shown in Figures 180(a) to (d), this embodiment illustrates a case in which there are four types of second side units 850, A to D, from general-purpose models to dedicated models, and any one of the second side units 850 is attached to the front of the front door 306 to manufacture a specific type of pachinko machine 300.

As shown in FIG. 181, the second side unit 850 has a unit board 911 such as an LED board 894, and the unit board 911 is provided with an identification information storage unit 912 that stores the identification information of the second side unit 850. As shown in FIG. 183, the identification information storage unit 912 stores identification information that can individually identify the four types of models A to D. The identification information storage unit 912 is connected to a performance control board 914 via a relay board 913 on the main body side of the pachinko machine 300, etc.

In addition to controlling the effect images of normal play, the presentation control board 914 is equipped with a unique information storage unit 915 that stores unique information of the second side unit 850 to be attached to the front door 306 of the pachinko machine 300 of that model, and a comparison unit (determination unit) 916 that compares the unique information stored in the unique information storage unit 915 with the identification information stored in the identification information storage unit 912 to determine whether the second side unit 850 is appropriate, and when the comparison result indicates that the second side unit 850 is different, an error message for the second side unit 850 is displayed on the display screen of the image display means 917 of the game board 313.

By adopting such a configuration, for example, when installing the second side unit 850 after it has been removed for inspection in an amusement hall, it is possible to prevent the second side unit 850 from being installed incorrectly without being aware of the fact.

For example, when the pachinko machine 300 is powered on after the second side unit 850 is attached, the comparison unit 916 reads out the identification information of the second side unit 850 that is actually attached and compares it with the unique information stored in the unique information storage unit 915. If the second side unit 850 is different from the original, the image display means 917 displays an error message for the second side unit 850. This makes it possible to prevent a player from playing a game without knowing that the second side unit 850 is incorrect.

When various images are displayed on the display screen of the image display means 917, the priority of each layer 918-920 is set so that the later the layers are, the higher the priority, in the order of layer 918 for normal game images, layer 919 for normal error displays, and layer 920 for error displays of the second side unit 850, as shown in FIG. 184. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a display error in the second side unit 850 at the earliest stage after power is turned on.

Although the eighth to eleventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above in detail, the present invention is not limited to the eighth to eleventh embodiments, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the present invention. When a side unit 850 that protrudes forward from the side of the play area 323 is provided on the front of the gaming machine body, it is sufficient for the side unit 850 to have a greater width at the front than at the rear. Therefore, in this case, it is common to make the front width greater than the rear width by inclining or bulging toward the play area 323, but it is also possible to make it by inclining or bulging toward the opposite side of the play area 323.

It is preferable that the front side of the inner surface of the side unit 850 facing the play area 323 protrudes further inward toward the play area 323 than the rear side. The side unit 850 may have a vertically long right protrusion 851 and/or a horizontally long upper protrusion 852.

The LED board 876 may be disposed either in front or behind the light-emitting display unit 892. It is preferable that the LEDs corresponding to the light guide plate are disposed near the edge of the LED board 876, but if the light guide plate is curved, the LEDs corresponding to the light guide plate may be disposed in the middle part of the LED board 876. The light guide plate may be either colorless and transparent or colored and transparent.

Instead of the vibration type performance means 881, other movable performance means etc. can be provided. A light guide plate is generally used as the light guide means, but shapes other than the light guide plate may also be used.

34 Production button (operation means)
35 Cross operation means (operation means)
45 Base plate (playing member)
47 Central display frame unit (game component)
49 Big Winning Unit (Game Part)
53 First special symbol display means (symbol display means)
54 Second special symbol display means (symbol display means)
56 First special symbol start means (start means)
57 Second special symbol start means (start means)
60 Image display means 60a Display screen 74 Window frame portion (game member)
75a No. 1 34 Moving body (movable body)
76a Second movable body (movable body)
77a Third movable body (movable body)
78a Fourth movable body (movable body)
114: Performance pattern 114a: Pattern image 114b: Decorative image 116a: Volume adjustable notification image (notification image)
116b Light amount adjustment possible notification image (notification image)
117a: Volume setting image; 117b: Light amount setting image; 118a: Menu display possible notification image (notification image);
118b Menu image 120 Power saving mode notification image 138 Special start port check processing means (start detection processing means)
139 Special random number storage means (random number storage means)
142 Special profit state generating means (profit state generating means)
161 reserved base image 163 error notification image B1 first fixed concealed area (first display area)
B2 Second fixed concealment area (first display area)
B3: Third fixed concealed area (first display area)
B4 Fourth fixed concealment area (first display area)
B5 Fifth fixed concealed area (first display area)
C. Movable concealed area (second display area)
D. Non-hidden area (third display area)
X1 to 1st hold display image Y1 to 2nd hold display image 301 Outer frame (first support frame)
302 Front frame (second support frame)
313 Game board 323 Game area 347 Ball tank (frame side component)
353 LED connection board 388 Central display frame (center case)
391: Mounting frame 393: Image display means 394-397: Movable performance means 399: Harness receiving stand (back side holding means)
426 Front member 427 Rear member 453 Display means mounting portion 454 Bulging portion 462 Insertion/removal portion 467 Side circuit board mounting base (second member, rear side pressing means)
499 Fixed engagement portion (first member)
546, 562, 574 Movable performance body 547, 564, 575 Driving means 611 Guide rail 615 Missing portion 616 Regulating portion 617 Support portion 623 Pushing means 625 Pressing guide portion 300 Pachinko machine 301 Outer frame (first support frame)
302 Front frame (second support frame)
304 Locking means 306 Front door 310 Decorative member 311 Game board mounting section 313 Game board 322 Door base 323 Play area 328 Upper tray (shot ball storage section)
329 Lower tray (excess ball storage area)
331 Lower decorative cover 340 Glass unit 341 Vertical frame member 342 Vertical frame member 343 Upper horizontal frame member 344 Lower horizontal frame member 387 Guide rail 388 Center case 393 Image display means F Floor surface U Waiting position (raised position)
D Push-in position 645 First support portion 646 Second support portion 647 Front protrusions 666a, 666b Upper speakers 667a, 667b Lower speaker 668a First side unit 668b Second side unit 669 Front protruding unit (front protruding unit)
669a: Protrusion 670a, 670b: Protective cover 671a: Glass plate (visual plate)
671b Holding frame 688 Release operation means 689 Interlocking mechanism 690 Support plate 699 Tamper-proof edge portion 702a, 702b Speaker mounting protrusion 713 Internal space 715 Light guide 720 LED
721 LED board 722 Illuminating decorative cover 730 Upper protrusion 731 Unit frame 732 Unit reinforcing plate 733 First positioning means 734 Second positioning means 735-737 First to third locking means 738-740 First to third fixing means 738c-740c Fixing screws 744, 744a Illuminating display section 745 Air guide means 746 Air blowing means 752 Clamp means 782 First operation panel section 783 Second operation panel section 785 Operation means arrangement section 788a Ball lending operation means 788b Return operation means 788c Ball removal operation means 789 Cross operation means 791 Light amount adjustment means 791a Upper operation key 793 Bottom wall 793a Horizontal section 793b Inclined section 794 Front support section 795 Main body side support section 796a Island equipment 798 Peripheral cover 799c See-through section 800c Rear cover section 804 Anti-reflection means 804a Anti-reflection wall 805 Fixed support frame 806 First rotation support means 807 First rotating body (inner rotating body)
808 Second rotation support means 809 Second rotating body (outer rotating body)
810 Rotation driving means 810a Drive motor 813 Performance button (press operation body)
813a Operation unit 815 Vibration generating means 815a Vibrating body 815b Vibration motor 815d Eccentric weight 818 Insertion prevention means 819 Gear train 819a First driven gear 819b Second driven gear 819c Driving gear 819d Intermediate gear 824 Fixed support member 827 Reinforcing means 827a Reinforcing member 827c Pressing members 828a, 828b First position detection means 829 Second position detection means 831 Vibration transmission means 833 Operation detection means 835 Performance operation means 836 Illuminating operation member 836d LED board 838 Front guide means 839 Rear guide means 840 Shielding plate 850 Second side unit 851 Right side protrusion (left or right one side protrusion)
851a, 851b Left-right width 852 Upper protrusions 852a, 852b Top-bottom width 853, 854 Front wall 855 Wind effect means 856, 857 Inner wall 856a, 857a Inclined portions 856b, 857b Bulging portion 861 Reinforcing members 866, 867 First light-emitting display portions 868, 869 Second light-emitting display portions 870 Third light-emitting display portions 871, 872 First LED
873, 874 Second LED
875 3rd LED
876,877 LED board 878,879 Second light guide plate (second light guide means)
880 Third light guide plate (third light guide means)
881 vibration type performance means 894 LED board 902 energizing means 912 identification information storage unit 915 unique information storage unit 916 collating unit (determination unit)
917 Image display means

Claims (1)

A frame body having a viewing window through which the game area can be viewed;
an image display means capable of displaying an image on a display screen ;
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on an operation of a launching handle;
a performance execution means for executing a specific performance by performing a predetermined transformation process on the image displayed on the image display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The frame body includes a replaceable unit portion,
The play area is provided on the front side of the play board attached to the frame,
The game board includes a game member disposed in front of the display screen, and a movable body configured to be movable in front of the display screen and capable of stopping at a predetermined stop position including an origin position;
The display screen is composed of a first display area corresponding to the rear side of the play member when viewed from the front, a second display area corresponding to the rear side of the stop position of the movable body, and a third display area which is neither the first display area nor the second display area,
the second display area includes a specific second display area corresponding to a rear side of the origin position of the movable body,
A notice image regarding the reliability of the occurrence of a profit state can be displayed on the display screen,
The preview image is composed of a first display section indicating the reliability and a second display section indicating the reliability,
The first display unit is capable of being displayed in the third display area;
The second display section is capable of displaying across the specific second display area and the third display area,
The image display means is capable of displaying a launch guidance image indicating whether it is more advantageous for a player to aim at a leftward flow path or a rightward flow path in the game area according to a game state;
The launch guidance image includes a figure indicating one of the left flow-down path and the right flow-down path,
For a specific image having transformation information indicating that a predetermined transformation process is to be performed among images not including the launch guidance image, the predetermined transformation process is performed;
The predetermined transformation process is not performed on non-specific images including the launch guidance image,
the effect execution means has a primary buffer area and a frame buffer area as areas for drawing the image to be displayed on the image display means, and is configured to execute a first drawing process for drawing an image to be subjected to the predetermined transformation process via the primary buffer area when the specific effect is executed , and execute a second drawing process for drawing an image not to be subjected to the predetermined transformation process when the specific effect is executed , depending on whether the predetermined transformation process is executed or not,
The specific image is stored in the primary buffer area, and then the first rendering process is executed to render the specific image in the frame buffer area by performing the predetermined transformation process based on vertex coordinate information and rotation angle information when the specific performance is executed .
The gaming machine is characterized in that, for the non-specific image, a second drawing process is executed in which the image is drawn into the frame buffer area without going through the primary buffer area and without performing the specified transformation process when the specific performance is executed.